Manual 601492

v. 1.
01
SYNCHRONOUS ALTERNATOR
PACIFICA RUBIALES
Serial number 601492
Type LSA60 115

Power 9194 kVA
Voltage 13800 V
Power factor 0,8
Frequency 60 Hz
Speed 720 rpm
ALTERNATORS
Service & Operating Manual
LEROY SOMER Service & Operating Manual SECTION 0
ALTERNATORS
CONTENTS
VOLUME CONTENTS
SECTION 0 VOLUME CONTENTS

WARNING
SECTION 1 Generator Data Sheet

Spare Parts List
SECTION 2 TEST REPORT

(AVR Settings)
SECTION 3 Service & Operating Manual
SECTION 4 Automatic Voltage Regulator
SECTION 5 Drawings
Dedicated manuals for specific equipement
ALTERNATORS
Generator Data Sheet
SECTION 1
Generator Data Sheet

Spare Parts List
LEROY SOMER Service and Operating Manual SECTION 1
Generator unit
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. MACHINE TECHNICAL DATA
1.1 General characteristics
1.2 Excitation - Regulation
1.3 Stator protections
1.4 Not applicable
1.5 Not applicable
1.6 Sleeve bearing technical data
1.7 Drive end bearing Protection
1.8 Non drive end bearing Protection
1.9 Oil circulating system
1.10 Not applicable
2. SPARE PARTS
2.1 To order spare parts
2.2 Recommanded spare parts

Generator unit
1. MACHINE TECHNICAL DATA
1.1 General characteristics

Project PACIFICA RUBIALES
Type LSA60 115 Engine drive
Serial Nr 601492
Synchronous Triphased
Connections Star
Rated output 8500 KVA
Voltage 13800 V
Frequency 60 Hz
Power Factor 0.8
Polarity 10p
Speed 720 RPM
Machine protection IP23
Inlet and outlet filters Inlet and outlet filters
Terminal box protection IP 55
Insulation H
Temperatue rise B
Generator air gap 8.5 mm
Exciter air gap 2 mm
Ambient temperature 50 °C
Cooling IC0A1
Weight of rotor 15730 Kg
Total weight 38440 Kg
1.2 Excitation - Regulation

Excitation Brushless
AVR type shunt
1.3 Stator protections

Space heater (W) 2000
under(V) 220
Stator winding sensor 6 x Pt100
Generator unit
1.6 Sleeve bearing technical data

Drive Non drive
End side End side
Type EFZLK 28-280 EFZLQ 28-280
Seal type Renk n° 10 Renk n° 10
Cooling / Lubrication (*1) Oil circulation (gravity return) Oil circulation (gravity return)
Axial clearance, bearing type Locating Non locating

Axial clearance (mm) 0.52
Diametral clearance (mm) 0.392 0.392
Oil type ISO VG 46 ISO VG 46
losses (kW) 3.6 2.6
Oil sump capacity (l) 34 34
Bearing shell temperature (°C) 62.9 52
Oil film thickness (mm) 0.047 0.049
Refrigerant flow rate (l/min) 9 7
Accuracy of flow rate regulation (weak) ; +0% -40% (weak) ; +0% -40%
Inlet temperature (°C) 40 40
Attitude angle (beta ; °) 40.4 41.5
Rotation Clock Wise
Shaft displacement "X" -0.09 (Refer to chapter 4.3)
Shaft displacement "Y" 0.08 (Refer to chapter 4.3)
1.7 Drive end bearing Protection

Oil sump sensor 1x Pt100
1.8 Non drive end bearing Protection

Oil sump sensor 1x Pt100
Generator unit
2. SPARE PARTS
2.1 To order spare parts

1-Identify the machine Serial Number
on the name plate (eg : 71 155 513)
2- Identify the part number using the attached
drawings and give a description
2.2 Recommanded spare parts

Rotating diodes 6 SKN 240/16
Automatic Voltage Régulator 1 DECS 200
Shell 1 E.ZLK 28-280
Date : LS Reference : Pacifica Rubiales 1
27-Aug-10
Customer : CPGS 1
Project : Pacifica Rubiales 1
Moteurs Leroy Somer Tel. : +49 431 70 53 851 Author : P$ 1
ACEO Fax: +49 431 719 75 33
1 rue de la burelle phillip.sewell@t-online.de Pacifica Rubiales 1
45800 St Jean de Braye - France Phillip Sewell
Subject: V3.20 - 06/2010
Site : Colombia Prime mover : Diesel engine 1
Application : Base Rating Manufacturer : Caterpillar 1
Type : 16 CM 32 1
Main data: Quantity

Generator type: LSA 60 B 115 / 10p 9 1
Power: 9,194 kVA 7,355 kWe 7,582 kWm 1
Voltage: 13800V Star connection ± 5% Nominal curent: 385 A 1
Power factor: 0,8 1
Frequency: 60 Hz Speed: 720 rpm 1
Winding pitch : p5/6 Ambient: 40 °C 1
Insulation / Temperature rise : H/F Altitude: 1000 m 1
Electrical data:
Efficiency: 110% 100% 75% 50% 25%
Power factor 0,8: 97,1 % 97,0 % 96,6 % 95,7 % 92,9 % 1
Power factor 1,0: 97,6 % 97,6 % 97,2 % 96,2 % 93,1 % 1
Reactances Unsaturated, (rated KVA): (%) time constants:

SCR: Xd Xq X'd X'q X"d X"q X2 Xo T'do T'd T''d Ta
0,66 151 91 28,7 91 17,3 21,6 19,5 0,1 2,8 0,532 0,028 0,094 1
Saturated, (rated KVA): (%) Seconds
Ra (%) Xds Xqs X'ds X'qs X"ds X"qs X2s Xo T''do T'q T"q T''qo
0,5 152 91 24,4 91 14,7 18,4 16,5 0,1 0,046 NA 0,025 0,106 1
Mounting : IM1101 1
Mounting : Two bearing Axis : horizontal 1
Rotation : Clockwise (seen when facing the D-end) 1
Bearing type: anti friction bearing - Regreasable 1
Bearing insulation : Not insulated 1
Shaft end : Standard bare keywayed 1
Balancing : Half key / balancing class : G2,5 (std) 1
Flange : None / without 1
Shaft height : mm / Width : mm 1
Axial clearance : Standard 1
Comments: 1
-
Cooling : IC01 1
Protection : IP23 1
Cooler : Coolant : Air / Temperature : 40 °C 1
Air quality : Clean 1
Ventilation (internal) : Self vent. 1
Filter : without filter 1
Ducting (I / O) : No 1
Comments: 1
Pacifica Rubiales rev. 1 Page 1 Comm - Ordo - Tech - Elec - Essa - Mont - Expe - Agen
27-Aug-10
Customer : CPGS 1
-
Connection & regulation: Radio int. suppression: Class N 1
Parallel operation : With mains (2F) 1
Type of excitation: Shunt with booster Nota: CT&VT for regulation supplied 1
Sustained three phase short circuit : greater than 3 x FLC for 10 seconds 1
AVR type: DECS200 (For panel mounting) AVR not supplied by LS 1
Voltage sensing : Terminal box mounted voltage sensing VTs / 1
Comments: 1
-
Protection and measurement accessories 1
With guide bearing sensor : = 1 X PT100 per bearing 1
With Winding sensors : = 6 x PT100 1
With Anti-condensation heater : Voltage : 230 V / 1Ph / Power : 2000 W 1
Comments:
1
LS Supply 1
Set of measuring or protection CTs: I Primary (A) I Secondary (A) Power (VA) Class
S1 500 5 20 5P20 1
Preliminary S2 500 5 20 0,5FS5 1
Neutral side S3 1
S1 1
Preliminary S2 1
Line side S3 1
Comments:
1
LS Supply 1
Set of Voltage measuring VTs: U Primary (V) U Secondary (V) Power (VA) Class
S1 1
Preliminary S2 1
Line side S3 1
Comments:
1
-
Terminal box :
Power connection : 3 connectors (internal neutral) 1
Line side outlet : Right hand side (viewed from drive end) 1
Gland plate : Non magnetic 1
Comments: 1
-
Various items :
mounting of half couping supplied by the client ref 1
Overspeed : 864 rpm / Duration (min.) : 2 1
Requested noise level : 1
Vibration level : 1
Comments: 1
Paint : C3L - Primary - RAL 7032 1
Documentation : PDF manual Language : anglais 1
Comments: 1
27-Aug-10
Customer : CPGS 1
-
Controls :
Rules : CEI 1
QUAL/INES/006 001 Measurement of winding resistance 1
QUAL/INES/006 021 Insulation check on sensors (when fitted) 1
QUAL/INES/006 002 Voltage balance and phase order check 1
QUAL/INES/006 003 No load characteristics, no load losses 1
QUAL/INES/006 004 Three phase short circuit characteristic 1
QUAL/INES/006 005 On load test (subject to test bench capacity) 1
QUAL/INES/006 007 Overspeed test 1
QUAL/INES/006 008 Calculation of efficiency by summation of losses 1
QUAL/INES/006 009 High potential test 1
QUAL/INES/006 010 Insulation resistance measurement 1
1
-
Performances :
Voltage accuracy : 0,5%
Maximum inrush current for a voltage dip of 15% : 6281 kVA
when starting an AC motor having a starting power factor between 0 and 0.4
#REF! LS Reference : Pacifica Rubiales 1
27-Aug-10
Customer : CPGS
Project : Pacifica Rubiales
Moteurs Leroy Somer V3.20 - 06/2010 Author : P$
ACEO
1 rue de la burelle Pacifica Rubiales
45800 St Jean de Braye - France #####
LSA 60 B 115 / 10p - 9194 - 13800V - 720 rpm
Capability Curve
kWe / rated kVA
0,8 p.f. 0,9 p.f. 0,944 p.f. 0,9 p.f. 0,875 p.f. 0,8 p.f.
0,7 p.f.
1 0,7 p.f.
0,9
0,8
0,6 p.f. 0,6 p.f.
0,7
0,5 p.f. 0,6

0,5 p.f.
0,5
0,4 p.f. 0,4 p.f.
0,4
0,3 p.f. 0,3 p.f.
0,3
0,2 p.f. 0,2 0,2 p.f.
0,1 p.f. 0,1 0,1 p.f.
0
-1 -0,8 -0,6 -0,4 -0,2 0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1
kVAr / rated kVA
Efficiency curves.
98
Efficiency - Rendement en %
97
96
95
94
93
92
91 PF 1
PF 0,8
90
25% 50% 75% 100%
Load - Charge - % of rated electrical kW
Pacifica Rubiales rev. 1 Page 1

27-Aug-10
Customer : CPGS
ACEO
LSA 60 B 115 / 10p - 9194 - 13800V - 720 rpm
Stator current decrement curves Symmetrical phase to neutral short circuit
Isc (Per unit - rms) Symmetrical two phase short circuit

8 Symmetrical three phase short circuit
short circuit at generator terminals
7 Heat damage curve
0
0,001 0,01 0,1 1 10 100
Time (sec)
Stator current
(per rated current)
Thermal Damage C urve
3
2,5
1,5
1
10 1 00 1 00 0 1 00 00
Ma ximum du ra tion (se co nds )

27-Aug-10
Customer : CPGS
ACEO
LSA 60 B 115 / 10p - 9194 - 13800V - 720 rpm
Transient voltage dip curve versus load impact

40%
35%
30%
Voltage dip - (% of rated voltage)
25%
20%
15%
10%
5%
PF = 0
PF = 0,8
0%
0,0 0,4 0,8 1,2 1,6 2,0
Inrush - Appel de charge - % of rated kVA
Transient voltage rise curve versus load rejection

25%
20%
Voltage rise - (% of rated voltage)
15%
10%
5%
PF = 0,8
0%
0,00 0,25 0,50 0,75 1,00 1,25 1,50
kVA shedding at P.F. - % of rated kVA

27-Aug-10
Customer : CPGS
ACEO
LSA 60 B 115 / 10p - 9194 - 13800V - 720 rpm

Negative phase seq uen ce
Unbalanced Load C urve
current (per rated current)
3
0
1 10 10 0 10 00 1 00 00
M ax imu m d uration of fa ult (se con ds)
Fault Cu rren t
(A)
Phase to Earth Fault Current
75
C : Extensive dam age

B : Considerable d amage
A : Acceptable damage
50
C
B
25
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Ma ximum du ra tion of fau lt (s ec ond s)

ALTERNATORS
TEST REPORT
SECTION 2
TEST REPORT
(AVR Settings)
ALTERNATORS
SECTION 3

2327 en – 07.2009 / m
ALTERNATOR
LEROY SOMER SERVICE AND OPERATING MANUAL 2327 en – 07.2009 / m
ALTERNATORS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.3.3 Maintenance of antifriction bearings

1. GENERAL INFORMATION a) General points
b) Lubricant
c) Cleaning bearings
1.1 INTRODUCTION 2.3.4 Servicing the antifriction bearings
1.1.0 General points a) General points
1.1.1 Safety notes b) Removing the bearings
1.1.2 Conditions of use c) Bearing reassembly
a) Generalities 2.3.5 Antifriction bearing protection devices
b) Vibratory analysis 2.3.9 Antifriction bearing installation drawing
1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 2.4 SLEEVE BEARINGS (Plain)

1.2.1 Generator 2.4.0 Description of horizontal Sleeve bearings
1.2.2 Excitation system a) Physical description
b) Operating description of Self-lubricating
2. DESCRIPTION OF SUB-ASSEMBLIES bearing
c) Operating description of Oil circulation bearing
2.4.1 Electrical insulation of Sleeve bearings
2.1 STATOR a) Illustration diagram of the insulating film
2.1.1 Electric machine armature b) Insulation check
a) Mechanical description 2.4.2 Storage of Sleeve bearings machine
2.1.2 Excitation field winding a) General points
2.1.3 Stator protection b) Short term storage
a) Heating resistor c) Long term storage
b) Stator winding temperature sensor 2.4.3 Oil circulation installation
c) Stator air sensor 2.4.4 Start-up of Sleeve bearings
d) Stator vibration sensor a) General check before start up
b) Self-lubricating bearings start up data
c) Water cooled bearing (type EFW..) start up
2.2 ROTOR
data
2.2.1 Revolving field-coil
d) Oil circulation bearing with non-accurate oil
2.2.2 Excitation armature
flow (+0% ; -40%)
2.2.3 Fan (machines: IC 0 A1)
e) Oil circulation bearing with accurate oil flow
2.2.4 Rotating diode bridge
(+5% ; -10%)
a) General points
f) Inspection of Sleeve bearings at the end of
b) Tightening torque for the rotating diode
start-up
fastening screws
2.4.5 Maintenance of Sleeve bearings
c) Rotating rectifier test
a) Verification of oil-level
2.2.5 Balancing
b) Temperature verification
2.2.6 Rotor vibration sensor
c) Oil draining
d) Pressure measurement of a Sleeve bearing
2.3 ANTI FRICTION-BEARINGS housing
(rolling bearing) e) Oil for sleeve bearing
2.3.0 Description of antifriction bearings f) Oil sump capacity
2.3.1 Start-up of antifriction bearings g) Sealing Compound
2.3.2 Storage of machine with anti friction
bearings
3
ALTERNATORS
2.4.6 Dismantling
a) Tools and equipment
b) Lifting equipment 2.7 COOLER
c) Dismantling of the shaft seal type 10 (outboard 2.7.0 Description of the cooler
side) a) General points
d) Dismantling of the shaft seal type 20 (outboard b) Description of AIR-AIR coolers
side) c) Description of AIR-WATER DOUBLE TUBE
e) Dismantling of the top half of the housing EXCHANGER
f) Removal of the top half of the shell d) Description of AIR / WATER SINGLE TUBE
g) Dismantling of the loose oil ring EXCHANGER
h) Dismantling the machine side shaft seal 2.7.1 Cooler installation
i) Removal of the bottom half of the shell 2.7.2 Start-up of the cooler
j) Dismantling of the machine seal a) General points
2.4.7 Cleaning and checking 2.7.3 Maintenance of the water-cooler
a) Cleaning a) General points
b) Wear checking b) Cleaning
c) Insulation checking (only for insulated bearing) c) Leak detection for a double-tube exchanger
2.4.8 Assembly of the Bearing 2.7.4 Servicing the water-cooler
a) Fitting in the bottom half of the shell a) Cooler removal
b) Assembly of the shaft seal machine-side b) Cooler re-assembly
c) Installation of the loose oil ring 2.7.5 Cooler protection devices
d) Fitting in the top half of the shell a) Leak detection (float system)
e) Closing of the bearing b) Water temperature sensor
f) Assembly of the type 10 Outboard Side Seals c) Water filtering
g) Assembly of the type 20 Outboard Side Seals
h) Assembly of the RD-thrust pads ; bearing type
E...A 2.8 AIR FILTERS
2.4.9 Oil-leakage trouble-shooting 2.8.1 Cleaning
a) Self-lubricating bearing a) Air filter cleaning period
b) Oil circulation bearing b) Air filter cleaning procedure
2.4.10 Sleeve bearing protection devices
a) Sight-level glass 2.18 TERMINAL BOX
b) Oil thermometer 2.18.0 Description
c) Thermostat or sensor 2.18.1 Electric panel
d) Pre lub pump a) Compounding panel ( if compound regulator)
b) Booster plate ( if shunt regulator)
2.6 OIL CIRCULATION LUBRICATING UNIT 2.18.2 Automatic voltage regulator
2.6.0 General points 2.18.3 Electrical contact tightening
2.6.1 Oil circulation by gravity return
a) General points 2.19 PROTECTION DEVICES
b) Supply line 2.19.1 Stator protection devices
c) gravity oil return 2.19.2 Bearing protection devices
2.6.2 Oil cooling unit Air/Oil exchanger 2.19.3 Cooler protection devices
2.6.3 Oil cooling unit Water/Oil exchanger
2.20 NAMEPLATES
2.20.1 Main nameplate
2.20.2 Lubrication nameplate
2.20.3 Rotation direction nameplate
4
ALTERNATORS
3. VOLTAGE REGULATOR AND EXTERNAL 5. START-UP

AUXILIARIES
5.0 START-UP SEQUENCE
4. INSTALLATION 5.0.1 Static checks
5.0.2 Rotating checks
a) Rotating checks not excited
4.1 TRANSPORT AND STORAGE b) Rotating checks at no load excited
4.1.1 Transport c) Generator and site safeties
4.1.2 Storage warehouse d) Rotating checks at full load
4.1.3 Maritime packing 5.0.3 Generator Start Up check list
4.1.4 Unpacking and installation
4.1.5 Storage measures of a site machine
5.1 ELECTRICAL START-UP INSPECTION
5.1.0 General points
4.2 INSTALLATION OF THE ELECTRIC 5.1.1 Windings Insulation
MACHINE 5.1.2 Electrical connections
4.2.1 Fitting the coupling (double-bearing 5.1.3 Parallel operation
machine only) a) Definition of parallel operation
4.2.2 Fitting the stator b) Possibility of parallel operation
c) Parallel coupling
4.3 ELECTRIC MACHINE ALIGNMENT
4.3.1 Various alignment characteristics 5.2 MECHANICAL START-UP INSPECTION
a) General points 5.2.0 General points
b) Axis height Thermal elevation a) Alignment; fixing; prime mover
c) Sleeve bearing shaft elevation b) Cooling
d) Antifriction bearing shaft elevation c) Lubrication
4.3.2 Two bearings machine alignment 5.2.1 Vibrations
a) machines without axial end play (standard)
b) machines with axial end play 6. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
4.3.3 Single bearing machine alignment
a) General points
b) Single bearing machine except A56 equipped 6.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
with anti friction bearing
c) Single bearing machine A56 Anti friction-
6.2 MECHANICAL MAINTENANCE
bearing, only
6.2.1 Air gap check
4.3.4 Alignment procedure a) Double bearing machine
a) Checking "Double concentricity" alignment b) Single bearing machine
method 6.2.2 Bolts tightening
6.2.3 Cleanliness
4.4 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
4.4.0 General points 6.3 ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE
4.4.1 Phase-sequence 6.3.1 Measuring instruments
a) standard machine.IEC 34-8 a) Instruments used
b) if wanted, NEMA. b) Identification of ohmmeter polarity
4.4.2 Insulating distances 6.3.2 Insulation check of the winding
4.4.3 Added products in the terminal box a) General
b) Armature insulation measure
c) Field insulation measurement
d) Exciter insulation measurement
e) Polarisation index
5
ALTERNATORS
7. SERVICING
7.1 GENERAL SERVICING
7.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING

7.2.1 Regulator trouble-shooting procedure
7.3 ELECTRICAL TESTS

7.3.1 Stator winding test
7.3.2 Rotor winding test
7.3.3 Excitation armature winding test
7.3.4 Excitation field winding test
7.3.5 Rotating diode bridge test
7.3.6 Electric panel test
7.4 CLEANING THE WINDINGS

7.4.1 Coil-cleaning product
a) general
b) Cleaning products
7.4.2 Cleaning the stator, rotor, excitation and
diodes
a) using specific chemical product
b) Rinsing using soft water
7.5 DRYING THE WINDING

7.5.1 Drying method
a) General points
b) Drying generator stop
c) Drying generator in rotation
7.6 RE-VARNISHING
10. FOLDOUT
6
ALTERNATORS
1. GENERAL INFORMATION 1.1.2 Conditions of use

a) Generalities
1.1 INTRODUCTION A machine must only be installed, operated, by specifically
trained persons.
1.1.0 General points Any technical engineer who operate, maintain this machine
This manual provides installation, operating and must be allowed to practice in regard with local working
maintenance instructions for synchronous machines. It laws (eg: to be certified to operate on high voltage devices
…)
also describes the basic construction of these machines.
This manual is general ; it applies to an entire group of A machine can only be operated for the duty foreseen by
synchronous generators. Additionally, in order to make its original tender.
information-finding easier, Section 1, "Characteristics and The main data of this machine are summarized in "Section
Performance", has been included, describing the machine 1" of this manual
completely (type of construction, type of bearing, Any operating condition other than those specified by the
protection index, and so forth...); this will enable you to original tender must receive a Leroy Somer agreement
determine exactly the chapters which apply to your
Any modification of the machine structure must receive a
machine.
Leroy Somer agreement
This synchronous machine has been designed for a
maximum length of service. To achieve this, it is necessary b) Vibratory analysis
to pay special attention to the chapter concerning the It is the responsibility of the gen set manufacturer to
periodic maintenance schedule for the machines. ensure that the different assembled system will be
vibratory compatible.(ISO 8528-9)
1.1.1 Safety notes It is the responsibility of the gen set manufacturer to
ensure that the shaft line torsional analysis has been done
The warnings "DANGER, CAUTION, NOTE" are used to
and accepted by the different parties (ISO 3046)
draw the user’s attention to different points:
CAUTION :
DANGER :
EXCEEDING THE VIBRATORY LEVEL ALLOWED BY
THIS WARNING IS USED WHEN AN OPERATION,
THE STANDARD ISO 8528-9 MAY CREATE HEAVY
PROCEDURE, OR USE MAY CAUSE PERSONAL
DAMAGES (BEARING DAMAGE, STRUCURE CRACKS
INJURY OR LOSS OF LIFE
…).
EXCEEDING THE TORSIONAL VIBRATORY LEVEL OF
CAUTION : THE SHAFT LINE (ex: ABS, LLOYD …) MAY CREATE
THIS WARNING IS USED WHEN AN OPERATION, HEAVY DAMAGES (CRANKSHAFT FAILURE ,
PROCEDURE, OR USE MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO OR GENERATOR SHAFT FAILURE, …)
DESTRUCTION OF EQUIPMENT
Refer to chapter 2.1.3 for further information about the
NOTE : accepted vibration level of the standard ISO 8528-9
This warning is used when an operation, procedure, or
delicate installation requires clarification.
7
ALTERNATORS
1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.2.1 Generator
The synchronous generator is an alternating-current
machine, without rings or brushes. The machine is cooled
by the flow of air through the machine.
For a batter comprehension, use the drawings of chapter
10.
1.2.2 Excitation system

The excitation system is mounted on the side opposite the
coupling.
The excitation system comprises two assemblies:
The excitation armature, generating a three-phase current,
coupled with the three-phase rectifier bridge (comprised of
six diodes) supplies the excitation current to the generator
revolving field. The excitation armature and the rectifier
bridge are mounted on the synchronous generator rotor
shaft and are interconnected electrically with the revolving
field of the machine.
The excitation field winding (stator) is supplied by the
control (in direct current)
5 1
3
4 2
1- Excitation field winding

2- Excitation armature
3- Rotating diode bridge
4- Revolving field
5- Machine stator
8
ALTERNATORS
To improve the machine protection the alarm set point may
2. DESCRIPTION OF SUB-ASSEMBLIES be reduced following effective site information:
Alarm temperature (*) = Highest recorded temp + 10°K
Trip temperature (*) = Alarm temperature + 5 °K
2.1 STATOR (*) do not pass over the values of the previous chart.
(*)Highest recorded temp: Temperature measured at
2.1.1 Electric machine armature the site in the worst temperature condition at the stator
temperature sensor
a) Mechanical description
The machine stator comprises low-loss steel laminations, E.g. : a class B machine reached 110°C during a facto ry
assembled under pressure. The steel laminations are heat run test. Set the alarm temperature to 120°C in stead
blocked axially by a welded ring. The stator coils are of 130°C as indicated in the previous chart. Set the
inserted and blocked in the slots, then impregnated with emergency shutdown to 115°C instead of 135°C as
varnish, and polymerised to ensure maximum resistance to indicated in the previous chart.
mould, excellent dielectric rigidity and perfect mechanical
linking. c) Stator air sensor
As an option an RTD or thermostat can measure the stator
air inlet temperature (cold air)
2.1.2 Excitation field winding
The excitation field winding comprises a solid element and Stator air inlet temperature; Alarm points and shutdown:
a winding. • alarm Nominal air inlet stator + 5 K
• shutdown 80°C
The excitation is flanged on the rear end shield of the
machine. Stator air outlet temperature; Alarm points and shutdown:
• alarm Nominal air inlet stator + 35K
The winding is made of enamelled copper wires. • shutdown Nominal air inlet stator + 40K
NOTE :
2.1.3 Stator protection For an open drip proof machine the nominal air
temperature entering the stator corresponds to the ambiant
a) Heating resistor
temperature
The heating element avoids internal condensation during Inhibit the stator air sensor safety "alarm" for few seconds
the shutdown periods. It is connected to the main terminal during the machine start up;
box strip. The heating resistor is switched on as soon as
the machine is shut down. It is located at the back end of NOTE:
the machine. For a water cooled machine (CACW) the nominal air
entering the stator may be approximated as following:
The electrical characteristics are provided in Section 1 Tair entering stator = Twater entering cooler + 15°K
"Technical Characteristics".
b) Stator winding temperature sensor

The temperature sensors are located in the active part of
the stack. They are located in the zone assumed to be the
hottest part of the machine. The sensors are connected to
a terminal box.
Depending on the temperature rise of the machine, the
temperature of the sensors should not exceed a maximum
of :
TEMP. RISE ALARM TRIP
class
Power (KVA) < 5000 > 5000 < 5000 > 5000
B 130 °C 125 °C 135 °C 130 °C
F 150 °C 145 °C 155 °C 150 °C
H 170 °C 170 °C 175 °C 175 °C
9
ALTERNATORS
d) Stator vibration sensor

This chapter concerns the setting of seismic probes. For
setting of proximity probes refer to the rotor chapter
The vibration level of the machines is directly linked to the
duty and to the site characteristics.
We propose the following adjustment:
Vibration Alarm (*) = Site Highest Vibration level + 50%
Vibration Trip = Vibration Alarm + 50%
2.2.2 Excitation armature
(*) do not pass over the values of the following chart
The excitation armature is constructed by stacking
The machines are engineered to be able to withstand the magnetic steel laminations. These steel laminations are
vibration level indicated by the standard ISO8528-9 held in place by rivets.
Engine speed Power Vibration level The excitation coil is keyed and heat-shrunk onto the shaft.
( RPM) ( kVA ) (mm/s ; RMS) The windings are enamelled copper wires, class "F"
Engine Generator insulation (or "H", depending on the customer's request or
size of the machine).
1300 to 2199 > 250 < 45 < 20
721 to 1299 ≥ 250 < 45 < 20 2.2.3 Fan (machines: IC 0 A1)
> 1250 < 45 < 18 The synchronous machine is characterized by a self-
ventilation system. A centrifugal fan is mounted between
≤ 720 > 1250 < 45 < 15
the revolving field coil and the front bearing.
< 10 (*) Air intake is at the rear of the machine and the exhaust on
(*) generator on concrete base the drive end side.
The fan consists of a hub, which is keyed and heat-shrunk
onto the shaft. The flange is made of welded steel,
2.2 ROTOR attached to the hub with hexagonal head-cap screws. The
ventilation effect is obtained through welded, inclined
2.2.1 Revolving field-coil blades. The air exhaust is effected radially.
The revolving field coil comprises a stack of steel
laminations, stamped and cut to reproduce the indentation 2.2.4 Rotating diode bridge
of the projecting poles.
a) General points
The steel lamination stack-up is terminated at each end
with high-conductivity electrical plates. The rectifier bridge, comprising six diodes, is placed at the
rear of the machine. The rotating bridge is made of glass
To enable parallel operation between machines, and in fibre with a printed circuit to connect the diodes together.
order to ensure stability, high electrical conductivity bars This bridge is supplied with alternating current by the
are inserted in holes crossing the poles from one side to excitation armature and supplies direct current to the
the other. These bars are welded with the stack end revolving field-coil. The diodes are protected against over
laminations in order to obtain a complete cage winding (or voltage by rotating resistors, or by varistors. These
LEBLANC dampening cage). resistors (or varistors) are mounted in parallel with the
The winding (B) is placed around the pole (A) and is revolving field-coil.
impregnated with epoxy resin (class F machine insulation)
or with varnish (class H machine insulation). 2
The winding is made of insulated flattened copper with
high electrical conductivity. 1 + 3
The aluminium plates (E) are pressed against the winding,
acting as a heat dissipator and ensure excellent clamping
of these coils.
Support bars (C) on each pole protect the end windings
against the centrifugal force. -
The revolving field-coil is heated and shrunk onto the shaft. 1 - Field
2 - Rotating resistors
3 - Exciter armature
10
ALTERNATORS
The inner and outer rings are connected to the revolving
c) Rotating rectifier test
field-coil
Carry out the test using a D.C. source as indicated below.
1 A diode in good condition should allow the current to flow
only in the anode-to-cathode direction.
Disconnect the diodes before the test.
2 3 ... 48 volts
- +
1 2
1 - Outer ring
2 - Inner ring 1 - Anode
The diode fastening screws must be tightened to the 2 - Cathode
correct torque.
b) Tightening torque for the rotating diode fastening Diode type Positive Negative
screws
SKR diode housing diode wire
CAUTION :
THE ROTATING DIODE FASTENING SCREWS MUST SKN diode wire diode housing
BE TIGHTENED USING A TORQUE WRENCH
CALIBRATED TO THE RECOMMENDED TORQUE. When reassembling ensure that the diodes are be
tightened to the correct torque
Diode Tightening torque
SKR 100/.. 1.5 m.daN 2.2.5 Balancing
The entire rotor has been balanced according to ISO8221
SKR 130/.. 1.5 m.daN
standard in order to obtain a residual imbalance less than :
SKN 240/.. 3 m.daN Gen set : Class G2.5
Turbine : Class G1
The balancing is carried out at two levels. The first is that
of the fan. It is recommended, when the fan is refitted
(after servicing) to respect the initial indexing.
The second is that of the shaft end. The shaft end is cold-
stamped to indicate the type of balancing.
H : balancing with Half-key carried out as
standard
F : balancing with Full key
N : balancing without key (None)
The coupling must be balanced to fit the generator rotor
balancing.
2.2.6 Rotor vibration sensor

This chapter concerns the setting of proximity probes. For
setting of seismic probes refer to the stator chapter
The vibration level of the machines is directly linked to the
duty and to the site characteristics.
We propose the following adjustment:
Vibration Alarm (*) = 50% of the Bearing shell gap
Vibration Trip = 75% of the Bearing shell gap
11
ALTERNATORS
2.3.3 Maintenance of antifriction bearings

2.3 ANTI FRICTION-BEARINGS
a) General points
2.3.0 Description of antifriction bearings Antifriction bearings or ball bearings do not require special
The bearings are installed at each end of the machine. maintenance.
They can be replaced. They must be lubricated regularly with the same type of
The bearings are protected from external dust by labyrinth grease as used in the factory. For information concerning
seals. the lubrication quantity and interval, refer to Section 1 :
The bearings must be lubricated regularly. The old grease "Characteristics and Performance".
is forced out at the lower part of the bearings by the force CAUTION :
of the new grease being injected.
LUBRICATION MUST BE CARRIED OUT AT LEAST
EVERY 6 MONTHS
2.3.1 Start-up of antifriction bearings
The bearings are pre-lubricated in the factory, but before CAUTION :
they are put into service, it is necessary to complete this IT MUST BE DANGEROUS TO MIX GREASES WHICH
lubrication. HAVE DIFFERENT SOAP BASE. IT IS NECESSARY TO
GET THE GREASE SUPPLIER APPROVAL OR TO
CAUTION CLEAN THE BEARING BEFOREHANDNOTE :
UPON START-UP, GREASE THE MACHINE WHILE IT IS
RUNNING SO AS TO FILL ALL THE FREE SPACES IN
THE GREASING DEVICE
NOTE:
Record the temperature of the bearings during the initial After a regreasing the bearing temperature may increase
operating hours. Poor lubrication can cause abnormal of 10 to 20°C
heating. This temporary temperature increase may stay few tens of
hours
If the bearing hisses, lubricate it immediately. Some
bearings may make a clattering noise if they do not
NOTE:
operate at normal temperature. This may occur if the
For re greasing period lower than 2000 hours we
weather is very cold or when the machine is operating
recommend to install a continuous greasing system to limit
under abnormal temperature conditions (start-up phase,
the maintenance operators visit
for example). The bearings will become quieter after
These type of system must be disable during machine stop
having reached their normal operating temperature.
The grease contained in these systems must not be stored
over a period of 1 year
2.3.2 Storage of machine with anti friction bearings
This chapter must be taken in consideration if a machine is b) Lubricant
stopped more than 6 months. Recommended lubricant: SKF LGWA2 or SHELL
Grease the bearings , machine stopped , inject two time RETINAX LX2 (lithium complex base).
the grease volume used for a standard maintenance. Recommendation for a grease choice ::
Every 6 months turn the the machine shaft line of few Mineral oil or PAO (SHC)
turns. Then inject a standard grease volume Base (soap ) grade NLGI 2
Lithium complex base
Base oil viscosity 100 to 200 mm2/s
Dye penetration test (DIN 51817) : 2% minimum
Use of grease which do not fit to the recomended figure
(substitution grease) :
Mineral oil or PAO (SHC)
Base (soap ) grade NLGI 2 or NLGI 3
Lithium base
Base oil viscosity 100 to 200 mm2/s
Dye penetration test (DIN 51817) : 2% minimum
CAUTION :
THE USE OF A SUBSTITUTION GREASE CONDUCE TO
REDUCE THE RE GREASING PERIOD OF 30%
NOTE:
Lithium and complex lithium soap can be mixed
12
ALTERNATORS
This note is applicable when the type of grease is
c) Bearing re-assembly
changed.
A bearing can be refitted if it is known to be in perfect
Dismantle the machine in order to get to the bearing condition
Remove the old grease with a palette knife. Before refitting a bearing, carefully clean the surface of the
Clean the lubricator and the grease removal tube. bearing and the other parts of the bearing.
For greater cleaning efficiency, use a brush with solvent. To install the bearing on the shaft, it is necessary to heat
the bearing. The heat source may be an oven or a space
NOTE: heater (the use of oil baths is strongly discouraged).
The most widely-used solvent is gasoline : white spirit is
acceptable. CAUTION:
NEVER HEAT A BEARING TO MORE THAN 125°C
DANGER: (257°F)
THE PROHIBITED SOLVENTS ARE:
CHLORINATED SOLVENT Push the bearing up to the shaft shoulder, and check after
(TRICHLORETHYLENE,TRICHLOROETHANE) WHICH cooling that the inner ring is still in contact with the
BECOMES ACID shoulder. Lubricate using the recommended grease.
FUEL-OIL (EVAPORATES TOO SLOWLY)
GASOLINE CONTAINING LEAD 2.3.5 Antifriction bearing protection devices
BENZINE (TOXIC) As an option, the bearing may be protected from over-
heating by RTD or PTC sensors (customer’s choice)..
Blow compressed air onto the bearings to evaporate the
For special use in warm surroundings where the
excess solvent.
temperature of the bearings exceeds the authorised limit
Fill the bearing with the new grease. (for a bearing known to be in good condition), contact us.
Re-assemble the cage and the parts, which have been Bearing; Alarm points and shutdown:
dismantled, filling them with grease. • alarm 90°C (194°F)
Use a grease pump to complete the bearing lubrication • shutdown 95°C (203°F)
(while machine running)
To improve the machine protection the alarm set point may
2.3.4 Servicing the antifriction bearings be reduced following site effective information:
Alarm temperature (*) = Highest recorded temp + 15°K
a) General points (*) do not pass over the values of the previous chart.
CAUTION: E.g. : At site the common bearing temperature is 60°C . Set
CLEANLINESS IS IMPERATIVE the alarm temperature to 75°C instead of 90°C as
indicated in the previous chart
b) Removing the bearings
The inner bearing race is mounted, shrunk onto the shaft.
The outer bearing race is free, or slightly tightened, on the
hub (depending on the type of bearing). To remove the
bearing from the shaft, it is necessary to use a hub-puller
to avoid damaging the surface of the bearing.
13
ALTERNATORS
2.3.9 Anti friction bearing installation drawing
Machine type A50
Drive end Non drive end

1 End shield 5 O-Ring
2 End cover 6 Non drive end shield
3 Ball bearing 6226 C3 7 End cover
4 End cover fixing screw 8 Ball bearing 6226 C3
9 Bearing pre load washer
10 End cover fixing screw
14
ALTERNATORS
2.3.9 Anti friction bearing installation drawing (following)
Machine type A52.2; Two bearings
Bearing assembly "Power plant"

Drive end Non Drive end
1 End cover 5 End shield
2 End cover fixing screw 6 End cover fixing screw
3 Ball bearing 6232 MC3 7 End cover
4 End shield 8 Roller bearing NU 1028 MC3
Bearing assembly " Marine "
Drive end Non Drive end
1 9 End shield
2 same as à "power plant" 10 End cover
3 11 End cover fixing screw
4 12 Bearing pre load spring
13 Ball bearing 6226 C3
14 O-Ring
15
ALTERNATORS
Machines A53 and A54 :
Drive end side (2 bearing machine) Non drive end side

1 – End shield 1 – End shield
2 – M12 stud 2 – M12 stud
3 – End cover 3 – End cover
4 - Shaft 4 – Shaft
5 – Ball bearing 6232 MC3 5 – Ball bearing 6328 MC3
6 – Spring
16
ALTERNATORS
Machine type A56 ; Power plant (6 poles and more)
1 - End shield 4 - Fixed deflector 7 – (4) screws chc M6/16 10 - Roller bearing NUP 244
2 - Outside bearing cover 5 - Rotating deflector 8 - Sensors 11 - Roller bearing NU 232
3 - (4) Stud bolt M12/150 6 - Nut 9 - Inside bearing cover 12 - snap ring
Machine type A56 ; Power plant (4 poles only)
1 - End shield 5 - Rotating deflector 9 - Roller bearing NUP 236 13 – snap ring
2 - Outside bearing cover 6 - Nut 10 - Inside bearing cover
3 – (4) Stud bolt M16-150 7 - Screw chc M6-16 11 - Roller bearing NU 232
4 - Fixed deflector 8 - Sensors 12 - 4 Stud bolt M12-126-36
17
ALTERNATORS
c) Operating description of Oil circulation bearing

2.4 SLEEVE BEARINGS Proceed as for the self-lubricated bearings.
Note : For vertical machines refer to the attached specific For special duty of high speed machine or high loaded
bearing notice. bearing it might be necessary to have an oil circulation
Refer to the attached cut view in "chapter 10" for an easier system (external device which ensure the cooling and the
understanding circulation of the oil)
The oil warmed by the bearing losses is externally cooled
2.4.0 Description of horizontal Sleeve bearings and is returned directly to the shell. To obtain efficient
cooling the oil flow must be correct (refer to section 1).
a) Physical description
Rotation of the machine rotor is guided by Sleeve 2.4.1 Electrical insulation of Sleeve bearings
bearings.
The bearing housing is constructed in two ribbed parts a) Illustration diagram of the insulating film
providing considerable heat extraction potential. Following the used technology shaft circulating current
may occurs. When necessary, ACEO insulates the Non
The sleeve bearing comprises two half-shells with an Drive End bearing to avoid shaft-circulating current.
external spherical shape. This allows self-alignment. The
guiding surfaces of the sleeve bearing are covered with tin- An insulating film is applied to the bearing housing
based anti-friction metal. spherical seat.
The spherical seat of the housing of the electrically
insulated bearings is covered with an insulating coating.
The positioning pin of the sleeve bearing in the housing is
also insulated with an insulating bush.
The lubrication ring, mounted free on the shaft, is made of
brass. In order to simplify dismantling, the ring is cut in two
parts, assembled using screws.
A guide for the lubrication ring (synthetic materials) is
attached to the upper bearing half-shell (for marine
applications only).
1 – Electrical insulation
The floating labyrinth seals are cut in two parts, held
together by an expandable ring. These seals are inserted CAUTION:
in a support. A seal-positioning pin rests in the support to WHEN INSULATED BEARING IS USED THE
block it during rotation. ACCESSORIES IN CONTACT WITH THE SHELL MUST
The upper part of the housing is closed by means of a BE ELECTRICALLY INSULATED (TEMPERATURE
glass plug allowing observation of the rotation of the SENSOR …)
lubrication ring. A threaded metal plug allows the bearing
to be filled with oil.
The lower housing may be equipped with an oil-level sight
indicator, a thermometer and a temperature sensor.
b) Operating description of Self-lubricating bearing

Upon stopping, the shaft rests on the lower bearing; there
is metal-to-metal contact.
During the start-up phase, the shaft rubs against the anti-
friction metal of the bearing. Oil lubrication is used.
After having reached its transition speed, the shaft creates
its oil film. At this point there is no further contact between
the shaft and bearing.
CAUTION:
PROLONGED OPERATION AT EXTREMELY SLOW
ROTATION SPEEDS (SEVERAL rpm) WITHOUT
LUBRICATION COULD SERIOUSLY DAMAGE THE
SERVICE LIFE OF THE BEARING.
18
ALTERNATORS
b) Insulation check c) Long term storage

Single bearing machine: When a sleeve bearing machine has to be stopped for
Maintain the rotor at the drive end side to insulate it from more than one year:
the earth (disconnect the coupling if not done). Measure Drain the bearing. Place a "Silicagel" gag inside the
the insulating resistance between the shaft and the bearing oil sump (it is necessary to open the bearing
ground. The insulation should be better than 0.1 MΩ. housing to proceed)
measured under 500 V DC
Place an adhesive strip along the parting lines of the
housing.
1 Pour the TECTYL protecting agent through the oil filling
hole of the bearing (around 50 cc). Turn the shaft several
4 2 times in order to spread the product evenly throughout the
bearing.
3
CAUTION:
5 A VISIT OF THE BEARING (research of corrosion
marks) MUST BE DONE AT LEAST ONCE PER YEAR
CAUTION:
1 - Bearing shell
2- Insulating film BEFORE START UP IT WILL BE NECESSARY TO
3 - Bearing housing REMOVE THE "SILICAGEL" BAG AND TAPES
4 - Rotor
5 - Insulating wedging
2.4.3 Oil circulation installation
Double bearing machine: Refer to chapter 2.6
Maintain the rotor at the drive end side to insulate it from
the earth (disconnects the coupling; Dismount the drive
end bearing if not done). Measure the insulating resistance 2.4.4 Start-up of Sleeve bearings
between the shaft and the ground. The insulation should
a) General check before start up
be better than 0.1 MΩ. measured under 500 V DC
To identify your bearing characteristics refer to section 1
Installed shell accessories (e.g: RTD) must fit 0.1 MΩ.
measured under 500 V DC This verification must be carried out upon the first start-up,
during periodic inspection of the bearing, or as soon as
any part of the bearing alignment is changed (coupling ...).
2.4.2 Storage of Sleeve bearings machine
After a long shutdown period, proceed following the used
a) General points storage procedure (refer to chapter 2.4.2)
CAUTION: Check that the shaft has not corroded (onto journal
WE RECOMMEND THE USE OF TECTYL PRODUCTS surface; thrust faces and seals surfaces)
FROM VALVOLINE GmbH SUCH AS TYPE "511 M" Fill the bearing oil cavities with oil.
NOTE : CAUTION:
It is possible to start the machine up without removing the THE BEARINGS ARE DELIVERED WITHOUT OIL
"511.M" protection.
Clean the external parts of the bearing. Dust and dirt
b) Short term storage impede the radiation of the heat
When a sleeve bearing machine has to be stopped for Check if the temperature monitoring equipment works.
more than one month and less than one year:
Do not drain the bearing
Pour the TECTYL protecting agent through the oil filling
hole of the bearing (around 50 cc). Turn the shaft several
times in order to spread the product evenly throughout the
bearing.
19
ALTERNATORS
b) Self-lubricating bearings start up data d) Oil circulation bearing with non accurate oil flow
To identify your bearing characteristics refer to section 1 (+0% ; -40%)
Fill the bearing with the recommended oil. The oil must be To identify your bearing characteristics refer to section 1
new, absolutely free of any traces of dust or water. This chapter typically applies for standard bearings (as for
bearing types E..Z.K ; E..Z.Q).
The oil level limits are as follows:
minimum oil level: bottom of the oil sight glass The oil circulating bearings (without Leroy Somer
maximum oil level: 2/3 the top of the oil sight glass lubricating system) are delivered with:
a breather
NOTE: It is recommended to filter the oil before filling the an oil inlet flow regulating system.
bearing. The "oil flow regulating system" consists of :
an adjustable pressure reducing valve "A"
CAUTION: a diaphragm.
NOT ENOUGH LUBRICANT LEADS TO TEMPERATURE The oil flow adjustment does not request high accuracy.
RISES AND THUS TO DAMAGE TO THE BEARING. Do not feed the bearing with an oil flow higher than this
TOO MUCH LUBRICANT LEADS TO LEAKAGES. one indicated in section 1.
Retighten the split line and flange screws (12) by using the Ensure that the complete oil supply and return lines have
following torque values: been rinsed as instructed in the chapter.2.4.3
Ensure that the installation instructions have been followed
Bearing Size 14 18 22 28 (refer to chapter.2.4.3 ) such as filtering unit, return line
Torque [Nm] 170 330 570 1150 properly inclined etc.
(lightly oiled) Proceed as for the self-lubricated bearings and then
start the oil supply system (pump etc.).
Check the firm position of the top sight glass (5).
To adjust the oil flow :
Check the firm position of the oil sight glass (23). Machine stopped, adjust the pressure reducing valve "A" to
If a temperature sensor or thermometer is used check they get the bearing oil level at the middle of the glass. And
are correctly fixed. then run the generator
Retighten all screw plugs in the connection holes (4), (22), Machine running and oil at the operating temperature the
oil sight glass level should be within 1/3 and ½ of the
(24) (27) by using the necessary torque values:
glass. If necessary readjust the pressure reducing valve
Plugs threads G 3/8 G 1/2 G 3/4 G1 "A"
Torque [Nm] 30 40 60 110
Plugs threads G 1 1/4 G 1 1/2 G2 G 2 1/2 A

Torque [Nm] 160 230 320 500
Check the operation of the temperature monitoring
equipment.
During the start-up period, check the temperature of the
bearings. The temperature should stay below 95°C an d
then drop down to the temperature normally recommended
(refer to the technical characteristics for Sleeve bearings in During generator operation the oil level in the bearing must
Section 1.) comply with the indications in Chapter 2.4.5.
In case of oil oozing retighten the bearing fixing screws
and the plugs to the recommended torque.
c) Water cooled bearing (type EFW..) start up data

To identify your bearing characteristics refer to section 1
Proceed as for the self-lubricated bearings and
check the water flow of the cooler. (refer to the data
contained in section 1)
20
ALTERNATORS
e) Oil circulation bearing with accurate oil flow

2.4.5 Maintenance of Sleeve bearings
(+5% ; -10%)
To identify your bearing characteristics refer to section 1 a) Verification of oil-level
This chapter typically applies for bearings engineered for Check the oil level at regular intervals.
heavy thrust (tilting pads as for bearing types E..Z.A). The oil level limits are as follows:
minimum oil level: bottom of the oil sight glass
CAUTION:
maximum oil level: 2/3 the top of the oil sight glass
THE OIL FLOW MUST BE CARREFULLY ADJUSTED TO
THE REQUESTED VALUE
Maximum admissible oil level
The oil circulating bearings are delivered with: Optimum top oil level
a breather Optimum bottom oil level
an oil inlet flow regulating system. 2/3
1/2 1/3
The "oil inlet regulating system" consists of : Minimum admissible oil level
an adjustable pressure reducing valve "A" b) Temperature verification
a diaphragm.
Check the bearing temperature and record it. A bearing
Ensure that the complete oil supply and return lines have temperature, which suddenly varies without any obvious
been rinsed as instructed in the chapter.2.4.3 reason (change of ambient temperature etc.), indicates
Ensure that the installation instructions have been followed abnormal operation. It is then necessary to inspect the
(refer to chapter.2.4.3) such as filtering unit, return line bearing.
properly inclined etc.
c) Oil draining
Proceed as for the self-lubricated bearings and then
start the oil supply system (pump etc.). The oil flow must NOTE:
be strictly adjusted within the requested value using a flow Risk of pollution! Please observe the instructions for the
meter. Run the generator. use of the lubricating oil. The manufacturer can provide
Machine running and oil at the operating temperature the information on waste oil disposal
oil sight glass level should be within 1/3 and 2/3 of the
It is recommended to drain the oil at intervals of
glass. If the level reach the top of the oil sight glass
8000 hours of operation in dirty environment (eg :
investigate for the oil return line design.
gen set application)
f) Inspection of Sleeve bearings at the end of start-up 16000 hours of operation in clean environment (eg :
hydro power plant)
Supervise the bearing during the trial run ( 5-10 operating
hours ). Shut down the installation and secure it against unintended
operation.
Pay special attention to:
- oil level Take all necessary measures to collect all of the lubricating
- bearing temperature oil.
- sliding noises of the shaft seals Release the lubricating oil while it is still warm. Impurities
- tightness and residues will thus be removed.
- occurrence of vibrations.
Unscrew the oil drain plug (27). Release the lubricating oil
CAUTION : and collect it.
IF THE BEARING TEMPERATURE EXCEEDS THE
CALCULATED VALUE OF 15 k STOP THE MACHINE NOTE:
IMMEDIATELY. INSPECT THE BEARING AND If the lubricating oil contains unusual residues or is visibly
DETERMINE THE CAUSES. changed, eliminate the causes. If necessary, carry out an
inspection.
In case of oil oozing retighten the bearing fixing screws
and plugs to the recommended torque Tighten the oil drain plug (27) using the following torque
values:
Bearing size 14 18 22 28
Torque [Nm] 30 40 60 60
Remove the screw plugs from the oil filler hole (4).
21
ALTERNATORS
NOTE: Field pressure measure :
Make sure that no impurities get into the bearing.
Using a transparent tube as water column manometer.
Use a lubricant with the viscosity indicated on the bearing
type plate. Fill the lubricant through the oil filler hole (4) up Connect a flexible transparent tube to the upper part of the
bearing. Connect a pressure tap corresponding to the
to the middle point of the oil sight glass (23).
flexible tube used.
The oil level limits are as follows:
Install the pressure tap in place of the filling plug located
minimum oil level: bottom of the oil sight glass on the top of the bearing housing.
maximum oil level: 2/3 the top of the oil sight glass
Partially fill the pipe with water.
NOTE:
Insufficient lubricant leads to temperature rises and thus to NOTE:
Be careful not to cause water to enter the bearing
damage to the bearing.
Too much lubricant leads to leakage. In the case of Measure the pressure (or depression) in millimeters of
bearings lubricated by a loose oil ring, too much lubricant water column.
could break the oil ring, thus leading to damage to the NOTE:
bearing. Given the low pressures measured, to make the reading
easier it is advised to incline the water column manometer
Tighten the screw plug into the oil filler hole (4) using the
by 5.7° (diagram below). A reading amplification of "10" is
following torque values:
thus obtained.
50 mm
Torque [Nm] 30 40 60 60
5 mm
d) Pressure measurement of a Sleeve bearing housing
The external environment of the electric machine may
5,7°
cause pressurizing or depressurizing of the Sleeve bearing
and lead to oil leakage. 10 mm 100 mm
Example: The oil return line (of a circulation bearing)
99mm 5,7°
opening directly into a diesel motor lower sump and
allowing the housing back-pressure to return to the
bearing.
Example: A vacuum generated by a coupling located too e) Oil for sleeve bearing
close the Sleeve bearing and acting as a fan. We do not have any special recommendation regarding
The relative depression (or pressure) during operation any mineral oil manufacturer.
must remain less than 5 mm of water column. The relative The used oil must comply with the requested viscosity
pressure is the pressure difference existing between the (refer to Section 1).
bearing oil sump and the bearing outside (measured close
to the seals). For frequent cold starting (lower than -15°C) witho ut oil
sump heater please contact us. A new oil viscosity may be
Pe : external pressure advised.
close to the seal Pi
Use a non-foaming mineral oil, without additives. If an oil
Pi : bearing oil sump containing additives has to be used, make sure that the
pressure supplier confirms the chemical compatibility of the oil and
Pm : machine the lead anti-friction properties.
expansion chamber
(gain access as CAUTION:
indicated by the SYNTHETIC OILS MAY BE USED ONLY IF USED
arrow) LUBRICANT ARE ISSUED FROM THE FOLLOWING
Pe
LIST
∆ (Pe - Pi) < 50Pa
∆ (Pm - Pi) < 50Pa Pm Since the synthetic lubricants are not standardized, no
guarantee can be given regarding their chemical and
Note: 50Pa=5mmWC mechanical behavior. Some synthetic lubricant may
become acid and destroys bearing parts (white metal, oil
ring, sight indicator..) in a short time
If synthetic oil has to be used; during the first 2000 hours
of use the lubricant should be checked at short intervals.
22
ALTERNATORS
Viscosity data (for information) : Few examples of mineral oil:
x y viscosity viscosity Type
ISO (cSt ; 40°C)
850 42
775 40 ARAL VG 32 32 Vitam GF 32
700 38 VG 46 46 Degol CL46
680
625 36 VG 68 68 Degol CL 68
550 34
500
BP VG 32 31,5 Energol CS 32
140 32
450 460
VG 46 46 Energol CS 46
30
VG 68 68 Energol CS 68
400 28
365 26 CHEVRON VG 32 30,1 Mechanism LPS 32
315 320 24 VG 46 43,8 Mechanism LPS 46
280 22 VG 68 61,9 Mechanism LPS 68
240 20
205 220 90 50 ESSO VG 32 30 TERESSO 32
18
175 16
VG 46 43 TERESSO 46
140 150 40 14
VG 68 64 TERESSO 68
115 85 12 MOBIL VG 32 30 D.T.E. Oil Light
100 30
85 10 VG 46 43 D.T.E. Oil Medium
60 68 80
20 8 VG 68 64 D.T.E. Oil Heavy Medium
40 46 6
32 75 10W SHELL VG 32 32 Tellus Oil 32
20 22 4
10 0W & 5W 2 VG 46 46 Tellus Oil 46
VG 68 68 Tellus Oil 68
A B C
x - CST at 40°C
y - CST at 100°C The only synthetic lubricant allowed are those one issued
from the following list
A - ISO (VG)
B - SAE J306c Transmissions viscosité Type
C - SAE J300d motors (cSt ; 40°C)
KLUBER 32 Summit SH 32
44 Summit SH 46
62 Summit SH 68
81 Summit SH 100
MOBIL 31 SHC 624
65 SHC 626
SHELL 32 Madrella Oil AS 32
48 Madrella Oil AS 46
68 Madrella Oil AS 68
f) Oil sump capacity (liters)

Bearing EFxxx 14 18 22 28
Volume (l) 8 13 21 34
23
ALTERNATORS
g) Sealing Compound
2.4.6 Dismantling
To ensure a good sealing effect and preserve a correct
operation of the floating labyrinth seals of the bearings we a) Tools and equipment
recommend to use the following sealing compound: The following tools and equipment are necessary:
Mineral oil. - Allan key set
- Wrenching key set
On split surfaces and on the floating labyrinth seals it is
- Open-jaw spanner set
possible to use following compounds (never dry):
- Feeler gauges (up 0.05mm)
"Liquid gasket gray ; Three bond 1121"
- Caliper gauge
"Hylomar M ; Marton-Domsel"
- Emery paper, Sleeve scraper
"Universal-Dichtmasse 200 PU ; Reinz-Dichtungs-gmbh"
- Lifting equipment
On split surfaces only do not use on floating labyrinth - Permanent sealing compound (refer to chapter 2.4.5)
seals) it is possible to use following compounds : - Clean cloth
Terostat-9140 ; Teroson - Oil with the viscosity indicated (see bearing type plate)
Blue silicone RTV n°6 ; Loctite - Detergents
Blue RTV 6B ; Permatex
- Liquid screw locking compound (e.g. LOCTITE 242)
Hi-Temp RTV FAG 26B ; Permatex
- Liquid sealing compound and Teflon tape.
DANGER
Synthetic oils.
BEFORE TRANSPORTING OR LIFTING CHECK IF THE
Compound with a silicone base can pollute the synthetic EYE BOLTS ARE TIGHT! INSECURE EYE BOLTS
oil. Use it only after checking with the oil manufacturer that COULD RESULT IN THE BEARING BECOMING LOOSE.
it is compatible with the oil. BEFORE MOVING THE BEARING BY THE EYE BOLTS
Without compatibility information, use never dry silicone MAKE SURE THAT THE SPLIT LINE SCREWS ARE
free compound, on all surfaces : TIGHTENED, OTHERWISE THE BOTTOM HALF OF THE
"Liquid gasket gray ; Three bond 1121" BEARING COULD BECOME DETACHED.
"Hylomar M ; Marton-Domsel" MAKE SURE THAT THE EYE BOLTS ARE NOT EX
"Universal-Dichtmasse 200 PU ; Reinz-Dichtungs-gmbh"
POSED TO BENDING STRESS, OTHERWISE THE
BOLTS COULD BREAK.
Follow exactly the instructions for the use of the lifting

equipment.
NOTE:
Make sure that the work place is clean. Contamination and
damage to the bearing, especially of the running surfaces,
have a negative influence on the operating quality and
could lead to premature damage.
Shut down the installation and ensure that any unintended

operation is prevented.
Interrupt the cooling water supply (EFW.. bearing only).
Remove all thermo sensors from the connection holes.
Take all necessary measures to collect the lubricating oil.
Unscrew the oil drain plug (27) and collect the lubricating
oil (refer to chapter 2.4.5.c)
b) Lifting equipment
The following steps are to be observed before using the
lifting equipment:
To transport the complete bearing unit
Check if the split line screws are tight (12):
Check if the eye bolts are tight (6).
Connect the lifting equipment to the eye bolts (6).
24
ALTERNATORS
To transport the top half of the housing f) Removal of the top half of the shell
Check if the eye bolts are tight (6).
Unscrew the split line screws (19) and lift the top half of the
Connect the lifting equipment to the eye bolts (6). shell (11).
To transport the bottom half of the housing
CAUTION:
Screw 2 eye bolts (6) with suitable threads tight into the tap
holes (17) marked with a cross. DO NOT DAMAGE THE THRUST AND RADIAL
RUNNING SURFACES.
g) Dismantling of the loose oil ring
Tap hole M 16 M 20 M 24 M 30
Open both split lines of the loose oil ring (44) by
Connect the lifting equipment to the eye bolts (6). untightening and removing the screws (47). Separate both
To transport the Bearing shells halves of the loose oil ring (44) carefully without using any
tools or other devices.
Screw 2 eye bolts or screw hooks with suitable threads
tight into the tap holes (9):
Tap hole M 8 M 12 M 12 M 16
Connect the lifting equipment to the screw hooks.
c) Dismantling of the shaft seal type 10 (outboard side)

Loosen all screws (55) and turn them off.
Remove simultaneously in axial direction both top half (48)
and bottom half (51) of the seal carrier from the housing.
Shift the top half of the seal (53) a little (about 20 mm ). Tilt
it over carefully until the hook spring (49) unbends.
DANGER:
DURING DISMANTLING OF THE FLOATING
LABYRINTH SEAL HOLD TIGHT THE HOOK SPRING
(38). THIS IS UNDER TENSION AND COULD SPRING
BACK AND LEAD TO INJURY.
Open the hook spring (49) and remove the bottom half of
the seal (52) from the shaft.
d) Dismantling of the shaft seal type 20 (outboard side) Illustration 1 : Opening of the loose oil ring
Untight all seals fixing screw (49) and remove them. To check the geometry of the loose oil ring put it together
Simultaneously remove in axial direction both top and as follows:
bottom (48) ,(52) halves of the rigid labyrinth seal. Press the positioning pin (45) into the holes (46).
- Remove the split line screws (50). Adjust both halves of the loose oil ring till the split lines
- Separate the top half of the rigid labyrinth seal (59) from match each other.
the bottom half (63). Tighten the screws (47).
e) Dismantling of the top half of the housing
Remove the flange screws (8).
Remove the split line screws (12).
Lift the top part of the housing (1) until the top part of the
housing can be moved in axial line over the bearing shell,
without touching it.
25
ALTERNATORS
h) Dismantling the machine side shaft seal

2.4.7 Cleaning and checking
Shift the top half of the seal (53) a little (about 20 mm). Tilt
it over carefully until the hook spring (49) unbends. a) Cleaning
DANGER: CAUTION:
DURING DISMANTLING OF THE FLOATING USE ONLY NON-AGGRESSIVE DETERGENTS SUCH
LABYRINTH SEAL HOLD TIGHT THE HOOK SPRING AS FOR INSTANCE
(38). THIS IS UNDER TENSION AND COULD SPRING · VALVOLINE 150
BACK AND LEAD TO INJURY. · ALKALINE CLEANING COMPOUNDS (PH-VALUE 6 TO
9, SHORT REACTION TIME).
Open the hook spring (49) and turn the bottom half of the
seal (52) in the opposite direction to the anti-rotation pin DANGER:
out of the integrated seal groove of the bottom half of the PLEASE OBSERVE THE INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE USE
housing.
OF THE DETERGENTS.
i) Removal of the bottom half of the shell
CAUTION:
CAUTION: NEVER USE CLEANING WOOL OR CLOTH. RESIDUES
MAKE SURE THAT ALL BEARINGS MOUNTED ON A OF SUCH MATERIALS LEFT IN THE BEARING COULD
SHAFT LINE ARE OPENED. LOOSEN THE SPLIT LINE LEAD TO EXCESSIVE TEMPERATURES.
SCREWS OF THE HOUSINGS.
Clean the following parts thoroughly :
CAUTION: top half of the housing (1)
THE LIFTING EQUIPMENT SHOULD NOT COME IN bottom half of the housing (21)
TOUCH WITH THE SEAL AND RUNNING SURFACES top half of the shell (11)
bottom half of the shell (13)
OF THE SHAFT.
sealing surfaces of the top half (48) and bottom half (51)
Lift the shaft up to the point where shaft and bottom half of of the seal carrier or of the rigid labyrinth seal
the shell (13) do not touch each other any more. Protect loose oil ring (44).
the shaft against unintended movement. Water cooler cleaning (bearing type EFW.. only)
Turn the bottom half of the shell (13) out of the bottom half Check the condition of the oil cooler (26).
of the housing (21) and remove it from the shaft. In case the oil cooler (26) is encrusted with oil sludge:
j) Dismantling of the machine seal Dismantle the oil cooler. Remove the encrustation by using
Usually it is not necessary to dismantle the machine seal for instance a wire brush.
(10) if maintenance works are carried out. Install the oil cooler (26) into the bearing.
If due to certain reasons the split machine seal must be
dismantled please observe that this operation can be
carried out only from the inner part of the machine. Loosen
the split line screws of the machine seal and remove the
flange screws (7).
Non-split machine seals can be dismantled only after
dismantling the machine shield or the shaft completely.
In the case the machine seal is equipped with a hamp
packing, some visible changes can be noticed, such as :
tallow excess, black color of the seal due to temperature
development. Even in such cases it is not necessary to
renew the hamp packing. Color changes will appear with a
new hamp packing too, until the seal clearance adjusts
during operation.
26
ALTERNATORS
b) Wear checking
2.4.8 Assembly of the Bearing
Carry out a visual check of the wear condition of all bearing
parts. The following graph provides information on the CAUTION:
parts that must be replaced in case of wear. The right REMOVE ALL IMPURITIES OR OTHER OBJECTS SUCH
evaluation of the wear condition, especially of the running AS SCREWS, NUTS, ETC. FROM INSIDE THE
surfaces of the bearing shell, implies a lot of experience. If BEARING. IF LEFT INSIDE THEY COULD LEAD TO
in doubt, replace the worn part with new ones. DAMAGE OF THE BEARING. COVER UP THE OPENED
Part Wear condition Maintenance proceedings BEARING DURING BREAKS.
Shell Scoring Bearing temperature before
inspection: CAUTION:
· not increased no new CARRY OUT ALL ASSEMBLY OPERATIONS WITHOUT
shells MAKING USE OF FORCE.
· increased new shells
White metal New shell CAUTION:
lining damaged USE A LIQUID SCREW LOCKING COMPOUND (E.G.
LOCTITE 242) FOR ALL HOUSING, SPLIT LINE AND
Bow wave ridges New shells
FLANGE SCREWS.
Shaft Baffles broken or New shaft seal
seal damaged a) Fitting in the bottom half of the shell
Loose Geometrical form New loose oil ring Apply some lubricant on the spherical seating (14) in the
oil ring (roundness, bottom half of the housing (21) and on the running
flatness ) visibly surfaces of the shaft. Use the same type of lubricant as
changed indicated for bearing operation ( see type plate ).
Place the bottom half of the shell (13) on the running
surface of the shaft. Turn the bottom half of the shell (13)
c) Insulation checking (only for insulated bearing) into the bottom half of the housing (21) with the split line
Check the insulating layer of the spherical seating (14) of surfaces of both halves in true alignment.
the top half (1) and bottom half (21) of the housing. In case In case the bottom half of the shell does not turn in easily,
of damage contact Leroy Somer; département ACEO check the position of the shaft and the alignment of the
factory. bearing housing
CAUTION:
(ONLY FOR BEARINGS EF..K)
THESE OPERATIONS SHOULD BE CARRIED OUT
MOST CAREFULLY. THE THRUST PARTS OF THE
BOTTOM SHELL SHOULD NOT BE DAMAGED.
Lower down the shaft till it sits on the bottom half of the
shell (13).
b) Assembly of the shaft seal machine-side

The machine-side shaft seal is standard-wise a floating
labyrinth seal. The integrated seal groove is in the top and
bottom halves of the housing.
DANGER:
DURING ASSEMBLY HOLD THE HOOK SPRING ENDS
(38) SECURELY TO AVOID THEM SUDDENLY
RELEASING AND CAUSING POSSIBLE INJURY!
Check the movement of the floating labyrinth seal on the

shaft in the seal area outside the housing:
Put the hook spring (49) around the shaft and hook both
ends into each other.
Put both halves of the seal (52), (53) in their place on the
shaft.
Put the hook spring (49) into the spring groove (50).
Turn the floating labyrinth seal on the shaft.
27
ALTERNATORS
CAUTION: c) Installation of the loose oil ring

THE FLOATING LABYRINTH SEAL SHOULD TURN Open both split lines of the loose oil ring (44) by
EASILY ON THE SHAFT. A JAMMED SEAL COULD untightening and removing the screws (47). Separate both
LEAD TO OVERHEATING DURING OPERATION AND halves of the loose oil ring (44) carefully without using any
EVEN TO SHAFT WEAR. tools or other devices.
If the floating labyrinth seal jams, dismantle it from the

shaft. Remove the worn parts of the seal carefully, by
using emery paper or a Sleeve scraper.
Dismantle the floating labyrinth seal.
Apply sealing compound on the guide surfaces of the
integrated seal groove in the bottom half of the housing.
Illustration 2: Coating of sealing compound on the

integrated seal groove
Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound on the seal
surfaces and on the split line surfaces of both halves of the
seal (52), (53).
Illustration 4 : Opening of the loose oil ring

Place both halves of the loose oil ring into the shell groove
(13) encircling the shaft. Press the positioning pin (45) of
each split line into the corresponding hole (46).
Adjust both halves of the loose oil ring until the split lines
match each other.
21
34
33
33 13
Illustration 3 : Coating of sealing compound on the floating

labyrinth seal
Place the bottom half of the seal (52) with the labyrinths
onto the shaft.
The oil return holes at the bearing side must be opened.
Turn the seal in the opposite direction to the anti-rotation
pin into the groove of the housing until the split lines of the
bottom half of the housing and the bottom half of the seal
match each other.
Illustration 5 : Installation of the loose oil ring
Remove the rest of the sealing compound.
Tighten the screws (47) by using the following torque
Push the spring hook into the integrated seal groove values:
between the bottom half of the housing and the seal until
both ends jut out from the split line. Bearing size 14 18 22 28
Place the top half of the seal with the cam facing the inside Torque [Nm] 1,4 2,7 2,7 2,7
of the bearing on the bottom half of the seal.
Stretch the hook spring until both ends can be hooked.
28
ALTERNATORS
Lower the top half of the housing (1) vertically on the
d) Fitting in the top half of the shell
bottom half of the housing (21). Lower the top half of the
Apply some lubricant on the running surfaces of the shaft. housing (1) until the split line of the housing is not visible
Use the same type of lubricant as indicated for bearing any more.
operation (see type plate).
Gently hit the bottom half of the housing (21) with a nylon
Check if the engraved numbers (15) on the bottom and top hammer, thus ensuring the alignment of the spherical
halves of the shell correspond. seating.
Place the top half of the shell (11) on the shaft; both Insert the split line screws (12). Tighten them hand-tight.
engraved numbers (15) should be on the same side.
Insert the flange screws (8). Tighten them using the
CAUTION : following torque values:
AN INCORRECTLY PLACED SHELL COULD JAM THE Bearing size 14 18 22 28
SHAFT THUS LEADING TO THE DAMAGE OF BOTH
SHAFT AND BEARING. Torque [Nm] 170 330 570 1150
Tighten the split line screws (12) of the housing crosswise
CAUTION : (FOR BEARINGS TYPE EF..K ONLY) using the same torque values
PLACE THE TOP HALF OF THE SHELL CAREFULLY
ON THE SHAFT. THE THRUST PARTS OF THE TOP f) Assembly of the type 10 Outboard Side Seals
HALF OF THE SHELL SHOULD NOT BE DAMAGED.
DANGER:
Tighten up the split line screws (19) by using the following DURING ASSEMBLY HOLD THE HOOK SPRING ENDS
torque values: (49) SECURELY TO AVOID THEM SUDDENLY
RELEASING AND CAUSING POSSIBLE INJURY!
Check the movement of the floating labyrinth seal on the
Torque [Nm] 20 69 69 170
shaft in the seal area outside the housing.
Check the split line of the bearing shell by using a feeler Place the hook spring (49) around the shaft and hook both
gauge. The split line gap should be less than 0.05 mm. If ends into each other.
the split line is greater than this, dismantle both top and
bottom (11), (13) halves of the shell. Locate both halves of the seal (52), (53) in their place on
the shaft.
Check the mobility of the loose oil ring (44).
Locate the hook spring (49) in the spring groove (50).
Marine bearing only:
A guide bush in the top half of the shell secures the Turn the floating labyrinth seal on the shaft.
function of the loose oil ring.
CAUTION:
Check the mobility of the loose oil ring (44) in the guide
bush. THE FLOATING LABYRINTH SEAL SHOULD TURN
EASILY ON THE SHAFT. A JAMMED SEAL COULD
e) Closing of the bearing LEAD TO OVERHEATING DURING OPERATION AND
Check the true alignment of the shell (11), (13) and bottom EVEN TO SHAFT WEAR.
half (21) of the housing.
If the floating labyrinth seal jams, dismantle it from the
The positioning pin (3) in the top half of the housing fits in shaft. Remove the worn parts of the seal carefully, by
the corresponding positioning pin hole (2). The bearing using emery paper or a Sleeve scraper.
shell is thus placed into its right position.
Dismantle the floating labyrinth seal.
Check if the engraved numbers (20) on the top and bottom
Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound on the seal
halves of the housing correspond.
surfaces and on the split line surfaces of both halves of the
Clean the split line surfaces of the top and bottom halves seal (52), (53).
(1), (21) of the housing.
Apply sealing compound over the whole surface of the split
line of the bottom half (21) of the housing.
Place the top half of the housing carefully into the machine
shield, without touching the seals or the bearing shell.
Illustration 6 : Application of sealing compound on the

floating labyrinth seal
29
ALTERNATORS
Press the bottom half of the seal (52) against the shaft. Place the top half of the seal carrier (48) on the top half of
Place the top half of the seal (53) on the shaft and align the seal (53). Press the bottom half (51) of the seal carrier
both halves of the seal to each other. against it. Push the shaft seal completely into the housing.
Place the hook spring (49) into the spring groove (50) and
stretch until both ends can be hooked.
43 42 1
38 41 21
Illustration 9 : Assembly of the seal carrier

Align the split lines of the seal carrier and the housing.
Tighten up the screws (55) by using the torque values:
Torque [Nm] 8 20 20 20
Illustration 7 : Assembly of the floating labyrinth seal g) Assembly of the type 20 Outboard Side Seals
Align the split line of the floating labyrinth seal and the split Check if the engraved numbers on the bottom half (63)
line of the seal carrier. and top half (59) of the rigid labyrinth seal correspond.
Check that both engraved numbers (56)and(58) on top and
bottom halves of the seal carrier (48), (51) correspond. Clean the flange surfaces of
the top half and bottom half (63) of the rigid labyrinth seal
Clean the following:
the split line surfaces of the top half and bottom half (63) of
the seal surfaces of the top (48) and bottom (51) half of the
seal parts: carrier (the groove of the floating labyrinth seal, the rigid labyrinth seal
the flange surfaces) the flange surfaces of the housing.
the split line surfaces of the top (48) and bottom (51) half Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound on the following
of the carrier parts:
the flange surfaces of the housing. the flange surfaces of the top (59) and bottom half (63) of
Apply a uniform layer of sealing compound on: the rigid labyrinth seal
the lateral surfaces of the groove at the top (48) and the split lines of the bottom half (63) of the rigid labyrinth
bottom (51) half of the seal carrier seal.
the flange surfaces of the top (48) and bottom (51) half of
the seal carrier
the split line surfaces of the bottom half of the seal carrier
(51).
Illustration 8 : Application of sealing compound on the seal Illustration 10: Application of sealing compound on the rigid
carrier labyrinth seal
30
ALTERNATORS
Place the top half (59) of the rigid labyrinth seal on the
shaft and press slightly the bottom half (63) of the rigid
labyrinth seal from below against it. Lightly push the rigid
labyrinth seal completely into the housing.
Tighten the split line screws (61).
Place in parallel alignment the split line of the rigid
labyrinth seal and the split line of the housing.
CAUTION:
PRESS THE RIGID LABYRINTH SEAL FROM BELOW
AGAINST THE SHAFT
Adjust the rigid labyrinth seal in such a way that the

clearance "f" between the shaft and the rigid labyrinth seal
at both split lines has the same figure. Illustration 1: Assembly of the RD-thrust pads
Place the top half of the shroud ring (39) into the top half of
the shell (6) by inserting the anti-rotation pin (43) into the
location hole (38). Match the split line of the top half of the
shell (6) with the split line of the top half of the shroud ring
(39) in true alignment.
Illustration 11: Alignment of the rigid labyrinth seal

Tighten the screws (60) by using the following torque
values:
Torque [N.m] 8 20 20 20
h) Assembly of the RD-thrust pads ; bearing type E...A

Clean both top and bottom halves of the shroud ring and
all RD-thrust pads..
Check if the parts show any visible damage. Illustration 2: Assembly of the shroud ring
Carry out the assembly of both thrust parts of the top Tighten the screws (40) by using the following torque
(6) and bottom (27) half of the shell according to the values:
following instructions:
An RD-thrust pad on both sides of the top half of the shell
has a bore for the insertion of a thermo sensor ( thrust part Tap hole M5 M6 M8 M10
temperature measurement).
Torque [N.m] 2,7 8 20 40
To mount the RD-thrust pad into the correct position
proceed as follows: Place the bottom half of the shroud ring (41) into the
- Find the position of the location hole (38) on the top half bottom half of the shell (27). Match the corresponding
of the shroud ring (39).Insert the RD-thrust pad (42) with split lines in true alignment. Tighten the screws (40)
the anti-rotation pin (43) into the corresponding thrust pad with the same torque value as valid for the top half of
location hole (37).
the shell (6).
Insert all other RD-thrust pads (42) into the corresponding
Check the mobility of all RD-thrust pads (42).
thrust pad holes (37)
If the RD-thrust pads jam, realign the top (39) and bottom
of the top and bottom half of the shell (6),(27).
half (41) of the shroud ring.
CAUTION
INSUFFICIENT MOBILITY OF THE RD-THRUST PADS
WILL CAUSE DAMAGE OF THE BEARING.
Both top and bottom halves of the shells are prepared

for assembly.
31
ALTERNATORS
c) Thermostat or sensor (optional)

2.4.9 Oil-leakage trouble-shooting
The recorded oil sump temperature must stay below 85°C
Oil leakage can occur in the Sleeve bearings if certain in normal condition.
measures are not taken.
The shell temperature must stay below 90°C in norma l
a) Self-lubricating bearing condition.
- Is the oil level correct? (see chapter 2.4.5.a ) Shell metal ; Alarm points and shutdown:
- Is the Sleeve bearing in decompression? (see chapter • alarm 95°C (203°F)
2.4.5.d ). If the depression level is abnormal, add a • shutdown 100°C (212°F)
protective screen. Oil sump ; Alarm points and shutdown:
- Is the leakage occurring around the parting line? Clean • alarm 85°C (185°F)
the parting lines carefully with a solvent. Apply a sealing • shutdown 90°C (194°F)
compound (refer to chapter 2.4.5) upon reassembly (see To improve the bearing protection the temperature set
chapter 2.4.6) points can reduced following the effective site condition
b) Oil circulation bearing Alarm temperature (*) = Highest recorded temp + 5°K
- All information and instructions concerning the "self- Trip temperature (*) = Alarm temperature + 5 °K
lubricating bearings" apply. (*)Highest recorded temp: Temperature measured at
the site in the worst temperature
- Is the bearing oil flow correct (for data refer to section 1)?
To adjust the oil flow refer to chapter 2.4.4 Eg: A bearing reach 80°C in the worst site condition
Adjust the alarm set point to 85°C instead of 95°C a s
-Is the Sleeve bearing under pressure? previously recommended.
To measure refer to chapter 2.4.5 . This pressure most Adjust the trip set point to 90°C instead of 100°C a s
certainly comes from the oil-return circuit. Check the oil- previously recommended.
return circuit (refer to chapter 2.4.3 ). The back-pressure
can often be eliminated by inserting a siphon-effect on the d) Pre lub pump (optional)
oil-return line (then make sure that the circuit modification A pump takes up the oil from the bearing oil sump and
does not disturb the oil-return flow). pours it over the bearing shell.
This pump ensures bearing lubrication, increasing the
2.4.10 Sleeve bearing protection devices greasing effect during operation at very low speed and
start up period
a) Sight-level glass
A sight-level gauge is placed on each bearing housing (on Check the electrical connection of the pump motor to be
the left or the right). The level control method is described sure of the rotation direction (the rotation direction is
in chapter 2.4.5 a indicated on the pump).
The pump has to be run few seconds before the
b) Oil thermometer (optional) synchronous machine starting (pre lub effect) and stopped
The thermometer gives the oil sump temperature. as soon as the main shaft line pass over200 rpm
The recorded oil sump temperature must stay below 85°C For application having a long stop period (time over 5
in normal condition. minutes; eg: Steam Turbine, hydro turbine) the pump has
to be run as soon as the speed pass below 200 rpm
The pump has to be run continuously during barring period
(eg: engine maintenance)
32
ALTERNATORS
b) Supply line
2.6 OIL CIRCULATION LUBRICATING UNIT To avoid excessive difficulties of cleaning, and to allow an
easy ducting, it is necessary to use pipes requested for
2.6.0 General points hydraulic duty
Oil circulating bearing are noticeable by the third digit of After installation of the oil lines, rinse the entire oil circuit in
their code. Letters "Z" ; "X" ; "U" indicate the use of an oil order to avoid dirt or impurities entering inside the bearing
circulating bearing and its connections. Rinse with washing oil. It is important
Example of oil circulating bearing : to remove the instrumentation (for example, pressure
EFZLK ; ERXLA ….. gauge, flow-meter ...) during the rinsing operation to avoid
For engineering reason (need of cooling, need of any pollution.
lubrication) an external oil supply can be requested.
NOTE:
Following the machine engineering the lubricating oil can Never leave the Sleeve bearing on the rinsing circuit, as
come from different sources : insoluble particles could enter the bearing and damage it.
• Oil from the drive engine (System with gravity return)
The oil circulating bearings are equipped with an oil inlet
• Oil lubricating unit (System with gravity return) pressure regulating system (item 1)
• Unit heater The delivered oil pressure has to be reduced by the
bearing system before entering the bearing (to adjust
2.6.1 Oil circulation by gravity return about 0.1 bar up to about 0.5 bar to get the correct oil flow,
refer to chapter 2.4.4 for start up).
a) General
A filtering unit must be installed on the supply system. The
This chapter applies for bearings, which need an oil
circulation system filtering power must be at least 25 µ (0.025 mm).
The operating condition (sequences of operation,

c) gravity oil return
maintenance …) are given by a specific notice attached to
the present one. CAUTION:
REMEMBER THAT THE OIL EXHAUSTED FROM THE
BEARING GOES BACK TO THE TANK ONLY BY
1 7 GRAVITY EFFECT
3 6
CAUTION:
NOT TO FOLLOW THESE RULES MAY CAUSE HEAVY
LEAKS BY BEARING SUMP OVERFLOW.
2 CAUTION:
ADVISES AND REQUEST DONE IN THIS CHAPTER DO
4 5 NOT ALLOW THE INSTALLATOR TO COMPLETE BY
ITS OWN CALCULATIONS NEEDED FOR A CORRECT
1 – Oil inlet OPERATION OF ITS SYSTEM.
2 – Oil sight level indicator
3 – Exhaust elbow Some bearing may have two exhaust. In this case the both
4 – Immediate slope exhaust lies must be connected
5 – Following ducts Because of the requested engineering rules the return
6 – Return oil sump ducts frequently have big size. Their manufacturing is
7 - Breather frequently done by welding. It will be necessary to clean
the welds and to rinse the oil lines before use.
Correct oil flow is obtained by regulating the pressure at
the bearing inlet. (item 1)
33
ALTERNATORS
Connection in "Y" shape:
It is acceptable to join the return lines of two bearings. In
200 mm this case it is necessary to maintain a constant oil speed
mini (Pipe section after = sum of the both pipes section)
"H" > 200 mm

mini : 300mm
15° S2
S1 S1 + S2
60°
mini
Min Average slope: 150 mm / m
2.6.2 Oil cooling unit Air/Oil exchanger

Install a breather as close as possible of the bearing output
The breather should be to a minimum of 200 mm above This system does not apply to high thrust capability
the highest point of the bearing. bearings (bearings noticeable by the fifth digit of their
The breather line should be linked to the top side of the code). Example : cannot be used for a bearing EFZLA
main oil line The "cooling unit" is a compact system totally fitted on the
It is imperative to quickly go down after the bearing output: machine, close to the bearing
Install an elbow (minimum 60°) immediately after th e The oil is pumped from the bearing sump, passes through
bearing exhaust.(item 3) an Air to Oil cooler, and is then routed back to the bearing
Pipe with a Minimum slope of 15° (so: a difference of 25 shell. A fan ensure the cooling of the unit using the
cm for 100cm long) minimum 300 mm high ambient air
The difference of level between return oil sump and The oil circulates under low pressure
bearing exhaust must be strictly higher than "H"=200 mm
The oil flow is fixed at the factory without any possible
The average slope of the return line must be strictly higher adjustment.
than 15 cm per meter of ground line. The average slope is
based on the difference of level between bearing exhaust The pump and the fan must run permanently as long as
and return sump oil level. the synchronous machine will rotate
The oil return line must no be exposed to counter current No specific maintenance is required
air flow (air which should went from the oil return sump and In case of failure of the "cooling unit" the synchronous
go toward the bearing). machine :
Eg: a return line which should exhaust above the oil level Remains able to operate safely during a certain time (few
inside an engine oil sump should receive a crankcase back minutes)
pressure which should have a real negative effect. The machine can be started without the cooling system
NOTE : The requested oil flow is indicated in section 1 In such event, the bearing temperature will slowly increase
permitting the bearing temperature sensors to detect
Oil return line size : overheating, trigger the alarm and protect the bearing by
Flange Thread Ø inter Oil flow ; max stopping the machine
(mm) (l/min)
ISO VG 32 ISO VG 68
ISO VG46 ISO VG100
DIN DN32 G 1 ¼" 33 7,5 5,5
DIN DN40 G 1 ½" 40 11 9
DIN DN50 G 2" 50 17 16
DIN DN65 G 2 ½" 66 30 25
DIN DN80 G 3" 80 45 40
34
ALTERNATORS
c) Description Air/Water double tube exchanger

2.7 COOLER The internal air flow is moved by a fan fixed on the
machine shaft. The internal cooling air circulates through
2.7.0 Description of the cooler the machine and through the air-cooler in a closed circuit.
The internal air circulation can be created through natural
a) General points ventilation (machine class IC 8 A1 W7) or through
The purpose of the cooler is to remove machine heat separate ventilation (machine class IC 8 A6 W7).
losses (mechanical, ohmic etc). The exchanger is located Eg : machine class IC 8 A1 W7
on the top of the machine.
air 1 air
Normal operation:
The internal air goes through the exchanger, transferring
the heat and then goes back to the machine.
air
CAUTION:
THE COOLER MUST BE FULLY OPERATIONAL AS
SOON AS THE MACHINE IS ROTATING (EVEN IF THE
MACHINE IS RUN AT NO LOAD !)
b) Description of Air/Air coolers 1 – Air to Water cooler

The internal air flow is moved by a fan fixed on the The double-tube technique keeps the cooling circuit from
machine shaft. The internal cooling air circulates through being affected by possible water leakage. The double tube
the machine and through the air-cooler in a closed circuit. provides a high safety level. In case of leakage, the water
The External air circulation can be created through natural goes from the inside of the internal tube to the coaxial
ventilation (machine class IC 6 A1 A1) or through separate space between the two tubes. The water is drained axially
ventilation(machine class IC 6 A1 A6). to a leakage chamber where it may activate a sensor.
An exchanger comprises a fin-tube block containing :
1 • a steel frame.
• a fin-tube block crimped mechanically to the tubes.
air 3 air
The tube bundle is roll-expanded in the end plates (parts 3
and 4)
air
2 The water distribution in the tubes is provided by two
removable water boxes (part 5). A water box is equipped
with collars for fitting the inlet and outlet lines. Neoprene
seals ensure watertightness between the water boxes and
the end plates.
1 - Air to Air cooler A

2 - Ambient air
3 - Internal air B 1
2
The air-cooler comprises a main housing containing the
tubes and an end housing which act as an air guide
C
3 5
6 4
1 - Single internal tube

2 - External tube with internal grooving and with External
fins
3 - Internal plate
4 - External plate
5 - Outside wall of the pressure tank
6 - Flow of water or liquid leaks
A - Air B - Leakage C - Water
35
ALTERNATORS
Water pipes must be connected stress free
d) Description of Air/Water single tube exchanger
Water pipes must be able to expand without restraint
The internal air flow is moved by a fan fixed on the
machine shaft. The internal cooling air circulates through CAUTION:
the machine and through the air-cooler in a closed circuit.
FOR MACHINE SUPPORTING A VIBRATION LEVEL
The internal air circulation can be created through natural
HIGHER THAN 5 MM/S RMS WE RECOMMEND THE
ventilation (machine class IC 8 A1 W7) or through
separate ventilation(machine class IC 8 A6 W7). USE OF HYDRAULIC FLEXIBLE JUNCTION
An exchanger comprises a fin-tube block containing A pressure limit or must be installed on the system to
• a steel frame protect the complete assembly against abnormal over
• a fin-tube block crimped mechanically onto the tubes. pressure
• The • tube bundle is roll-expanded in the end plates
The water distribution in the tubes is provided by two water 2.7.2 Start-up of the cooler
boxes. One water box is equipped with collars for fitting the a) General points
inlet and outlet water lines. Neoprene seals provide
watertightness between the water boxes and the end If the cooler has been stocked for more than 6 months,
plates. recheck the correct tightening of the water boxes .The
st
tightening must be done in 4 steps (1 step , tightening at
nd
¼ of the nominal torque ; 2 step , tightening at 1/2 of the
rd
A 1 nominal torque ; 3 step , tightening at 3/4 of the nominal
torque ; final step ; tightening at 4/4 of the nominal torque).
The tightening must be done "diagonally" using a torque
wrench
B Bolt M10 M12 M16

Nominal torque [Nm] 46 79 193
2 3
"diagonally" tightening principle :
1 - Tube with fins
2 - End plate
3 - Water bar
A - Air B – Water
2.7.1 Cooler installation

Assembly example: Make sure that the safety devices are operating.
1 Outlet flange
2 Inlet flange Connect the supply and return lines.
3 Water cooler Fill with water, whilst carefully draining the circuit.
4 Connecting flange
5 Tap CAUTION: (machine with motorized fan only)
6 Flexible junction WE RECOMMEND THAT THE FREE OPERATION OF
7 Pipe THE FAN BE CHECKED (NO FRICTION, NO
8 Draining and de aeration BLOCKING).
9 Water leakage detector
CAUTION:
BEFORE START-UP, CHECK THE CLEANLINESS OF
THE COOLER FINS.
Start up the installation (if the other sub-assemblies allow

this).
Load the machine (KVA); adjust the water flow-rate to
obtain the rated flow-rate (refer to Section 1).
Check the water tightness of the lines and of the
exchanger.
Check that the temperatures comply with the
recommended temperatures.
36
ALTERNATORS
2.7.3 Maintenance of the water-cooler 2.7.4 Servicing the water-cooler

a) General points a) Cooler removal
The cooler unit is slid into its housing. It is possible to
A regular cooler clogging will have the result to a regular
remove the cooler from the housing without removing the
winding temperature increasing
water boxes. The cooler is fastened to the housing via a
The cooler cleaning period is mainly function of the water series of screws on the housing.
purity
Remove the supply and return pipes.
In case of used of non recirculated water with risk (eg: river
water with algae passing trough the cooler) we recommend Provide two supports to hold the cooler when it comes out
a tubes visit after one year of operation. The following visit of its housing.
should be forecasted following the observed dust level. Remove the cooler using slings that can be attached to the
connecting flanges.
b) Cleaning
Stop the machine. b) Cooler re-assembly
Cut off the power supply by isolating the inlet and outlet Carry out the operations of the "Cooler Removal" chapter
lines, and drain the water. in the reverse order. Be careful to push the cooler
completely into its housing before tightening the fastening
Disconnect the leak sensor (option with double-tube screws of the cooler to the casing.
cooler), and make sure that there are no leaks.
Remove the water boxes on each side of the machine. 2.7.5 Cooler protection devices
Rinse and brush each water box.
a) Leak detection (float system)
NOTE: A magnet float activates a switch located in the float
Do not use a hard wire brush as this will remove the guiding rod
protective oxidation layer which has formed on the
surfaces of the water boxes. Clean each tube with a metal
scraper. Rinse in soft water. A
x
Keep the leakage chamber dry (double-tube water-cooler 1
only)
y
Proceed to a gasket change
z
c) Leak detection for a double-tube exchanger 2
If a leak is detected, it is necessary to ascertain its origin
immediately and repair it.
Remove the two water boxes, apply a slight positive 1 - Guide rod
pressure in the leakage chamber and thus between the 2 - Magnetic float
two tubes (only concerns double-tube coolers).
A – No potential contacts
If a tube is damaged plug it at BOTH ends. Use a tapered x - Blue y - Brown z – Black
plug. The plug should preferably be made of salt-water
resistant aluminum bronze or of a synthetic material. b) Water temperature sensor (optional)
A temperature sensor may be installed into the water inlet
flow of the cooler.
Proposal of adjustment of the water inlet sensor :
Alarm temperature (*) = Water site temp max + 5 °K
Trip temperature (*) = Alarm temperature + 5 °K
c) Water filtering
Water filtering is not ensured by Leroy Somer.
Water filtering must be better than 600 µ
37
ALTERNATORS
2.8 AIR FILTERS 2.18 TERMINAL BOX
2.8.1. Cleaning 2.18.0 Description

Use the attached Terminal box drawing
a) Air filter cleaning period
The cleaning period depends of the site conditions and can The main terminal box of the machine is located on the top
change of the machine.
The cleaning of the filter is requested if the record of the The neutral and phase wires are connected to the
stator winding temperature (using the stator winding terminals, one terminal per phase and one terminal per
sensors) indicates an abnormal increase in temperature. neutral line. See "Terminal Box" diagram.
The openings provide access to the terminals.
b) Air filter, cleaning procedure
The gland plates are made of non-magnetic materials in
The filter element (flat or cylindrical) is immersed in a tank
order to avoid circulating currents.
of cold or warm water (temperature less than 50°C). Use
water with detergent added. The connection of accessories is achieved by terminal
strips. Use a 5 mm maximum screwdriver to work on the
Shake the filter gently to ensure that the water flows
blocking screws. See the "Machine Protection Devices"
through the filter in both directions.
diagram.
When the filter is clean, rinse it with clear water.
If products have to be added in the terminal box (CT’s,
Drain the filter properly (there must be no more formation VT’s, Shunt ex) refer to chapter.4.4.3
of droplets)
Refit the filter on the machine. 2.18.1 Electric panel
CAUTION: a) Compounding panel (if compound regulator)
DO NOT USE WATER WITH A TEMPERATURE HIGHER The compounding panel is located in the terminal box
THAN 50°C, DO NOT USE SOLVENTS. The three current transformers (TI 01, TI 02, TI 03), fitted
in the terminal box on three power supply conductors,
NOTE : supply the compounding panel.
Do not clean the filter using compressed air. This Rectifier bridges (CR 01, CR 02) rectify the alternating
procedure would reduce filter efficiency. current coming from these three transformers.
An RC circuit (R 01, C 01) acts as a filter; CR 03 protects
the system from high voltage spikes.
R 02 is an assembly of two adjustable resistors (adjusted
at the factory). Refer to the regulator manual.
L 01 is an adjustable self-inducting coil comprising three
coils. The different positions of the jumpers are shown on a
plate attached to the self-inducting coil. L 01 is adjusted to
supply excitation with no load. Refer to the regulator
manual.
b) Booster plate ( if shunt + booster regulator)

The booster plate is located in the terminal box.
The three current transformers TI 01, TI 02, TI 03, fitted to
three power supply conductors, supply the booster plate.
Rectifier bridges (CR 01, CR 02) rectify the alternating
current from these three transformers.
An RC circuit (R 01, C 01) acts as a filter. CR 03 protects
the system from high voltage spikes.
R 02 is an assembly of two adjustable resistors (adjusted
in the factory). Refer to the regulator manual, section
"Principle of Excitation-Regulation".
38
ALTERNATORS
2.18.2 Automatic voltage regulator 3. VOLTAGE REGULATOR AND EXTERNAL

When the automatic voltage regulator is located in the AUXILIARIES
terminal box, it is fitted on a separate plate, insulated from
vibration by means of dampening pads. The operation of The regulator instruction manual may be considered as an
the regulator is explained in chapter 3. independent manual, included in the machine instruction
manual.
CAUTION :
THE DAMPENING PADS MUST BE CHECKED
PERIODICALLY AND REPLACED EVERY THREE
YEARS
2.18.3 Electrical contact tightening

Applicable for brass thread
Thread M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M14 M16
Torque 2.5 4 8 20 35 57 87
[Nm]
2.19 PROTECTION DEVICES
2.19.1 Stator protection devices

See "Stator protection" in chapter 2.1.3.
2.19.2 Bearing protection devices

See "Bearing protection" in chapter 2.3.5 or chapter 2.4.9
2.19.3 Cooler protection devices

See "Cooler safety" in chapter 2.7.4
2.20 NAMEPLATES
2.20.1. Main nameplate

The main nameplate is fitted to the stator. It gives the
manufacturer's electrical characteristics, the type of
machine and its serial number.
For machines with anti-friction bearings, the quantity of
grease, the type and frequency of lubrication are
stipulated.
2.20.2. Lubrication nameplate

The machines with Sleeve bearings have a lubrication
plate attached to the bearing, giving:
Oil change frequency; Oil capacity of bearing; Oil viscosity.
The machines with anti-friction bearings have a lubrication
plate fixed on the stator, giving :
Type of bearing; Grease-change frequency; Quantity of
grease.
2.20.3. Rotation direction nameplate

An arrow on the drive end bearing indicates the rotation
direction.
39
ALTERNATORS
4. INSTALLATION
4.1.5 Storage measures of a site machine
Before stopping the machine for a long period (several
4.1 TRANSPORT AND STORAGE months), it is essential to take several precautionary
measures:
4.1.1 Transport
Refer to chapter 2.3.2 (anti friction machine) or chapter
During the transport the shocks level applied to the 2.4.2 (sleeve bearing machine)
2
machines must remains below 30 m/s
The heating resistor must be switched on at all times.
Machines equipped with roller bearing must have their
For water-coolers, the water flow must be shut off. If the
rotor locked during the transport to avoid "false brineling" water is not treated and if there is likelihood of freezing, the
problem exchanger must be drained.
Machine temperature must remains within the range -20°C For an open machine, it is recommended that the air inlet
to +70°C. Stay down to -40°C during few hours is adm itted. and outlet be closed.
The machine must be protected against bad weather Before starting the machine up again, it will be necessary
conditions and condensation. to carry out a start-up inspection.
Machines must not be handled at temperature below -20°C
4.1.2 Storage warehouse 4.2 INSTALLATION OF THE ELECTRIC

MACHINE
The machine must be stored in clean and dry premises
which are not subject to abrupt changes in temperature or
4.2.1 Fitting the coupling (double-bearing machine
to high humidity. only)
Storage at an ambient temperature of +5 to +45° C is The coupling must be balanced separately before
recommended. assembly on the machine shaft. Refer to the balancing
The machine must not be subject to vibrations. instructions in chapter 2.2.5.
The shrinking of the half coupling onto the electrical
4.1.3 Maritime packing machine shaft end must be choose, by the gen-set
The synchronous machine is carefully packed in a wooden manufacturer, in such way as it should be removable for
maintenance (e.g.: bearing change).
crate, then hermetically sealed.
Breaking the hermetic protective film discharges ACEO of
4.2.2 Fitting the stator
its long-duration storage guarantee.
Four plates on the frame enable the unit to be fitted to a
skid.
4.1.4 Unpacking and installation
The fixing bolts must support the forces created by the
DANGER : static and dynamic loads.
THE FOUR LIFTING HOOKS MUST BE USED TO LIFT The machine may be positioned by means of 4 dowel pins.
THE MACHINE WITH SLINGS (ONE HOOK AT EACH The dowel pins make later realignment easier. (The use of
CORNER OF THE MACHINE) pins is optional).
Rotors of machines with Sleeve bearings and single- The machine may be aligned through the use of 4 jacking-
bearing machines, are blocked during transportation so as screws. These jacking-screws allow the machine to be
to avoid any movement. Withdraw the retaining bars. The positioned according to the various axes.
retaining bar is screwed to the end of the shaft and to the
front support.
CAUTION :
ALL THE LOCKING DEVICES PAINTED RED OR WITH
RED STICKER MUST BE REMOVED.
The end of the shaft is protected from corrosion. Clean it

before coupling.
40
ALTERNATORS
c) Sleeve bearing shaft elevation

4.3 ELECTRIC MACHINE ALIGNMENT The calculated displacement is given in " section 1"
Exact Sleeve bearing elevation due to the oil film :
4.3.1 Alignment general points The machine goes from point "1" to point "2".
a) General points
The alignment consist to obtain the driving shaft and the -X X
driven shaft coaxial when operating at the nominal
conditions (machine rotating ; at its operating temperature) Y Y
The machine must be aligned according to the ACEO
standard and adhere to the manufacturer's alignment
standard for the drive machine.
β
When heating the machine has its shaft line which grow
up. Between stop and rotation the shaft axis location inside Horaire Stop Anti horaire
its bearing is different. The total axis height elevation is Clock Wise Counter Clock Wise
composed of the thermal elevation and of the bearing
elevation.
2 2
CAUTION:
1 1
THE ALIGNMENT MUST BE DONE TAKING IN
CONSIDERATION THE SHAFT MOVEMENT Clear : diametrical clearance
CORRECTION Oil film : oil film thickness
The correct locating of the parts must be obtained by β : Attitude angle
inserting shims under the machine pads..  Clear. 
The double-bearing machines are mounted with bearings X= − Oil film  . Sin ( β )
 2 
(ball or roller) or Sleeve bearings. The axial clearance of
the bearings (if the machine has Sleeve bearings) must be  Clear   Clear 
Y = −  − Oil film  . Cos ( β )
distributed as well as possible, taking into account the axial  2   2 
thermal expansion. The Anti friction-bearing machines with
a positioning bearing (standard machine) do not have axial d)Anti-friction bearing shaft elevation
play.
Caused by thermal growth of the anti friction bearing.
The machines are delivered with the rotor mechanically
"2"
centered (axially and radially) in relation to the stator.
Y ° 0,01 mm
CAUTION :
THE ALIGNMENT STANDARDS OF MANUFACTURERS
OF DRIVE MACHINES ARE FREQUENTLY MORE
PRECISE THAN THOSE OF THE A.C.E.O "1"
1 - cold, in rotation, or stopped
b) Axis height Thermal elevation 2 - hot, in rotation, or stopped
∆ H (mm) =λ (°K -1) . H(m) . ∆T(°K)
H(m) = Height of the machine axis
∆T= frame temperature elevation = 30°C
λ = Coefficient of steel elongation = 0.012 °K-1
41
ALTERNATORS
4.3.2 Two bearings machine alignment 4.3.3 Single bearing machine alignment
a) machines without axial end play (standard) a) General points
The alignment must take the tolerances of the coupling The alignment consist also to get the rotor of the
into account. A misalignment, acceptable by the coupling, synchronous machine coaxial to its stator
must not create an excess load on the bearing subsequent
to the axial and radial stresses outside the tolerances of
said bearing.
Shafts alignment limits to follow:
Angular error
0.01 mm
0.08 mm 100 mm
parallelism error
"A" et "B" give the shaft line alignment
"D" et "E" give the alignment of the stator regarding the
To check the alignment, there are different methods: the rotor. Because of the engineering of the synchronous
"double concentricity" method is described in the machine the only requested adjustment is "C".
"alignment procedure" chapter 4.3.4.
b) Single bearing machine except A56 equipped with
b) machines with axial end play anti friction bearing
The alignment must be performed using the same method applicable to all machines; except A56 equipped with anti
as for a machine having no axial end play. friction bearing
CAUTION: It is imperative to position the rotor axially in relation to the
THE ROTOR AXIAL LOCATION MUST BE CHECKED TO stator in order to achieve correct magnetic centring of the
AVOID ANY MAGNETIC OFFSET rotor in the stator.
Single-bearing machines are delivered by the ACEO
CAUTION: factory with the rotor centered mechanically (axially and
THE FAN THRUST OF THE ELECTRICAL MACHINE radially) in relation to the stator.
MUST BE HELD THROUGH THE COUPLING. L
A “C”
A needle fitted on the drive end side bearing must face a
groove machined on the shaft. If the needle is missing the
distance "A" (distance from the groove up to the first L
bearing part) is stamped on the shaft enabling checking.
Example for a sleeve bearing machine :
B
Two half-shells (B parts) mounted on the front flange act

as a front bearing for the transportation and installation.
The outside of the centring half-shells face a groove
machined on the shaft.
"A"
The half-shells have "L = L" construction symmetry
The length "A" shown on the diagram is stamped on the
shaft end (allowing alignment in case of absence of item
"B" rings or in case of absence of groove on the shaft)
The length "L" shown on the diagram is stamped on the
shaft end.
The side "C" represents the machined side of the bearing.
Remove the centring upper half-shell (upper "B" part).
Fit the electric machine to the drive system centering.
42
ALTERNATORS
Remove the centering lower half-shell (lower "B" part). The centering of the rotor in relation to the stator should be
Carry out the alignment by moving the machine assembly checked by measuring the concentricity of the shaft in
by means of lifting-screws mounted on the brackets (see relation to the end ring of the stator. After having tightened
alignment procedure below). Use shims in order to obtain the fastening screws definitively, the rotor-stator alignment
proper alignment. must be better than 0.05 mm from axis to axis (that is 0.1
mm reading).
The centering of the rotor in relation to the stator should be
checked by measuring the concentricity of the shaft in A
relation to the bearing. After having tightened the fastening
screws completely, the rotor-stator alignment must be
better than 0.05 mm axis-to-axis (that is 0.1 mm reading). 1
Shafts alignment limits (regarding the drive):
2
Angular error
3
0.01 mm
0.02 mm 100 mm
parallelism error
Check the axial positioning of the rotor in relation to the

stator. For this verification, use an upturned half-shell ("B" A
part) (use of the symmetry of the "L = L" part) as shim. The
outside of the shim ("B" part) must be facing the groove 4
machined on the shaft to within +/- 1 mm.
1 - Delivered loose
Mount the cover plates by replacing the transportation half- 2 - Fan
shells (delivered separate with the machine) to avoid 3 - Positioning groove
foreign matter entering in the machine. Make sure the 4 Shipping bracket
closing plates are correctly centered in relation to the shaft.
Shafts alignment limits:
c) Single bearing machine A56 Anti friction-bearing,
only
Angular error
It is imperative to position the rotor axially in relation to the
stator in order to have proper magnetic centring of the
0.01 mm
rotor in the stator.
The single-bearing machines are delivered by the ACEO 0.02 mm 100 mm
factory with the rotor centered mechanically (axially and parallelism error
radially) in relation to the stator.
Check that the groove marking machined on the shaft is
A false front bearing ("Transportation support") keeps the opposite the outside face of the stator or respects the
rotor mechanically centered during transportation. The measurement "A" to within + or - 1 mm.
rotor is centered if the groove machined on the shaft
coincides with the inside face of the shipping bracket. The Mount the fan screen on the stator (delivered with the
inside surface of the shipping bracket is in the same plane machine as separate part).
as the outside machining of the stator. Mount the fan on its hub, whilst respecting the angular
The length "A" shown in the diagram is marked by cold marking (balancing respect).
stamping on the coupling armature. Fit the front housing.
Slide the fan screen and the fan onto the shaft.
Fit the rotor on the centring of the drive system.
Remove the "Transportation support"
Carry out the alignment by moving the machine assembly
by means of lifting-screws mounted on the pads. Use
shims to obtain correct alignment.
43
ALTERNATORS
MEASUREMENTS
4.3.4 Alignment procedure + 134
a) Checking "Double concentricity" alignment method C1 C2

This method is not sensitive to axial movements.(the + 90
alignment methods using axial measure may often be + 70
12h B
perturbed by small axial movement of the rotor)
It is possible to check the alignment with the coupling + 164
installed.
9h 3h
Equipment required : + 86 A
+ 104
Two rigid brackets. The rigidity of the two brackets is very + 102
important.
Two micrometers 6h L=400
Implementation : + 100
During the measures, both shafts must turn simultaneously Measurements referring to the vertical plane:
in the same direction. (For example : the coupling installed Considering the vertical plane "C1" : The vertical action
with its screws untightened). By turning both shafts towards the top of shaft "A" on the micrometer is dominant.
simultaneously, the measurement is not affected by the In the plane "C1" the axis "A" is higher than axis "B”
error resulting from run out of the two shaft ends. ( 90 - 100 ) / 2 = - 5
In the vertical plane "C2", the vertical action towards the
C1 top of shaft "B" on the micrometer is greater.
In the plane "C2" the axis "B" is higher than axis "A"
( 134 - 102 ) / 2 = 16
12h B
The respective position of the axes is as follows:
9h
C1
A B
3h
A
16
6h C2
C2
5
L
Regarding the vertical plane the angular alignment error is:
The "C1" and "C2" micrometers are located at an angular ( 16 + 5 ) / 400 = 5.25 % (not acceptable)
difference of 180°.
Measurements referring to the horizontal axis:
More the distance "L" is long better should be the
In the plane "C1" the axis "B" is further to the right than "A”
sensitivity to detect the angular error
( 104 - 86 ) / 2 = 9
The reading should be performed 4 times for the "C1" and
In the plane "C2" the axis "B" is further to the left than "A”
"C2" micrometers : at 12h, 3h, 6h, 9h
( 70 - 164 ) / 2 = - 47
It is recommended to record the results and draw the axes
The representation of the shafts is as follows:
for better evaluation, as explained below. Interpretation of
measurements by means of an example. C1
Values given in millimeters. The reading is considered B
positive (+) when the micrometer stylus is pushed inwards. A
47
C2
9
Regarding the horizontal plane the angular error is:

( 47 + 9 ) / 400 = 14 % (not acceptable)
In the both planes the parallelism error is:
5 2 + 9 = 10.3 or 16 2 + 47 = 49.6 (not acceptable)
44
ALTERNATORS
4.4.1. Phase-sequence
4.4 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
a) Standard units ; IEC 34-8
4.4.0. General points Except by special request of the customer, the phase-
The installation must comply with the electrical diagrams. sequence is carried out using the IEC 34-8 standard. An
Refer to the attached the electrical diagrams. arrow located on the front bearing indicates the direction of
rotation.
Check that all the protection devices are correctly
connected and in good working order. In the terminal box a specific marking plate indicates the
specific generator phase sequence.
For low-voltage machines, power supply cables must be
connected directly to the machine terminals (without
adding washers etc) Clockwise rotation viewed Counter clockwise rotation
For high-voltage machines, power supply cables should be from the shaft drive end viewed from the shaft
connected to separate terminals or to current transformer drive end
terminals.
The phases are marked: The phases are marked:
NOTE: U1, V1, W1. U1, V1, W1.
THE GLAND PLATE IS MADE OF NON MAGNETIC Viewed from the front of Viewed from the front of
MATERIAL. the terminal box the the terminal box the
terminals are : terminals are :
CAUTION U1, V1, W1 U1, V1, W1
DO NOT ADD WASHERS TO THE POWER SUPPLY The installer connects : The installer connects :
CABLE TERMINALS OTHER THAN THOSE USED BY L1 --> U1 L3 --> U1
THE MANUFACTURER OF THE ELECTRIC MACHINE L2 --> V1 L2 --> V1
L3 --> W1 L1 --> W1
Check that the lugs are tightened.
CAUTION
ALL CURRENT TRANSFORMERS MUST BE
CONNECTED
U2 V2 W2 U2 V2 W2
CAUTION
THE INSTALLED POWER CABLES MUST BE FIXED
AND SUPPORTED IN SUCH A WAY AS TO BE ABLE TO
WITHSTAND THE VIBRATION LEVEL REACHED BY
THE GENERATOR IN OPERATION (refer to Vibration
chapter)
The power cables must not stress (push, pull, bend ...) the U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
generator terminals
L1 L2 L3 L3 L2 L1
45
ALTERNATORS
b) On request ; NEMA
4.4.2 Insulating distances
An arrow located on the front bearing indicates the
direction of rotation. Products not delivered by ACEO and then installed in the
terminal box must meet the electrical insulating distances.
In the terminal box a specific marking plate indicates the
specific generator phase sequence. This applies to power cables and lugs, and to added
transformers, etc.
Nominal Voltage 500 V 1 KV 2 KV 3 KV
Counter clockwise rotation Clockwise rotation viewed
viewed from the stator from the stator connection Phase-Phase in 25 30 40 60
connection (NEMA) (NEMA) the air (mm)
(Clockwise rotation viewed (Counter clockwise Phase-Earth in the 25 30 40 60
from the shaft drive end rotation viewed from the air (mm)
following IEC) shaft drive end following
Phase-Phase 25 30 40 70
IEC)
Creeping (mm)
The cables are marked: The cables are marked: Phase-Earth 25 30 40 70
U1, V1, W1. U1, V1, W1. Creeping (mm)
The terminals are marked The terminals are marked
: :
T3, T2, T1 T3, T2, T1 Nominal Voltage 5 KV 7,5KV 12,5KV 15 KV
Viewed from the front of Viewed from the front of Phase-Phase in 120 180 190 190
the terminal box the the terminal box the the air (mm)
cables are : cables are :
U1, V1, W1 U1, V1, W1 Phase-Earth in the 90 120 125 125
air (mm)
The installer connects : The installer connects :
Phase-Phase 120 180 190 190
L1 --> (U1) T3 L3 --> (U1) T3 Creeping (mm)
L2 --> (V1) T2 L2 --> (V1) T2
L3 --> (W1) T1 L1 --> (W1) T1 Phase-Earth 120 180 190 190
Creeping (mm)
4.4.3 Added products in the terminal box

This may apply to site added customer CTs ; VTs etc.
T6 T5 T4 T6 T5 T4
ACEO must be informed if some appliances have to be
installed in the generator terminal box.
The products not delivered by ACEO and then installed in
the terminal box must meet the electrical insulating
distances. Refer to chapter 4.4.2.
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1 The installed appliances must be able to withstand
1 vibration.
T3 T2 T1 T3 T2 T1
L1 L2 L3 L3 L2 L1
46
ALTERNATORS
5. START-UP
5.0 START-UP SEQUENCE

The generator start up (commissioning) must follow the
following sequences:
5.0.1 Static checks

Machine fixing as per chapter 5.2
Alignment as per chapter 5.2
Cooling as per chapter 5.2
Bearing lubrication as per chapter 5.2
Electrical connections as per chapter 5.1.0 and chapter
5.1.2
Winding insulation as per chapter 6.3.2
5.0.2 Rotating checks

a) Rotating checks not excited
Run the generator without excitation by steps to verify the
bearings temperature as per chapter 5.2
At the nominal speed (not excited) measure the vibrations.
Check that the vibration level is in accordance with the
generator (as per chapter 5.2.1) and duty request.
b) Rotating checks at no load excited

In AVR manual mode; Voltage adjustment; check the
excitation current value (refer to AVR manual and to the
generator test report)
In AVR automatic mode; Voltage adjustments; Voltage
range; check the excitation current value (refer to AVR
manual and to the generator test report)
At the nominal speed (excited) measure the vibrations.
c) Generator and site safeties

proceed to the site safeties adjustment (over voltage relay,
over current relay, differential protection; negative
sequence relay...). The setting points are not under our
responsability.
Check the synchronizer setting following chapter 5.1.3
For any operation at a speed exceeding the nominal range
(generally the main frequency +3%) the generator
excitation must be shut off (refer to the electrical diagram)
d) Rotating checks at full load

Operating In parallel with the mains
Adjust the Power Factor
Load the generator step by step. :
Check the excitation current at 25%of the rated load
Check the excitation current at 100%of the rated load
At the nominal speed (full load) measure the vibrations.
47
ALTERNATORS
5.0.3 GENERATOR START UP CHECK LIST

TYPE SERIAL N°
Voltage V Frequency Hz Speed rpm
Output Power kVA Power Factor
STATIC CHECKS
Mechanical checks
• Direction of Rotation Clock Wise or Anti-clock Wise
• Mechanical Fixing of the generator ______________________________________________________
• Coupling - Alignment to the engine ______________________________________________________
• Cooling : Coolant flow and level ______________________________________________________
• Air inlet and exhaust free ______________________________________________________
• Bearing lubrication : Sleeve Bearings Lubrication (flow ; level ; oil type) ________________________
or Anti-friction Bearings Greasing
Temperature sensors (correct readings) _______________________________
• Space Heaters ____________________________________________________________________
Type of AVR : 1F 2F 3F
Electrical connections between alternator, AVR and main panel :

• Output power cables connections following phase order ___________________________________________
• Terminal box connections ___________________________________________
• AVR detection voltage ___________________________________________
• Supply power and excitation terminals ___________________________________________
• Network detection (3F only) ___________________________________________
• Command signals (equalisation and synchronisation for 2F and 3F) _________________________________
• Excitation polarity and booster ___________________________________________
• Protective devices : (Bearing oil level fault detectors; Temperature sensors, etc) __________________
• External accessories (e.g.. remote potentiometer) ___________________________________________
ALL CURRENT TRANSFORMERS MUST BE CONNECTED
Windings insulation
• Insulation test of the : Stator Rotor Exciter armature Exciter field
Measured values in MOhms :
All works must be carried out by a qualified and authorized person.

For more information, please refer to the service manual
Tested by : Date & Signature :
48
ALTERNATORS
ROTATING CHECKS
WITH EXCITATION - AT NO LOAD CONDITIONS
• Verification of the bearings temperature °C _________________________
• In manual mode : Voltage adjustment ___________________________________

Excitation current check ___________________________________
• In automatic mode : Voltage Setting (referring to nominal voltage) ________________________

Excitation current check ___________________________________
• Parallel coupling : Adjustment to parallel operation (3F) ________________________
A FAULTY SYNCHRONISING CAN BE THE ORIGIN OF DAMAGES (HIGH MECHANICAL OVER-

TORQUE)
• Maximum acceptable values for synchronisation to the mains :
Maximum frequency shift 0,1 Hz _________________________
Maximum Phase offset 10 ° _________________________
Maximum voltage (P.N.) difference 5% of Un _________________________
Control / Adjustment of the site safeties

• Over-voltage, _________________________________________________________________
• Over-current (by short-circuit on stator in separate excitation mode), _________________________
• Negative sequence relay, _________________________________________________________________
• Over-speed, __________________________________________________________________
• Differential protection (in static conditions), _____________________________________
• Other protective device. __________________________________________________________________
CHECK THAT ALL SAFETY EQUIPMENT OPERATES CORRECTLY
WITH EXCITATION - LOADED
• Voltage stability __________________________________________________________________

• Adjustment of the Power Factor ____________________________________
• Verification of the excitation current versus load from 25% to full load at rated PF. _______________
• Maximum load value kVA PF
• Vibrations measurements in : mm/s RMS. or other unit

At nominal speed measure the vibrations
Drive End H V A
Non Drive End H V A
All works must be carried out by a qualified and authorized person.

For more information, please refer to the service manual
Tested by : Date & Signature :
49
ALTERNATORS
c) Parallel coupling
5.1 ELECTRICAL START-UP INSPECTION CAUTION:
AN IMPROPER COUPLING CAN BE THE ORIGIN OF
5.1.0 General points DAMAGES (HIGH MECHANICAL OVERTORQUE)
Electrical connections (auxiliaries, safeties and power
connections) must comply with the diagrams provided. At the coupling the following values must not be overpass:
Refer to chapter 4 Max frequency shift : 0,1 Hz
Max phase offset : 10° (electrical angle)
DANGER:
CHECK THAT ALL SAFETY EQUIPMENT OPERATES Max voltage (phase - neutral) between machines :
CORRECTLY. (at phase offset =0) 5 % of the nominal voltage
In case of faulty coupling, of mains desapearing followed
by a mains come back inducing a faulty coupling over what
5.1.1 Winding Insulation it is acceptable by the generator, ACEO cannot be
The insulation and the polarization index must be considered as responsable of the damages.
measured on start up.
To measure the insulation refer to the chapter.6.3.2
5.2 MECHANICAL START-UP INSPECTION
5.1.2 Electrical connections
The phases must be connected directly to the machine
links (with no spacers or washers, etc). a) Alignment ; fixing ; prime mover
Make sure that the lugs are sufficiently tightened. The installation must comply with the manufacturer’s
installation rules for drive machine (alignment, mounting).
CAUTION: An arrow at the drive end, end shield, indicates the
ALL CURRENT TRANSFORMERS MUST BE direction of rotation.
CONNECTED
b) Cooling
The air inlet and exhaust must be unobstructed.
5.1.3 Parallel operation
The cooling auxiliaries (water circulation in the cooler, etc)
a) Definition of parallel operation must be operating.
• Between machines
c) Lubrication
Parallel operation is possible if the power ratio between the
Lubrication must be carried out :
smallest machine and the largest machine is less than or
- anti friction bearings, refer to chapter 2.3
equal to 10.
- Sleeve bearings, refer to chapter 2.4
• With the mains
The "mains" is defined as a source of power greater than 5.2.1 Vibrations
or equal to ten times the output of the machine with which The vibration measurement must be taken on each
it will be coupled. bearing in the three directions. The measured levels must
be lower than the specified values indicated in the chapter
b) Possibility of parallel operation
2.1.3
Parallel operation, if planned at the outset, does not cause
any problems if several basic rules are followed. Adjust the sensor as per chapter 2.1.3
51
ALTERNATORS
6. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
6.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

The purpose of the general maintenance schedule below is to help establish the maintenance schedule particular to the
installation. The suggestions and recommendations are to be followed as closely as possible in order to maintain the machine
efficiency and in order not to reduce the service life of the machine.
The maintenance operations are detailed in the chapters relative to the subjects concerned (Example: bearing, see chapter 2).
LUBRICATION AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Frequency of maintenance
Days Hours Comments
STATOR
Winding temperature 1 Refer to 2.1.3
Bolts tightening 8000 Refer to 6.2.2
Cleaning air inlet and outlet 1000 Refer to 6.2.3
Insulation 8000 Refer to 6.3.2
Polarisation index 8000 Refer to 6.3.2
ROTOR
Insulation 8000 Refer to 6.3.2
Cleaning diodes 8000 Refer to 7.4
Diodes tightening 8000 Refer to 2.2.4
Polarisation index 8000 Refer to 6.3.2
TERMINAL BOX
Cleaning 8000
Regulator assembly 8000 Applicable if mounted in the terminal box
Bolts tightening 8000 Refer to 6.2.2
Following technical specification in "Section 1"

SLEEVE BEARINGS
Oil leak 1 Refer to 2.4.9
Oil temperature 1 Refer to 2.4.10
Oil level 1 Refer to 2.4.5
Oil drain 8000/16000 Following environment cleanness; Refer to 2.4.5
Bolts tightening 8000 Refer to 2.4

ANTI FRICTION BEARINGS
Re greasing Refer to 2.3.3 ; See lub plate; grease at least every 6 months
Bearing temperature 1 Refer to 2.3.5
52
ALTERNATORS
LUBRICATION AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (following)
Jours Heures Commentaires

COOLER
Leakage level 1 Refer to 2.7.4
Water temperature 1 Refer to 2.7.4
Cleaning Refer to 2.7.2 ; following site condition

FILTERS
Cleaning 1000 Refer to 2.8 & following " Section 1"
FAN-MOTOR
Bearing Re greasing Refer to motor lub plate ; following" Section 1"
8000 Refer to 2.19 et "Section 1 ; (sensors, , ….)
PROTECTION DEVICES
53
ALTERNATORS
6.2.3 Cleanliness
6.2 MECHANICAL MAINTENANCE
The whole machine must be kept clean.
To obtain additional information on the maintenance of
sub-assemblies, refer to the chapters dealing with the sub- CAUTION :
assemblies concerned. ALL THE CLEANING PERIODS INDICATED IN THIS
MANUAL MAY BE CHANGED (INCREASED OR
6.2.1 Air gap check DECREASED) ACCORDING TO SITE CONDITIONS
a) Double bearing machine The air inlet and air outlet surfaces must be maintained
Verification of the air gap is not necessary. The rotor is clean (Louvers can be cleaned as per the filters) refer to
mechanically centered by its construction. Even after chapter 2.8.
dismantling and reassembling the machine, the rotor will
return to its position without verification of the air gap. CAUTION :
DIRT ENTERING THE MACHINE MAY POLLUTE AND
b) Single bearing machine THUS REDUCE THE ELECTRICAL INSULATION
When the machine is delivered, the rotor is mechanically
centered in the stator (see chapter on alignment). After The rotating diodes must be keep clean. The rotating
dismantling the machine, it will be necessary to center the diodes cover has to be clean. Refer to chapter 7.4
rotor in the stator, by using the two half-shells (delivered
with the machine) as explained in the chapter 4.3.3.
6.3 ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE
If you do not have 1/2 shells, use a dial indicator to check
the concentricity between the shaft (machined surface)
and the front bearing (machined surface). 6.3.1 MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
a) Instruments used
6.2.2 Bolts tightening - AC voltmeter 0-600 Volts
Check the tightening of the sleeve bearing fixing bolts - DC voltmeter 0-150 Volts
(refer to chapter 2.4)
- Ohmmeter 10E-3 to 10 ohms
Check the tightening of the rotating diodes (refer to chapter
2.2.4) - Megohmmeter 1 to 100 MOhms / 500 Volts
Check the tightening of the terminal box accessories (refer - AC Ammeter 0- 4500 A
to chapter 2.18)
- DC Ammeter 0-150 A
If no torque value is specified into the concerned chapter
the following values can be used - Frequency meter 0-80 Hz
Low resistance can be measured by means of an
appropriate ohmmeter or by using a Kelvin or Wheatstone
Bolt : Steel / Steel bridge.
(greasy thread)
NOTE :
Ø nominal Torque Ø nominal Torque The identification of the equipment polarity may differ from
(mm) (mN) (mm) (mN) one ammeter to another.
3 1,16 18 261
4 2,66 20 370
5 5,2 22 509
6 9,1 24 637
8 22 27 944
10 44 30 1280
12 76 33 1739
14 121 36 2232
16 189
54
ALTERNATORS
b) Identification of ohmmeter polarity The measurement has to be taken between one phase and
the earth.
In many testing procedures, the ohmmeter polarity is
important (diode test, etc) and must be known. As a Machine nominal voltage
second instrument, you must use a voltmeter in the "direct
Un ≤ 2400 V Un > 2400 V
current" position, in order to check the polarity of the
ohmmeter connections. Proceed as explained below : Applied test 500 V DC 1000 V DC
voltage (DC)
[3 (U n + 1)] MΩ
The measured value at 25°C must be over
8
0 Volts 10 Ohms 0
where Un (the nominal voltage) is in Kilovolts. (e.g. : a

DC ž generator of 6.6 KV must have an insulation resistance
greater than 22.8 MΩ).
If the minimum insulation level is not reached, dry the
windings (refer to chapter 7.5)
c) Field insulation measurement

Disconnect the two ends of the field at the rotating diodes
bridge
6.3.2 Insulation check of the winding The measurement should be taken between one end of the
a) General field winding and the earth.
The insulation resistance enables the status of the The applied test voltage must be of 500 V DC.
machine insulating to be verified. The measured value must be over 20 MΩ.
The following measurements can be taken at any time If the minimum insulation level is not reached, dry the
without any damage to machine insulating material. windings (refer to chapter 7.5)
The insulation check must be done :
d) Exciter insulation measurement
Before the start up
After a long standstill CAUTION
As soon as an abnormal operation occurs. ALL ACCESSORIES MUST BE DISCONNECTED (AVR ,
If the measurement indicates a poor result we advise EMC FILTER ;;;)
contacting our Service department. REFER TO THE ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM TO IDENTIFY
THE ACCESSORIES TO DISCONNECT
To perform the measurement the generator must be
stopped. To measure the exciter field insulation disconnect the two
ends of the exciter field at the terminals located on the top
If the resistance is less than that required, it is necessary, of the exciter.
if possible, to dry the machine (refer to chapter 7.5).
To measure the exciter armature insulation disconnect the
b) Armature insulation measure two ends of the exciter armature at the rotating diodes
Disconnect the three phases at the generator terminals. bridge
The measurement should be taken between one end of the
CAUTION field winding and the earth.
ALL ACCESSORIES MUST BE DISCONNECTED (AVR , The applied test voltage must be of 500 V DC.
EMC FILTER ;;;)
REFER TO THE ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM TO IDENTIFY The measured value must be over 20 MΩ.
THE ACCESSORIES TO DISCONNECT If the minimum insulation level is reached, dry the windings
(refer to chapter 7.5)
55
ALTERNATORS
e) Polarization index
The polarization index enables the status of the machine
7. SERVICING
insulating to be verified and gives an indication of the
pollution of the winding. 7.1 GENERAL SERVICING
A poor polarization index may be corrected by a cleaning
of the winding DANGER :
BEFORE WORKING ON THE GENERATOR, MAKE
The following measurements can be taken at any time
SURE THAT THE START-UP CANNOT BE ACTIVATED
without any damage to the machine insulating material.
BY ANY MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC SIGNAL
CAUTION
ALL ACCESSORIES MUST BE DISCONNECTED (AVR , DANGER:
EMC FILTER ;;;) BEFORE WORKING ON THE MACHINE, MAKE SURE
REFER TO THE ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM TO IDENTIFY THAT YOU HAVE UNDERSTOOD THE OPERATING
THE ACCESSORIES TO DISCONNECT PRINCIPLES OF THE SYSTEM. IF NECESSARY, REFER
TO THE APPROPRIATE CHAPTERS IN THIS MANUAL.
NOTE:
It must be done using a stable DC source. CAUTION:
Use a specific polarization index appliance under 500 or GIVEN THE POWER FACTOR APPLIED TO THE
1000 DC volts (refer to" insulation of the winding" chapter MACHINE, A VOLTMETER OR KILOWATT METER
for the correct applied voltage) DOES NOT NECESSARILY SHOW THE KVA LOAD OF
THE MACHINE.
Open the winding star point
Disconnect AVR cables from the stator terminals
7.2 TROUBLESHOOTING

When a defective part is replaced with a spare part, make
sure that it is in good condition.
7.2.1 Regulator trouble-shooting procedure

Refer to the enclosed regulator manual.
7.3 ELECTRICAL TESTS

Apply the requested voltage
7.3.1 Stator winding test
After 1 minute record the Insulating resistance See chapter 6.3
After 10 minutes record the Insulating resistance
7.3.2 Rotor winding test
See chapter 6.3
The polarization index must be higher than 2. 7.3.3 Excitation armature winding test
Proceed for each phase See chapter 6.3
7.3.4 Excitation field winding test

See chapter 6.3
7.3.5 Rotating diode bridge test

See chapter 2.2
7.3.6 Electric panel test

Use electrical diagrams for assistance.
56
ALTERNATORS
7.4.2 Cleaning the stator, rotor, excitation system and

7.4 CLEANING THE WINDINGS diodes
7.4.0 General points a) using specific chemical product

The cleaning of the winding is an heavy service operation The insulation and the impregnation system are not
which has to be engaged only if necessary. damaged by solvents (see the list of authorized products
The cleaning of the windings become necessary as soon above).
as the polarization index is not satisfactory (refer to chapter It is essential to avoid entry of cleaning agents into the
6.3.2) slots. Apply the product with a brush, sponging frequently
in order to avoid accumulation in the housing. Dry the
7.4.1 Coil-cleaning product winding with a dry cloth. Allow the traces to evaporate
before reassembling the machine.
a) General
CAUTION: CAUTION:
SOLVENTS, WHICH ARE HIGHLY CHLORINATED AND AFTER CLEANING THE GENERATOR, DRYING IS
SUBJECT TO HYDROLYSIS IN DAMP ATMOSPHERES IMPERATIVE TO RECOVER THE CORRECT WINDING
ARE PROHIBITED. THEY QUICKLY BECOME INSULATION
ACIDIFIED, PRODUCING CORROSIVE AND
CONDUCTIVE HYDROCHLORIC ACID. b) Rinsing using soft water
Hot soft water (less than 80°C) used under pressure (less
CAUTION: than 20 bars) can be used.
DO NOT USE TRICHLORETHYLENE,
CAUTION:
PERCHLORETHYLENE, OR TRICHLORETHANE
AFTER CLEANING THE GENERATOR, DRYING IS
Avoid mixtures sold under various trademarks which often IMPERATIVE TO RECOVER THE CORRECT WINDING
contain white spirit (which evaporates too slowly) or INSULATION
chlorinated products (which are likely to become acidified).
CAUTION:
DO NOT USE ALKALINE PRODUCTS. THEY ARE
DIFFICULT TO RINSE AND CAUSE REDUCTION OF
INSULATION RESISTANCE BY FIXING THE HUMIDITY
b) Cleaning products
Use pure de-greasing and volatile agents which are well-
defined such as :
Gasoline (without additives)
Toluene (slightly toxic ) ; inflammable
Benzene or benzine (toxic ; inflammable)
Ciclohexaire (non-toxic; inflammable)
Soft water
57
ALTERNATORS
Check the winding insulation and the polarization index
7.5 DRYING THE WINDING If necessary conduce an other drying period...
U1
C
7.5.0 General points U2
All electric machines must be stored under dry conditions. V1 A B
If a machine is placed in damp surroundings, it must be V2
dried before it is put into service. Units operating W1
intermittently or placed in areas with high temperature W2
variations, are exposed to dampness and must be dried
very thoroughly if necessary. + -
7.5.1 Drying method DC
a) General points
A - Stator
During the drying operation measure the winding insulation
B - Rotor
and the polarization index each 4 hours.
C - Exciter
To survey the insulation progress, record the measured
values and plot the obtained progress function of the time.
When the insulation value becomes constant, the machine 7.6 RE-VARNISHING
can be considered as dry. NOTE:
When the resistance is constant, it may be assumed that WHATEVER VARNISH IS USED, NEW VARNISHING IS
the machine is dry. This operation may take up to 24 NOT RECOMMENDED, SINCE IT TRAPS AND
hours, depending on the size of the machine and on the PERMANENTLY RETAINS THE CONDUCTIVE CARBON
degree of dampness. This may even take up to 72 hours. PARTICLES. THE ORIGINAL VARNISHES HAVE A
LONG SERVICE LIFE AND DO NOT NEED TO BE
CAUTION: STRENGTHENED.
TAKE FIRE-PREVENTION MEASURES DURING THE
DRYING OF THE MACHINE.
ALL THE CONNECTIONS MUST BE TIGHTENED.
b) Drying generator stop

The procedure " Drying generator in rotation" should be
preferred to the following one if it is possible to run the
generator at its nominal speed
Several thermometers must be positioned onto the winding
and the temperature must not exceed 75°C (167°F). I f one
of the thermometers exceeds this value, immediately
reduce the heating effect.
Dry by using an external source of heat, for example,
heaters or lamps.
Leave an opening for an exhaust for the damp air.
c) Drying generator in rotation

Disconnect the machine from the mains
Short circuit the machine stator at the machine terminals
Disconnect the Voltage regulator and short-circuit the
booster.
Install an amp meter on the short-circuited winding.
Run the machine at its nominal speed (to air cool the
machine)
Energized the machine (exciter field) using an separate ex
citation source. Use a DC source (batteries ...)
Adjust the excitation current to get the nominal current at
the stator (machine armature).
Warm up during 4 hours, stop and leave it to cool down
(winding temperature < 50°C)
58
LEROY SOMER SERVICE AND OPERATING MANUAL 2327 en – 07.2009 / m 10. Foldout (1.)
ALTERNATORS sheet 1
Typical cut view A52
Anti friction bearing machine 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15
16
1 Rotor
2
2 Bearing (drive end)
3 Fan hub 17
4 Drive end shield 1
5 Fan
6 Fan screen
7 Stator winding
8 Stator ribs
9 Stator lamination
10 Polar wheel
11 Balancing disc
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
12 Exciter field 15
13 Exciter armature
14 Non drive end shield 3 16
15 Bearing (non drive end)
16 Rotating resistances 2 17
17 Rotating diodes
1
18 Diode bridge cover
Sleeve bearing machine
59
ALTERNATORS sheet 2
Typical cut view A53 et A54
Sleeve bearing machine :
1 Rotor
3 Fan hub
4 Drive end shield
5 Fan
6 Fan screen
7 Stator winding
8 Stator ribs
9 Stator lamination
10 Polar wheel
11 Balancing disc
12 Exciter field
13 Exciter armature
14 Non drive end shield
16 Rotating resistances
17 Rotating diodes
Anti friction bearing machine
61
ALTERNATORS sheet 3
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Sleeve bearing machine :
3 15
1 Rotor
2 16
3 Fan hub 1 17
4 Drive end shield

4b End shield cover
5 Fan
6 Fan screen
7 Stator winding
8 Stator ribs
9 Stator lamination
10 Polar wheel
11 Balancing disc
14 Exciter field
13 Exciter armature
17 Rotating diodes
Anti friction bearing machine :
63
ALTERNATORS sheet 4
1 Rotor 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

3 Fan hub
4 Drive end shield 3 15
5 Fan
2 16
6 Fan screen
7 Stator winding 17
1
8 Stator ribs
9 Stator lamination
10 Polar wheel
11 Balancing disc
12 Exciter field
13 Exciter armature
17 Rotating diodes
65
LEROY SOMER SERVICE AND OPERATING MANUAL 2327 en – 07.2009 / m 10. FOLDOUT (2.4)
ALTERNATORS sheet 1
Sleeve bearing Flanged , self lubricated
1 Top half of the housing

2 Positioning pin hole
3 Positioning pin
4 Oil filler hole
5 Top sight glass
6 Eye bolt
7 Screw
8 Screw
9 Tap hole ( in the top and bottom halves of the shell, up size 14 )
10 Machine seal
11 Top half of the shell
12 Split line screw - bearing housing
13 Bottom half of the shell
14 Spherical seating
15 Engraved number - bearing shell
16 Recess
17 Tap hole
18 Screw
19 Split line screw - bearing shell
20 Engraved numbers - bearing housing
21 Bottom half of the housing
22 Connection hole for temperature measurement of the journal part
23 Oil sight glass
24 Connection hole for the oil sump temperature measurement
25 Out/Inlet cooling water (Type E.T..)
26 Oil cooler ( Type E.T..)
27 Oil drain plug
67
LEROY SOMER SERVICE AND OPERATING MANUAL 2327 en – 07.2009 / m 10. FOLDOUT (2.4)
ALTERNATORS sheet 2
Sleeve bearing Flanged , forced lubricated
1 Top half of the housing

2 Positioning pin hole
3 Positioning pin
4 Connection hole for the thrust part oil supply (optional)
5 Top sight glass
6 Eye bolt
7 Screw
8 Screw
9 Tap hole ( in the top and bottom halves of the shell, up size 14 )
10 Machine seal
11 Top half of the shell
12 Split line screw - bearing housing
13 Bottom half of the shell
14 Spherical seating
15 Engraved number - bearing shell
16 Recess
17 Tap hole
18 Screw
19 Split line screw - bearing shell
20 Engraved numbers - bearing housing
21 Bottom half of the housing
22 Connection hole for temperature measurement of the journal part
23 Oil inlet connection hole
24 Connection hole for the oil sump temperature measurement
25 Out/Inlet cooling water (Type E.T..)
26 Oil cooler ( Type E.T..)
27 Oil drain plug
28 Metal tabs ( optional for EFZL. )
29 Oil outlet connection hole
30 Oil outlet pipe
31 Marking
69
ALTERNATORS
Automatic Voltage Regulator
SECTION 4
Automatic Voltage Regulator

not supplied by LS
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FOR
DIGITAL EXCITATION CONTROL SYSTEM
DECS-200
Digital
Excitation
Control
System DECS-200
Null Internal Pre- Limits

Balance Tracking Position Lower Upper
Edit Reset
RS-232
COM 0
P0003-26
06/04/01
Publication: 9360100990
Revision: H 10/09
*9360100990*
INTRODUCTION
This instruction manual provides information about the operation and installation of the DECS-200 Digital
Excitation Control System. To accomplish this, the following information is provided:
 General Information and Specifications

 Controls and Indicators
 Functional Description
 Installation
 Maintenance
WARNING!
To avoid personal injury or equipment damage, only qualified personnel should
perform the procedures in this manual.
NOTE
Be sure that the DECS-200 is hard-wired to earth ground with no smaller than 12
AWG copper wire attached to the ground terminal on the rear of the unit case.
When the DECS-200 is configured in a system with other devices, it is
recommended to use a separate lead to the ground bus from each unit.
9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 Introduction i

First Printing: January 2002
Printed in USA
© 2009 Basler Electric, Highland Illinois 62249 USA
All Rights Reserved
October 2009
CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION
of Basler Electric, Highland Illinois, USA. It is loaned for confidential use, subject
to return on request, and with the mutual understanding that it will not be used in
any manner detrimental to the interest of Basler Electric.
It is not the intention of this manual to cover all details and variations in equipment, nor does this manual
provide data for every possible contingency regarding installation or operation. The availability and design
of all features and options are subject to modification without notice. Should further information be
required, contact Basler Electric.
BASLER ELECTRIC
ROUTE 143, BOX 269
HIGHLAND IL 62249 USA
http://www.basler.com, info@basler.com
PHONE +1 618.654.2341 FAX +1 618.654.2351
ii DECS-200 Introduction 9360100990 Rev H
REVISION HISTORY
The following information provides a historical summary of the changes made to the DECS-200 hardware,
firmware, and software. The corresponding revisions made to this instruction manual (9360100990) are
also summarized. Revisions are listed in reverse chronological order.
BESTCOMS Software
Version and Date Change
1.06.00, 10/09  On the Settings, UEL screen, added 3 point, 4 point, and 5 point
selections under UEL Curve Type Selection.
1.05.00, 11/07  Added Short output indicator to Metering, Alarm/Status screen.
 Added SCL Initial Delay to Settings, SCL screen.
1.04.00, 06/04  Added takeover-style OEL, SCL, and loss of field settings to interface.
1.03.05, 11/02  Added the EDM pole ratio calculator. Removed the Number of Poles
parameter.
1.03.04, 06/02  Improved overall functionality. Allowed V/Hz Slope Setting
adjustments to be made in increments of 0.01. The default value of
the Analysis screen was changed from 10% steps to 2% steps.
1.03.03, 05/02  Updated BESTCOMS to add oscillography trigger to step response.
1.03.00, 09/01  Initial release
Application Firmware
1.03.02, 09/09  Expanded UEL MW points.
 Improved HMI Loop Gain screen.
 Improved V/Hz function.
 Improved External Tracking.
1.03.00, 10/07  Added Short output indicator.
 Added SCL Initial Delay.
 Added primary/secondary active DECS indication (for redundant
DECS applications).
1.02.03, 06/05  Modified firmware for compatibility with new LCD.
1.02.02, 04/05  Improved Auxiliary input measurement accuracy.
1.02.00, 06/04  Added takeover-style OEL.
 Added option of specifying on-line/off-line OEL activation via the
52J/K and 52L/M contact inputs.
 Added stator current limiting and loss of field protection.
 Added automatic alarm reset when generator frequency decreases
below 10 Hz.
 Improved crosscurrent compensation.
1.01.03, 11/02  Added the EDM pole ratio calculator. Removed the Number of Poles
parameter.
9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 Introduction iii

Application Firmware
1.01.02, 05/02  Resolved field overcurrent indication problem when field overvoltage
alarm was triggered.
 Improved var to AVR mode (online) tracking.
 Resolved nuisance EDM indication on secondary DECS in dual
DECS applications.
 Resolved field overvoltage and field overcurrent alarm indication of
secondary DECS during startup in dual DECS applications.
1.01.01, 09/01  Initial release.
Hardware
X, Y, 09/09  Released firmware version 1.03.02. (9360100100, 102 advanced to
revision Y, 9360100101, 103 advanced to revision X.)
W, X, 09/08  Increased space between components on analog board.
(9360100100, 102 advanced to revision X, 9360100101, 103
advanced to revision W.)
V, W, 08/08  Replaced obsolete EEPROM on digital board. (9360100100, 102
advanced to revision W, 9360100101, 103 advanced to revision V.)
U, V, 11/07  Released firmware version 1.03.00 and BESTCOMS version 1.05.00.
(9360100100, 102 advanced to revision V, 9360100101, 103
advanced to revision U.)
T, U, 10/07  Changed front panel and added an EMI shield. (9360100100, 102
advanced to revision U, 9360100101, 103 advanced to revision T.)
S, T, 07/06  Changed value of C23 on isolation board to improve SCL function.
(9360100100, 102 advanced to revision T, 9360100101, 103
advanced to revision S.)
R, S, 07/05  Updated packing material. (9360100100, 102 advanced to revision S,
9360100101, 103 advanced to revision R.)
Q, R, 06/05  Released firmware version 1.02.03. (9360100100, 102 advanced to
revision R, 9360100101, 103 advanced to revision Q.
P, Q, 03/05  Improved mounting of front panel communication connector.
(9360100100, 102 advanced to revision Q, 9360100101, 103
advanced to revision P.)
N, P, 07/04  Released firmware version 1.02.01 and BESTCOMS version 1.04.01.
(9360100100, 102 advanced to revision P, 9360100101, 103
advanced to revision N. Revision level O not used.)
M, N, 07/04  Updated power supply circuit boards. (9360100100, 102 advanced to
revision N, 9360100101, 103 advanced to revision M.)
L, M, 06/04  Released firmware version 1.02.00 (9360100100, 102 advanced to
revision M, 9360100101, 103 advanced to revision L.
L, 05/04  Improved dielectric strength of “C” power supply (P/N 9360100100,
102 only).
K, 01/03  Began using new front panel LCD (display).
J, 10/02  Revised terminal numbering overlays.
I  Revision level not used.
H, 08/02  Improved circuit board component labeling.
iv DECS-200 Introduction 9360100990 Rev H

Hardware
G, 06/02  Implemented BESTCOMS version 1.03.04 and updated production
test.
F, 05/02  Implemented firmware version 1.01.02.
E, 05/02  Revised packing material.
D, 03/02  Revised engineering documents.
C, 01/02  Released hardware to production.
 Added CSA, UL, and CE logos to the part number labels.
A, B, 11/01  Pre-production manufacturing improvements and releases.
Manual
Revision and Date Change
H, 10/09  Section 1: Updated Contact Output Ratings.
 Section 1: Added GOST-R Certification.
 Section 1: Added Republic of Belarus Certificate of Conformity.
 Section 3: Added Initial Delay Time to Figure 3-10.
 Section 5: Updated Figure 5-18 to show 3, 4, or 5 point selection for
UEL Curve Type.
 Section 6: Updated Figure 6-11 to show 3, 4, or 5 point selection for
UEL Curve Type.
 Section 7: Added manual part number and revision to footers.
G, 11/07  Added manual part number and revision to footers.
 Corrected terminal numbering in Figure 4-6.
 Added SCL Initial Delay.
 Added Short Output Indicator.
F, 08/06  Added illustrations showing left-side terminals and typical connections
to Section 4, Installation. (These figures were omitted in revision E of
the manual.)
 Corrected minor errors in Section 2, Human-Machine Interface, Front
Panel Operation.
E, 12/05  Removed expired patent information from Section 1.
 Added missing setting descriptions to Section 5.
 In Section 4, added caution box regarding the length of screws used
to attach escutcheon plate to DECS-200.
 Made various minor corrections/changes throughout manual.
9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 Introduction v

Manual
Revision and Date Change
D, 06/04  Section 1: Updated output contact ratings.
 Section 2: Modified tables and menu branch drawings to show added
settings.
 Section 3: Added functional description of takeover OEL and SCL.
Removed reference to A-phase and C-phase as acceptable sensing
current source for crosscurrent compensation applications.
 Section 4: Added Crosscurrent Sensing sub-section with table listing
crosscurrent sensing terminals.
 Section 5: Revised or added all applicable BESTCOMS screens and
setting descriptions to accommodate new settings/features.
 Section 6: Added/changed BESTCOMS screens and DECS-200
settings to accommodate changed BESTCOMS screens and new
DECS-200 settings.
 Section 7: Added/revised Modbus register tables to accommodate
new DECS-200 settings.
C, 11/02  Changed Exciter Diode Monitor (EDM) Protection in Section 1 to
reflect the pole ratio increment. Removed Gen Poles and added Pole
Ratio to Figure 2-2. Made changes to Figures 2-6 and 2-8. Deleted
reference to Generator Poles and Exciter Poles in Section 3, Exciter
Diode Monitor (EDM) Function but added Pole Ratio. Updated the list
of internal variable on page 3-14. Revised the Installation portion in
Section 5 for using a CD-ROM disc. Added the Pole Ratio Calculator
in Section 5 as well as updated the screen shots. Updated screen
shots in Figures 6-1, 6-3, 6-7, and 6-14. Changed increment levels of
register 47747-48, Table 7-17. Updated Table 7-25.
B, 10/02  Updated Figure 4-3 to correct error in terminal numbers. Updated
terminal assignments in Section 1 to correct the error reflected from
old Figure 4-3. Added Section 8, Troubleshooting. Corrected various
minor errors.
A, 01/02  Changed introduction section to reflect the January first printing date.
Repaginated the introduction so that the table of contents begins on
an odd page. Edited the table of contents entries for section five and
seven to reflect the appropriate names.
—, 01/02  Initial release
vi DECS-200 Introduction 9360100990 Rev H

CONTENTS
SECTION 1  GENERAL INFORMATION ................................................................................................ 1-1
SECTION 2  HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE ....................................................................................... 2-1
SECTION 3  FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................... 3-1
SECTION 4  INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................. 4-1
SECTION 5  BESTCOMS SOFTWARE .................................................................................................. 5-1
SECTION 6  SETUP ................................................................................................................................ 6-1
SECTION 7  MODBUS SOFTWARE .................................................................................................... 7-1
SECTION 8  MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................................. 8-1
9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 Introduction vii

This page intentionally left blank.
viii DECS-200 Introduction 9360100990 Rev H

SECTION 1 ● GENERAL INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 ● GENERAL INFORMATION ................................................................................................ 1-1
INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................... 1-1
FEATURES ............................................................................................................................................ 1-1
Functions ............................................................................................................................................ 1-1
Inputs and Outputs ............................................................................................................................. 1-1
HMI Interface ...................................................................................................................................... 1-1
APPLICATION ....................................................................................................................................... 1-2
Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 1-2
Operating Power ................................................................................................................................ 1-2
Control Power ..................................................................................................................................... 1-2
Sensing............................................................................................................................................... 1-3
Excitation Limiters .............................................................................................................................. 1-3
External Tracking and Transfer Between DECS-200 Units (Optional) .............................................. 1-3
Internal Tracking Between DECS-200 Operating Modes .................................................................. 1-3
Communication With a PC ................................................................................................................. 1-3
MODEL AND STYLE NUMBER DESCRIPTION ................................................................................... 1-3
Sample Style Number ........................................................................................................................ 1-4
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................................................. 1-4
Control Power ..................................................................................................................................... 1-4
Operating Power ................................................................................................................................ 1-4
Generator Voltage Sensing ................................................................................................................ 1-5
Generator Current Sensing ................................................................................................................ 1-5
Bus Voltage Sensing .......................................................................................................................... 1-5
Accessory Inputs ................................................................................................................................ 1-5
Communication Ports ......................................................................................................................... 1-5
Contact Inputs .................................................................................................................................... 1-6
Contact Outputs ................................................................................................................................. 1-6
Field Output ........................................................................................................................................ 1-6
Regulation .......................................................................................................................................... 1-6
Parallel Compensation ....................................................................................................................... 1-7
Field Overvoltage Protection .............................................................................................................. 1-7
Field Overcurrent Protection .............................................................................................................. 1-7
Exciter Diode Monitor (EDM) Protection ............................................................................................ 1-7
Generator Undervoltage Protection ................................................................................................... 1-7
Generator Overvoltage Protection ..................................................................................................... 1-8
Loss of Sensing Protection................................................................................................................. 1-8
Loss of Field Protection ...................................................................................................................... 1-8
Soft Start Function .............................................................................................................................. 1-8
Voltage Matching ................................................................................................................................ 1-8
On-Line Overexcitation Limiting ......................................................................................................... 1-8
Off-Line Overexcitation Limiting ......................................................................................................... 1-9
Underexcitation Limiting ..................................................................................................................... 1-9
Manual Excitation Control .................................................................................................................. 1-9
Metering.............................................................................................................................................. 1-9
Sequence of Event Recording (SER) ............................................................................................... 1-10
Data Logging (Oscillography) ........................................................................................................... 1-10
Temperature Range ......................................................................................................................... 1-10
Type Tests ........................................................................................................................................ 1-10
Physical ............................................................................................................................................ 1-10
UL Recognition ................................................................................................................................. 1-10
CSA Certification .............................................................................................................................. 1-10
CE Compliance ................................................................................................................................ 1-10
GOST-R Certification ....................................................................................................................... 1-11
Republic of Belarus Certificate of Conformity .................................................................................. 1-11
9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 General Information i

Figures
Figure 1-1. Block Diagram of Typical DECS-200 Application ................................................................... 1-2
Figure 1-2. Style Number Identification Chart ........................................................................................... 1-3
ii DECS-200 General Information 9360100990 Rev H

SECTION 1 ● GENERAL INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION
The Basler Digital Excitation Control System (DECS-200) is a microprocessor-based control device
intended for generator power management. Programmability of system parameters and regulation
settings enables the DECS-200 to be used in a wide range of applications and provides greater flexibility
in excitation system optimization. The DECS-200 can accommodate generator exciter field requirements
up to 15 Adc continuously in 32, 63 or 125 Vdc applications with one model.
FEATURES
DECS-200 units have the following features and capabilities.
Functions
• Four control modes
o Automatic voltage regulation (AVR)
o Manual or field current regulation (FCR)
o Power factor (PF)
o Reactive power (var)
• Soft start buildup with an adjustable ramp in AVR and FCR control modes
• One adjustment range or pre-position setpoint for each control mode
• Overexcitation limiting (OEL) and underexcitation limiting (UEL) in AVR, var and PF control modes
• Twenty stability selections
• Underfrequency compensation or volts per hertz ratio limiter
• Autotracking between operating modes and between DECS-200 units (optional)
• Automatic transfer to a backup DECS-200 unit (optional)
• Eight generator protection features
o Field overvoltage
o Field overcurrent
o Generator overvoltage
o Generator undervoltage
o Watchdog timer
o Loss of sensing
o Exciter diode monitor (EDM)
o Loss of field
• Generator paralleling with reactive droop compensation and reactive differential compensation
• Data logging and event recording
Inputs and Outputs

• Single-phase rms bus voltage sensing
• Single-phase or three-phase rms generator voltage sensing
• Single-phase generator current sensing (1 or 5 amperes, nominal)
• Analog inputs (±10 Vdc and 4 to 20 mAdc) provide proportional, remote control of the setpoint
• Eleven PLC-compatible contact sensing inputs for system interface
• Separate ac and dc power inputs accommodate redundant operating power sources
• Pulse-width modulated output power stage rated at a maximum of 15 amperes, continuous
• Five output relays for system control or annunciation
o Three programmable output relays
o Two fixed-function output relays
HMI Interface
• Front panel HMI includes pushbutton controls, LED indicators and a backlit, liquid crystal display
(LCD)
• BESTCOMS Windows® based software provides easy, fast and accurate setup and control
9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 General Information 1-1

• Three communication ports
o Front RS-232 port for communication with a PC using BESTCOMS software
o Right-side panel RS-232 port for dedicated communication with a redundant DECS-200
o RS-485 communication port for communication with a remote terminal
• Modbus protocol for the RS-485 port allows communication at distances of up to 1,200 meters
(3,937 feet)
APPLICATION
Introduction
In the typical application shown in Figure 1-1, the DECS-200 controls the exciter field of a synchronous
generator. Front panel controls, indicators, and serial communication ports using PC software make the
system easy to operate locally or from remote locations. DECS-200 operation, settings, and safety setup
procedures in this manual should be studied before implementing your application. For detailed
application assistance, contact Basler Electric or your local sales representative.
Figure 1-1. Block Diagram of Typical DECS-200 Application
Operating Power
Operating power for the pulse-width modulated (PWM) excitation output is typically obtained from the
generator output through a power transformer. Alternately, operating power can be supplied from a
permanent magnet generator (PMG).
Control Power
If power supply option C (120/125 Vac/Vdc) is selected, a redundant power source can be used with the
DECS-200. (See Figure 1-1.) In this configuration, if one of the two sources fails, the other source will
continue to supply DECS-200 operating power. If power supply option L (24/48 Vdc) is selected, no
redundant power source is available.
1-2 DECS-200 General Information 9360100990 Rev H

Sensing
The DECS-200 senses generator voltage and current through voltage and current transformers. Field
voltage and field current values are sensed internally.
Excitation Limiters
Integrated overexcitation and underexcitation limiters (OEL and UEL) are available for both on-line and
off-line protection.
External Tracking and Transfer Between DECS-200 Units (Optional)

For critical applications, a second DECS-200 can provide backup excitation control. The DECS-200
allows for excitation system redundancy by providing external tracking and transfer provisions between
DECS-200 units. The secondary DECS-200 operating modes can be programmed to track the primary
DECS-200 operating mode. Proper, redundant excitation system design allows for removal of the failed
system. Periodic testing of the backup system must be performed to ensure that it is operational and can
be put into service without warning.
Internal Tracking Between DECS-200 Operating Modes

In applications using a single DECS-200, the DECS-200 can be programmed so that the inactive
operating modes track the active operating mode. Operating modes include AVR, FCR, PF, and var. If the
excitation system is normally operating on-line in Internal mode and a loss of sensing occurs, the DECS-
200 could be transferred to manual (FCR) mode where the loss of sensing has no impact on the exciter's
ability to maintain proper excitation levels. While performing routine testing of the DECS-200 in backup
mode, the internal tracking feature allows a transfer to an inactive mode that will result in no disturbance
to the system.
Communication With a PC
Communication between the DECS-200 (front panel RS-232 port) and a PC is possible through
BESTCOMS software. BESTCOMS enables fast and easy programming of setpoints and ranges and
allows for step changes to facilitate proper stability settings. BESTCOMS also provides easy start and
stop control and operator adjustment of the excitation system with real-time metering. The software
catalog number is BESTCOMS-DECS200. BESTCOMS is provided with the DECS-200 as part of the
software/manual package.
MODEL AND STYLE NUMBER DESCRIPTION

DECS-200 operating characteristics are defined by letters and numbers that make up the style number.
The model number and style number describe the options included in the DECS-200 and appear on a
label attached to the side of the case. Upon receipt of a DECS-200 unit, be sure to check the style
number against the requisition and packing list to ensure that they agree.
Figure 1-2. Style Number Identification Chart

Sample Style Number
The style number identification chart (Figure 1-2) defines the electrical characteristics and operational
features included in the DECS-200. For example, if the style number were DECS-200-1L, the device
would have the following characteristics and features.
DECS-200 -- Digital Excitation Control System
1 --- Internal autotracking/transfer
L --- 24/48 Vdc control power supply
SPECIFICATIONS
DECS-200 electrical and physical characteristics are listed in the following paragraphs.
Control Power
Input Voltage
DC Input: 16 to 60 Vdc (style XL) or 90 to 150 Vdc (style XC)
AC Input: 85 to 132 Vac, 50/60 Hz (style XC only)
Note: Isolation transformer for ac input is required when dual control
power sources are used.
Burden
DC Input: 30 W
AC Input: 50 VA
Terminals
DC Input: B7 (+), B8 (–)
AC Input: B9 (L), B10 (N) (style XC only)
Operating Power
To achieve the proper DECS-200 output voltage, the appropriate operating power input voltage must be
provided.
32 Vdc PWM Output
Nominal: 60 Vac
Operating Range: 56 to 70 Vac, ±10%
Frequency Range: 50 to 500 Hz
Configuration: 1-phase or 3-phase
Burden: 780 VA
63 Vdc PWM Output
Nominal: 120 Vac
Burden: 1,570 VA
125 Vdc PWM Output
Nominal: 240 Vac
Burden: 3,070 VA
Voltage Buildup
From a minimum of 3 Vac
Terminals
C2 (A-phase), C3 (B-phase), C4 (C-phase)

Generator Voltage Sensing
Type: 1-phase/3-phase, 4 ranges
Burden: <1 VA per phase
Terminals: A1, A2, A3
50 Hertz Sensing
Range 1: 100 Vac (85 to 127 Vac)
Range 2: 200 Vac (170 to 254 Vac)
Range 3: 400 Vac (340 to 508 Vac)
Range 4: 500 Vac (425 to 625 Vac)
60 Hertz Sensing
Range 1: 120 Vac (94 to 153 Vac)
Range 2: 240 Vac (187 to 305 Vac)
Range 3: 400 Vac (374 to 600 Vac)
Range 4: 600 Vac (510 to 660 Vac)
Generator Current Sensing

Type: Two ranges, two channels
Frequency: 50/60 Hz
Ranges: 1 A or 5 A nominal, continuous
Burden: <1 VA per phase
Terminals
1 A Sensing: B1, B3 (phase B, metering, var/PF, UEL)
B4, B6 (phase B, crosscurrent compensation)
5 A Sensing: B2, B3 (phase B, metering, var/PF, UEL)
B5, B6 (phase B, crosscurrent compensation)
Bus Voltage Sensing

Type: 1-phase, 4 ranges,
Burden: <1 VA
Sensing Ranges: Identical to generator voltage sensing
Terminals: A4, A5
Accessory Inputs
Current Input
Range: 4 to 20 mAdc
Terminals: A6 (+), A7 (–)
Voltage Input
Range: –10 to +10 Vdc
Terminals: A9 (+), A10 (–)
Communication Ports
Interface
RS-232: Full duplex
RS-485: Half duplex
Connections
Com 0: Front panel DB-9 connector
Com 1: Right-side panel DB-9 connector
Com 2: Left-side panel screw terminals (A40, A41, A42)
Parameters
Baud: 1200 to 19200
Data Bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop Bits: 1 (Com 0, Com 1) or 2 (Com 2)

Contact Inputs
Type: Dry contact; accept PLC open-collector outputs
Interrogation Voltage: 12 Vdc
Terminal Assignments
Start: A21, A22
Stop: A23, A24
Auto (AVR): A25, A26
Manual (FCR): A27, A28
Raise: A29, A30
Lower: A31, A32
Pre-Position: A33, A34
Unit/Parallel (52L/M): A35, A36
Var/PF (52J/K): A37, A38
Secondary Enable: A39, A40
Alarm Reset: A41, A42
Contact Outputs
Make and Break Ratings (Resistive)
24 Vdc: 7.0 A
48 Vdc: 0.7 A
125 Vdc: 0.2 A
120/240 Vac: 7.0 A
Carry Ratings (Resistive)
24/48/125 Vdc: 7.0 A
120/240 Vac: 7.0 A
Terminal Assignments
Start/Stop (ON, OF): A11, A12
Watchdog (WTCHD): A13, A14
Relay 1 (RLY1): A15, A16
Field Output
Continuous Output Rating
60 Vac Input: 32 Vdc, 15 Adc
10 Second Forcing Output Rating
Minimum Field Resistance
32 Vdc Application: 2.13 Ω
Regulation
AVR Operating Mode
Accuracy: ±0.25% over load range at rated PF and constant generator frequency
Steady State Stability: ±0.1% at constant load and generator frequency
Temperature Drift: ±0.5% for a 0 to 50°C change
V/Hz Characteristic: Slope from 0 to 3 PU is adjust-able in 0.1 PU increments. Voltage
regulation error is within ±2.0% of the nominal voltage.
Response Time: <1 cycle
Accuracy
FCR Mode: ±1.0% of the nominal value for 10% of the bridge input voltage change or
20% of the field resistance change. Otherwise, ±5.0%.
Var Mode: ±2.0% of the nominal VA rating at the rated frequency
Power Factor Mode: ±0.02 PF of the PF setpoint for the real power between 10 and 100% at
the rated frequency.
Internal Tracking: 0.5%
Parallel Compensation
Modes: Reactive Droop and Reactive Differential (cross-current) ∗
Burden: ∗ Can exceed 1 VA if external resistors are added to the CT circuit for
crosscurrent compensation.
Adjustment Range
Reactive Droop: 0 to 30%
Reactive Differential: –30 to 0%
Field Overvoltage Protection

Pickup
Range: 1.0 to 325 Vdc
Increment: 1.0 Vdc
Time Delay
Range: 0.2 to 30 s
Increment: 0.1 s
Field Overcurrent Protection

Pickup
Range: 0 to 16 Adc
Increment: 0.1 Adc
Time Delay
Characteristic: Inverse per ANSI C50.13
Exciter Diode Monitor (EDM) Protection

Pole Ratio
Range: 1 to 10 (0 if unknown)
Increment: 0.01
Ripple Threshold
Open and Shorted Diode: 0 to 100%
Time Delay
Open Diode Protection: 10 to 60 s
Shorted Diode Protection: 5 to 30 s
Open and Shorted Diode Inhibit Levels
Range: 0 to 100% or <1 Adc field current
<45 Hz and >70 Hz generator frequency
Generator Undervoltage Protection

Pickup
Range: 0 to 30 kVac
Increment: 1.0 Vac
Time Delay
Range: 0.5 to 60 s
Increment: 0.1 s

Generator Overvoltage Protection
Pickup
Range: 0 to 30 kVac
Increment: 1.0 Vac
Time Delay
Range: 0.1 to 60 s
Increment: 0.1 s
Loss of Sensing Protection

Unbalance Generator Volts: 0 to 100%
Balanced Generator Volts: 0 to 100%
Time Delay
Range: 0 to 30 s
Increment: 0.1 s
Loss of Field Protection

Pickup
Range: 0 to 3,000,000 kvar
Increment: 1 kvar
Time Delay
Range: 0.0 to 9.9 s
Increment: 0.1 s
Soft Start Function

Setting Range
Soft Start Bias Level: 0 to 90% in 1% increments
Soft Start Bias Time Delay: 1 to 7,200 seconds in 1 second increments
Voltage Matching
Accuracy: Generator rms voltage is matched with the bus rms voltage to within
±0.5% of the generator voltage
On-Line Overexcitation Limiting

Response time: <3 cycles
High Current Level
Pickup Range: 0 to 30.0 Adc
Pickup Increment: 0.1 Adc
Time Range: 0 to 10 s
Time Increment: 1s
Medium Current Level
Time Increment: 1s
Low Current Level
Pickup Range: 0 to 15 Adc
Time Range: continuous

Off-Line Overexcitation Limiting
High Current Level
Time Increment: 1s
Low Current Level
Time Increment: 1s
Underexcitation Limiting
Adjustment Range: 0 to 100% of the generator rated apparent power (kvar) at 0 kW real
power. Or customizable to generator curve capability.
Manual Excitation Control

Range: 0 to 15.0 Adc
Increment: 0.1 Adc
Metering
Generator Voltage
Range: 0 to 160% of nominal
Accuracy: <1% (50/60 Hz)
Generator Current
Generator Frequency
Range: 10 to 90 Hz
Accuracy: ±0.1 Hz
Bus Voltage
Bus Frequency
Range: 10 to 90 Hz
Accuracy: ±0.1 Hz
Phase Angle
Range: –90 to +90
Accuracy: ±1.0
Field Voltage
Range: 0 to 375 Vdc
Accuracy: ±1.25 V or ±1.0% (whichever is greater)
Field Current
Range: 0 to 31 Adc
Accuracy: ±0.15 A or ±1.0% (whichever is greater)
Power Factor
Range: –0.5 to +0.5 PF
Accuracy: <0.02 PF
Real Power and Reactive Power
Accuracy: <1.0% of nominal
Sequence of Event Recording (SER)
127 event report, stored in volatile memory (retrievable via BESTCOMS) SER triggered by: Input/Output
status changes, system operating status changes or alarm annunciations
Data Logging (Oscillography)

Stores 8 records in volatile memory. Up to 6 variables can be logged in a record. Sampling rate is 600
data points per log, up to 599 pre-trigger, 4 ms to 10 second intervals, (2.4 sec to 6,000 sec. total log
duration).
Temperature Range
Operating: –40 to +60°C (–40 to +140°F)
Storage: –40 to +85°C (–40 to +185°F)
CD-ROM: 0 to +50°C (32 to +122°F)
Type Tests
Shock
15 G in 3 perpendicular planes
Vibration
5 to 26 Hz: 1.2 G
27 to 52 Hz: 0.914 mm (0.036") double amplitude
53 to 500 Hz: 5G
Surge Withstand Capability and Fast Transient
Tested per IEEE C37.90.1-1989
Dielectric Strength
Tested per IEEE 421.3
Salt Fog
Tested per MIL-STD-810E, Method 509.3
Physical
Weight: 6.35 kg (14 lb)
Dimensions: Refer to Section 4, Installation
UL Recognition
UL recognized per standard 508, UL file number E97035.
CSA Certification
Certified per CSA Standard CAN/CSA-C22.2 Number 14, CSA File Number LR23131.
CE Compliance
The DECS-200 meets the criteria set forth by the following standards:
EN 50081-2
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) emissions standard: EN 55011, Level A.
EN 50082-2
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Immunity
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
EN 61000-4-2, Level B/IEC 1000-4-2
Radiated Susceptibility
EN 61000-4-3, Level A/IEC 1000-4-3
Electrical Fast Transient
EN 61000-4-4, Level B/IEC 1000-4-4

Radio Frequency Conducted
EN 61000-4-6, Level A/IEC 1000-4-6
Power Frequency Magnetics
EN 61000-4-8, Level A/IEC 1000-4-8
GOST-R Certification
GOST-R certified per the relevant standards of Gosstandart of Russia.
Republic of Belarus Certificate of Conformity

Complies with the safety requirements established by the national law.


SECTION 2 ● HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 2 ● HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE ....................................................................................... 2-1
INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................... 2-1
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ................................................................................. 2-1
Menu Navigation ................................................................................................................................ 2-2
Navigation Aids .................................................................................................................................. 2-2
Edit Sessions ...................................................................................................................................... 2-2
Changing Settings .............................................................................................................................. 2-3
PASSWORD PROTECTION ................................................................................................................. 2-8
METERING SCREEN ............................................................................................................................ 2-9
Metering Fields ................................................................................................................................... 2-9
Setpoint Field ................................................................................................................................... 2-10
Percent-of-Range Field .................................................................................................................... 2-10
Mode Message Field ........................................................................................................................ 2-10
Alarm Annunciation Field ................................................................................................................. 2-10
Alarm Message Screen .................................................................................................................... 2-10
Screens with Special Editing Modes ................................................................................................ 2-11
Menu Tree ........................................................................................................................................ 2-11
FRONT PANEL OPERATION.............................................................................................................. 2-22
Operating Modes .............................................................................................................................. 2-22
Setpoints........................................................................................................................................... 2-22
Loop Gains ....................................................................................................................................... 2-23
Controller Gains ............................................................................................................................... 2-24
Metering............................................................................................................................................ 2-24
Protection ......................................................................................................................................... 2-24
Limiters ............................................................................................................................................. 2-25
System Parameters .......................................................................................................................... 2-26
General Settings ............................................................................................................................... 2-29
Figures
Figure 2-1. Front Panel Controls and Indicators ....................................................................................... 2-1
Figure 2-2.Operating Menu Branch ......................................................................................................... 2-12
Figure 2-3. Setpoint Menu Branch........................................................................................................... 2-13
Figure 2-4. Loop Gains Menu Branch ..................................................................................................... 2-14
Figure 2-5. Metering Menu Branch .......................................................................................................... 2-15
Figure 2-6. Protection Menu Branch ....................................................................................................... 2-16
Figure 2-7. Limiters Menu Branch ........................................................................................................... 2-17
Figure 2-8. System Parameters Menu Branch (Part 1 of 3) .................................................................... 2-18
Figure 2-9. System Parameters Menu Branch (Part 2 of 3) .................................................................... 2-19
Figure 2-10. System Parameters Menu Branch (Part 3 of 3) .................................................................. 2-20
Figure 2-11. General Settings Menu Branch ........................................................................................... 2-21
Tables
Table 2-1. DECS-200 HMI Component Descriptions ................................................................................ 2-2
Table 2-2. Front Panel Setting Parameters ............................................................................................... 2-4
Table 2-3. Settings Accessible with Setpoint Access Level ...................................................................... 2-8
Table 2-4. User-Selectable Metering Quantities ....................................................................................... 2-9
Table 2-5. Setpoint Field as a Function of Operating Mode .................................................................... 2-10
Table 2-6. Annunciation Messages ......................................................................................................... 2-10
Table 2-7. Automatic Stability Range Gain Settings Index ..................................................................... 2-23
9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface i

ii DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 9360100990 Rev H

SECTION 2 ● HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE
INTRODUCTION
This section describes the DECS-200 human-machine interface (HMI), illustrates how to navigate through
the menu screens, and explains how to use the front panel interface to view and change settings.
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

The front panel HMI consists of a backlit liquid crystal display (LCD), six pushbutton switches, six LED
indicators, and an RS-232 communication connector. The LCD displays DECS-200 settings and
excitation system information through the use of a structured menu. Menu screens are viewed and
settings are changed by operating the front panel pushbuttons. Active conditions are annunciated by the
front panel LEDs. The RS-232 connector (Com 0) enables communication between the DECS-200 and a
PC operating BESTCOMS software.
Front panel HMI components are shown in Figure 2-1 and described in Table 2-1.
Figure 2-1. Front Panel Controls and Indicators

9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 2-1
Table 2-1. DECS-200 HMI Component Descriptions
Locator description
A LCD. Backlit liquid crystal display is 64 by 128 pixels in size and serves as the primary source
of information from the DECS-200. Displays operations, setpoints, loop gains, metering,
protection functions, system parameters, and general settings.
B Pre-Position LED. Lights at the predefined, pre-position setpoint of the active mode.
C Lower Limit LED. Lights at the minimum setpoint value of the active mode.
D Upper Limit LED. Lights at the maximum setpoint value of the active mode.
E Scrolling Pushbuttons. Pushbutton switches are used to scroll up, down, left, and right through
the menu structure. When operating in Edit mode, the Left and Right pushbuttons select the
variable to change and the Up and Down pushbuttons change the variable value.
F Reset Pushbutton. Cancels editing sessions, resets alarm annunciations and latched alarm
relays, and can be used for quick access to the metering screen.
G Serial Port (Com 0). This port is dedicated to RS-232 communication with a computer terminal
or PC running a terminal emulation program such as BESTCOMS. See Section 1 and Section
3 for more information about the DECS-200 serial ports.
H Edit Pushbutton. Enables settings changes. When the Edit pushbutton is first pushed, an LED
within the pushbutton lights to indicate that Edit mode is active. When settings changes are
complete (using the scrolling pushbuttons) and the Edit pushbutton is pressed again, the LED
turns off to indicate that the changes are saved.
I Null Balance LED. Lights when the inactive modes (AVR, FCR, var, or PF) match the active
mode.
J Internal Tracking LED. Lights when any inactive mode (AVR, FCR, var, or PF) is tracking the
active mode to accomplish a bumpless transfer when changing active modes.
Menu Navigation
The front panel scrolling pushbuttons are used to move through the menu structure displayed by the LCD.
Pressing the Reset pushbutton (when an edit session is not in progress) gives quick access to the
Metering screen. Metering values cannot be viewed during an edit session.
Navigation Aids
On-screen navigation assists the user in moving from screen to screen. These navigation aids are
contained in the top and bottom lines of the LCD.
The top line contains a menu path that is similar to the DOS prompt on a personal computer. When the
menu path exceeds the width of the LCD, the first part of the menu path is replaced with two dots (..) so
that the last part will be seen. Regardless of the menu path length, the current screen name is always
shown.
The bottom line displays the menu screens that can be accessed from the current screen with the Left,
Down and Right pushbuttons on the front panel. The Left pushbutton listing consists of a “<”, followed by
an abbreviated menu name. The Down pushbutton listing consists of the letter v, followed by an
abbreviated menu name. The right-pushbutton listing consists of a “>”, followed by an abbreviated menu
name.
If the Left and Right pushbutton listings are blank, then the current screen is the only one on this level. If
the Down pushbutton listing is blank, then there are no screens below the current screen.
Edit Sessions
Password access is required before entering an edit session. To initiate an edit session, press the Edit
pushbutton. The Edit pushbutton lights to indicate that the front panel is in edit mode. If the appropriate
access level is not active, then a prompt to enter a password appears. (Paragraphs titled Password
Defaults and Password Protection in this section have more information about using passwords.)
2-2 DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 9360100990 Rev H

Editing Settings
Once the password is entered and security access is obtained, the first editable field of the current screen
is underlined. The setting in this field can be modified by pressing the Up pushbutton to increase the
setting or the Down pushbutton to decrease the setting. To edit another setting on the current screen, use
the Left pushbutton to advance the underline upward or the Right pushbutton to advance the underline
downward to the other editable fields.
NOTE
On most screen, setting changes are used immediately by the DECS-200.
However, these changes are not saved in nonvolatile memory until the Edit
pushbutton is pressed to terminate the edit session.
After all desired editing on the current screen is complete, the changes can be saved or the values that
were in use prior to the edit session can be restored. Changes are saved by pressing the Edit pushbutton
which terminates the edit session and saves the changes in nonvolatile memory. Changes are aborted by
pressing the Reset pushbutton which terminates the edit session without saving the changes. The
previous values are then restored by reading them from nonvolatile memory. In both cases, the Edit
pushbutton LED turns off to indicate that the edit session is terminated.
Security (password) access is not immediately lost when an edit session is terminated. Security access
terminates after 10 minutes of pushbutton inactivity at the front panel. (Security access timeout is different
from edit session timeout;. see Edit Session Timeout.) If this period of inactivity occurs during an edit
session, any changes made are saved in nonvolatile memory and will be used or continue to be used by
the DECS-200. At this time, both edit access and security access are terminated.
CAUTION
Pressing the Reset pushbutton after changing the active mode setpoint will
cause a step change in the operating setpoint that may have the potential to
adversely affect the system.
In order to modify settings on another screen with the same access level, the user merely navigates to
that screen and presses the Edit pushbutton to start a new edit session on the new screen.
Edit Session Timeout
If the front panel is left in the Edit mode after any setting changes are made, the changes will be saved
and the edit session terminated after 10 minutes of pushbutton inactivity.
Changing Settings
All settings that are viewable at the front panel are password protected and require security access to
change.
Global access grants the right to change any viewable setting at the front panel.
Setpoint access grants the right to change only a few settings. These include basic operating settings like
Start/Stop, AVR/FCR, PF/var, control setpoints and pre-positions.
See Table 2-2 for a complete setting list that shows the range, increments and default values. In Table 2-
2, note that the Ref. column refers to numbers associated with the menu screens shown later in this
section. These numbers should help you find the specific screen that contains the setpoint or parameter
that you want to change. For a list of settings that are accessible with the Setpoint access level, see Table
2-3. All editable settings on a single menu screen are at the same access level.

Table 2-2. Front Panel Setting Parameters
Ref. Parameter Minimum Maximum Increment Default
1.1 Start/Stop Selection Stop, Start N/A Stop
AVR/FCR Selection AVR, FCR N/A AVR
PF/Var Control Enable Off, PF Control, Var Control N/A Off
Load Comp. Selection Off, Droop N/A Droop
Pre-Position Enable Off, On N/A On
1.2 Voltage Matching Off, On N/A Off
Internal Tracking Enable Off, On N/A Off
External Tracking Enable Off, On N/A Off
Underfrequency UF, V/Hz N/A UF
2.1 AVR Setpoint AVR min. setpoint AVR max. setpoint 0.1 V 120 V
FCR Setpoint FCR min. setpoint FCR max setpoint 0.01 A 0.1 A
Droop Compensation –30% nom. 30% nom. 0.1% nom. 5% nom.
Var Setpoint var min. setpoint var max. setpoint 1 var 0 var
PF Setpoint PF min. setpoint PF max. setpoint 0.005 1.00
2.1.1 Fine Voltage Band 0% (nom.) 30% (nom.) 0.01% (nom.) 20% (nom.)
AVR Min. Setpoint 70% (nom.) 100% (nom.) 0.1% (nom.) 70% (nom.)
AVR Max. Setpoint 100% (nom.) 110% (nom.) 0.1% (nom.) 110% (nom.)
FCR Min. Setpoint 0.0% (nom.) 100% (nom.) 0.1% (nom.) 0% (nom.)
FCR Max. Setpoint 0.0% (nom.) 120% (nom.) 0.1% (nom.) 120% (nom.)
2.1.2 Var Min. Setpoint –100% (of rated VA) 100% (of rated VA) 1% (of rated VA) 0%
Var Max. Setpoint –100% (of rated VA) 100% (of rated VA) 1% (of rated VA) 0%
Max Lag PF 0.5 1.0 0.005 0.8
Max Lead PF 1.0 –0.5 0.005 –0.8
Voltage Matching Band 0% (nom.) 20% (nom.) 0.01% (nom.) 10% (nom.)
Volt. Matching Ref. 90.0% 120.0% 0.1% 100%
2.2 AVR Prep. Setpoint AVR min. setpoint AVR max. setpoint 0.1 VA 120.0 V
FCR Prep. Setpoint FCR min. setpoint FCR max. setpoint 0.01 A 0.1 A
Var Prep. Setpoint var min. setpoint var max. setpoint 1 var 0 var
PF Prep. Setpoint PF min. setpoint PF max. setpoint 0.005 1.000
3.1 Gain Table Index 1 21 1 21
AVR/FCR Kp 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 30.0
AVR/FCR Ki 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 150.0
AVR/FCR Kd 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 2.0
AVR/FCR Td 0.0 1.0 0.01 0.08
3.2 AVR Kg 0 1,000.0 0.1 1.0
FCR Kg 0 1,000.0 0.1 25.0
3.3 OEL Ki 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 10.0
OEL Kg 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 1.0
UEL Ki 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 10.0
UEL Kg 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 2.0
SCL Ki 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 10.0
SCL Kg 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 1.0
3.4 PF Ki 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 120.0
PF Kg 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 1.0
Var Ki 0.0 1,000.0 0.01 120.0
Var Kg 0.0 1,000.0 0.01 1.00
Voltage Matching Kg 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 1.0

st
4.1 1 Metering Field V Avg
nd Va-b, Vb-c, Vc-a, V Avg, Line I, VA, watts, var, PF Gen Hz,
2 Metering Field Vc-a
rd
Bus Hz, Bus V, Fld V, Fld I, V Aux, EDM OC, EDM SC
3 Metering Field Fld I
5.1 Corner Frequency 15.0 Hz 90.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 57.0 Hz
Underfrequency Slope 0.00 x V/Hz 3.00 x V/Hz 0.01 V/Hz 1.00 x V/Hz
5.2 Field OV Enable Off, On N/A Off
Field OC Enable Of, On N/A Off
Stator OV Enable Off, On N/A Off
Stator UV Enable Off, On N/A Off
Loss of Sensing Enable Off, On N/A Off
Loss of Sensing Xfr to Off, On N/A Off
FCR Enable
5.3 Exciter Open Diode Off, On N/A Off
Enable
Exciter Shorted Diode Off, On N/A Off
Enable
Loss of Field Enable Off, On N/A Off
5.4 Field OV Threshold 1V 325 V 1V 20 V
Field OC Base Value 0.1 A 16 A 0.1 A 0.1 A
Stator OV Threshold 0V 30,000 V 1V 150 V
Stator UV Threshold 0V 30,000 V 1V 90 V
EDM OD Ripple 0% 100% 0.1% 5.0%
EDM SD Ripple 0% 100% 0.1% 5.0%
5.5 EDM Inhibit Level 0% 100% 0.1% 10%
LOS Balanced Voltage 0% 100% 0.1% 50%
LOS Unbalanced Voltage 0% 100% 0.1% 20%
Loss of Field Level 0 3,000,000 kvar 1 kvar 50.00 kvar
5.6 Field OV Delay 0.2 s 30.0 s 0.1 s 5.0 s
Exc OC Time Dial Mult. 0.1 20.0 0.1 1.0
Stator OV Delay 0.1 s 60.0 s 0.1 s 5.0 s
Stator UV Delay 0.5 s 60.0 s 0.1 s 5.0 s
Loss of Voltage Sensing 0.0 s 30.0 s 0.1 s 2.0 s
Open Exciter Diode 10.0 s 60.0 s 0.1 s 10.0 s
Delay
5.7 Shorted Exciter Diode 5.0 s 30.0 s 0.1 s 5.0 s
Delay
Loss of Field TD 0.0 9.9 0.1 9.9 s
6.1 OEL Style Summing Point/Takeover N/A Summing Pnt
OEL Option Option 1/Option 2/Option 3 N/A Option 1
6.2 On-Line OEL Inst. Limit 0.0A 30.0 A 0.1 A 3.0 A
On-Line OEL Inst Time 0s 10 s 1s 10 s
On-Line OEL Med. Limit 0.0 A 20.0 A 0.1 A 2.0 A
On-Line OEL Med. Time 0s 120 s 1s 120 s
On-Line OEL Cont. Limit 0.0 A 15.0 A 0.1 A 1.0 A
6.3 Off-Line OEL Hi Limit 0.0 A 30 A 0.1 A 3.0 A
Off-Line OEL Hi Time 0s 10 s 1s 10 s
Off-Line OEL Low Limit 0.0 A 15 A 0.1 A 1.0 A
6.4 Off-Line Takeover OEL 0.0 A 15.0 A 0.1 A 0.0 A
Max. Current
Off-Line Takeover OEL 0.0 A 30.0 A 0.1 A 0.0 A
High Current

Off-Line Takeover OEL 0.1 s 20.0 s 0.1 s 0.1 s
Time Delay
6.5 On-Line Takeover OEL 0.0 A 30.0 A 0.1 A 0.0 A
Max Current
On-Line Takeover OEL 0.0 A 15.0 A 0.1 A 0.0 A
Min Current
On-Line Takeover TD 0.1 s 20.0 s 0.1 s 0.1 s
6.6 UEL Curve, Pnt 1 Watts 0 kW 49 kW 1 kW 0 kW
UEL Curve, Pnt 2 Watts 0 kW 49 kW 1 kW 0 kW
6.7 UEL Curve, Pnt 1 Vars 0 kvar 49 kvar 1 kvar 0 kvar
UEL Curve, Pnt 2 Vars 0 kvar 49 kvar 1 kvar 0 kvar
6.8 SCL High Limit 0.0 A 66,000.0 A 1.0 A 0.0 A
SCL High Limit Time 0.0 s 60.0 s 1.0 s 0s
SCL Low Limit 0.0 A 66,000.0 A 1.0 A 0A
7.1.1 Gen. Rated Output V 85 V 30,000 V 1V 120 V
Gen. Rated Output I 10.0 A 60,000 A 0.1 A 200.0 A
Gen. Rated Frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz 10 Hz 60 Hz
7.2.1 Rated Field Voltage 1.0 V 180.0 V 0.1 V 32.0 V
Rated Field Current 0.1 A 15.0 A 0.1 A 5.0 A
Pole Ratio 0 10 0.01 0
7.3.1 Gen. Sensing PT Pri. 1V 30,000 V 1V 120 V
Gen. Sensing PT Sec. 1V 600 V 1V 120 V
Bus Sensing PT Pri. 1V 500,000 V 1V 120 V
Bus Sensing PT Sec. 1V 600 V 1V 120 V
Gen. CT Pri. 1A 60,000 A 1A 200 A
Gen. CT Sec. 1A 5A 4A 5A
7.4.1 Sensing Configuration 1-phase A-C, 3-phase N/A 1-ph A-C
Auxiliary Input Type Voltage, Current N/A voltage
Cross Current Gain –30.00 30 0.01 0
7.4.2 AVR Mode Aux. Gain –99.00 99 0.01 1
FCR Mode Aux. Gain –99.00 99 0.01 1
Var Mode Aux. Gain –99.00 99 0.01 1
PF Mode Aux. Gain –99.00 99 0.01 1
Inner or Outer Loop Inner, Outer N/A Inner
7.5.1 Relay 1 Contact Sense NC, NO N/A NO
Relay 1 Annunc. Type Momentary, Maintained, Latched N/A Maintained
Relay 1 Moment Time 0.10 s 5.00 s 50 ms 0.10 s
Field Overvoltage On, Off N/A Off
Field Overcurrent On, Off N/A Off
Stator Undervoltage On, Off N/A Off
7.5.2 Stator Overvoltage On, Off N/A Off
Underfrequency On, Off N/A Off
Overexcitation Limit On, Off N/A Off
Underexcitation Limit On, Off N/A Off
FCR Mode On, Off N/A Off
No Voltage Sensing On, Off N/A Off
7.5.3 Setpoint at Low Limit On, Off N/A Off
Setpoint at High Limit On, Off N/A Off
System Below 10 Hz On, Off N/A Off
Open Exciter Diode On, Off N/A Off
Shorted Exciter Diode On, Off N/A Off
Relay 2 Annunc. Type Momentary Maintained, Latched N/A Maintained
Overexcitation On, Off N/A Off
Underexcitation On, Off N/A Off
Relay 3 Annunc. Type Momentary, Maintained, Latched N/A Maintained
Field Overcurrent On, Off N/A Off
Overexcitation Limit On, Off N/A Off
Underexcitation Limit On, Off N/A Off
7.6.1 AVR Traverse Rate 10 s 200 s 1s 20 s
FCR Traverse Rate 10 s 200 s 1s 20 s
Var Traverse Rate 10 s 200 s 1s 20 s
PF Traverse Rate 10 s 200 s 1s 20 s
7.7.1 AVR Prep Mode Maintain, Release N/A Release
FCR Prep Mode Maintain, Release N/A Release
Var Prep Mode Maintain, Release N/A Release
PF Prep Mode Maintain, Release N/A Release
7.8.1 Soft Start Level 0% 90% 1% 5%
Soft Start Time 1s 7,200 s 1s 5s
7.9.1 Internal Track rate 1.0 s 80 s 0.1 s 20.0 s

Internal Track Delay 0.0 s 8s 0.1 s 0.1 s
External Track Rate 1.0 s 80 s 0.1 s 20.0 s
External Track Delay 0.0 s 8s 01. s 0.1 s
8.1.1 Com0 RS232 Baud 1200 bps 19,200 bps ↑ by x2 ↓ by x ½ 9600 bps
Com1 RS232 Baud 1200 bps 19,200 bps ↑ by x2 ↓ by x ½ 9600 bps
Com2 RS232 Baud 1200 bps 19,200 bps ↑ by x2 ↓ by x ½ 9600 bps
8.1.2 Com2 Address 0 247 1 247
Com2 Delay 0 ms 200 ms 10 ms 10 ms
Parity None, Odd, Even N/A None
Stop Bits 1 2 1 2
8.2 LCD Contrast 40 80 1 60
8.3 Real-Time Clock Setting N/A 1 N/A
Real-Time Clock Date N/A 1 01-01-01
Setting
8.3.1 Time Format 12 hr, 24 hr N/A 12 hr
Daylight Saving Time DS ON, DS OFF N/A DS Off
Date Format d-m-y, m/d/y N/A d-m-y
PASSWORD PROTECTION
All editable settings on the front panel are password protected. Passwords can be a maximum of six
characters in length and may contain all letters, all numbers, or a mixture of both. Passwords are not case
sensitive; the DECS-200 will accept a correct password consisting of uppercase or lowercase letters.
There are two levels of access: global and setpoint. Global access grants the user the right to change any
editable setting through the front panel. Setpoint access grants the user the right to change a limited
number of settings. These settings include the basic operational settings like Start, Stop, AVR/FCR,
PF/var, control setpoints and pre-position. For a complete list, refer to Table 2-3. All editable settings on a
single menu screen are at the same access level.
Table 2-3. Settings Accessible with Setpoint Access Level

Screen Setting
OPERATE_1 (1.1) Start/Stop Control
OPERATE_1 (1.1) AVR/FCR Mode
OPERATE_1 (1.1) PF/Var Mode
OPERATE_1 (1.1) Load Compensation Type
OPERATE_1 (1.1) Pre-Position Enable
OPERATE_2 (1.2) Voltage Matching Enable
OPERATE_2 (1.2) Autotracking Enable
OPERATE_2 (1.2) Autotransfer Enable
MODE_SET (2.1) AVR Mode Setpoint
MODE_SET (2.1) FCR Mode Setpoint
MODE_SET (2.1) Var Mode Setpoint
MODE_SET (2.1) PF Mode Setpoint
MODE_SET (2.1) Droop Setting
PREP_SET (2.2) AVR Mode Setpoint Pre-Position
PREP_SET (2.2) FCR Mode Setpoint Pre-Position
MODE_SET (2.2) Var Mode Setpoint Pre-Position
ST
ADJUST (4.1) 1 Metering Field Display Quantity
nd
rd
ADJUST (4.1) Active Setpoint
CONTRAST (8.2) LCD Contrast

DECS-200 units are delivered with the global and setpoint passwords set at decs2. When a password is
entered, software first checks for a match between the entered password and the global password.
Because the two passwords are the same, global access is always granted. This means that in order to
allow setpoint access only, the global and setpoint passwords must be changed so that they are not the
same. Passwords may be changed using BESTCOMS software. It is suggested that the user change the
passwords in order to provide security against unauthorized parameter changes. Once changed, the
passwords should be stored in a secure location.
CAUTION
Pressing the Edit and Reset pushbuttons during DECS-200 power-up will cause
all user-programmed settings to be replaced with the default settings.
If the user-defined passwords are lost or forgotten, the default passwords may be restored by
simultaneously pressing the Edit and Reset pushbuttons during power-up of the DECS-200. Restoring the
passwords to the default values will also change all previously programmed settings to the default values.
Before restoring the default passwords (and settings), all DECS-200 settings should be downloaded to a
file by using BESTCOMS software. After the default settings are loaded, the user-programmed settings
can be uploaded to the DECS-200 from the saved settings file. The user may also reprogram the
passwords.
A password is required the first time any DECS-200 setting is changed or when the password access
expires (after 10 minutes with no additional entries). If a user with settings access attempts to begin an
edit session on a screen requiring global access, the settings access is revoked and the user is prompted
to enter a password to gain global access.
METERING SCREEN
Information displayed by the metering screen is grouped into five field types: metering, setpoint, percent
of range, mode message, and alarm annunciation.
Metering Fields
Three user-programmable fields display up to three different metering quantities at a given time. Table 2-
4 lists the metering quantities that may be selected.
Table 2-4. User-Selectable Metering Quantities

Metering Labels Metering Quantities
Va-b Generator A-B (L-L) rms voltage
Vb-c Generator B-C (L-L) rms voltage
Vc-a Generator C-A (L-L) rms voltage
Vavg Average of three generator L-L voltages
Line I Generator line current
VA Generator load VA
Watts Generator load watts
Var Generator load var
PF Generator load power factor
Gen Hz Generator frequency
Bus Hz Bus frequency
Bus V Bus rms L-L voltage
Fld V Field voltage
Fld I Field current
V Aux Voltage proportional to auxiliary input
EDM OD Open exciter diode ripple
EDM SD Shorted exciter diode ripple

The values in all three metering fields are automatically scaled by an autoranging function to display up to
four digits of resolution, a decimal point, and if needed, a multiplier such as k for 1,000 or M for 1,000,000.
For negative values with magnitudes greater than 999.9, only three digits of resolution are displayed.
Setpoint Field
The setpoint field displays the setpoint for the present mode of operation. Table 2-5 lists the relationship
between the operating mode and the setpoint field quantity.
Table 2-5. Setpoint Field as a Function of Operating Mode

Operating Mode Setpoint Field Quantity Mode Message
Off Setpoint from last mode UNIT IS OFF
Voltage Matching AVR setpoint VOLTAGE MATCHING
FCR (Manual) FCR setpoint FCR (MANUAL)
AVR (Auto) AVR setpoint AVR (AUTO)
Droop AVR setpoint DROOP
Var Control Var setpoint VAR CONTROL
PF Control PF setpoint POWER FACTOR
CONTROL
Percent-of-Range Field
The percent-of-range field displays the setpoint expressed as a percentage of the available adjustment
range. This relationship is linear. For example, a setpoint that is midway between minimum and maximum
would be displayed as 50.0%. A setpoint that is at the maximum limit would be displayed as 100%.
Mode Message Field

The bottom of the metering screen contains the mode message field which displays a message indicating
the DECS-200’s current mode of operation.
Alarm Annunciation Field

The alarm annunciation field, located directly below the metering fields, remains blank during normal
operating conditions. When an alarm condition occurs, the message “ALARMS (PRESS < OR >) appears
in the alarm annunciation field. The message appears as an inverse display—light colored characters
appear on a dark background. See Alarm Message Screen for information about how to identify which
alarm condition was annunciated.
Alarm Message Screen

From the metering screen, pressing either the Left or Right scrolling pushbutton will cause the alarm
message screen to appear. This screen displays up to six messages identifying the conditions that led to
the most recent annunciations. Table 2-6 lists the messages that may appear as annunciations on the
alarm message screen. When more than one message is listed, the newest annunciations are appended
to the bottom of the list. Once the list contains six messages, any further annunciations will cause the
oldest messages to be deleted from the top of the list.
Table 2-6. Annunciation Messages

Annunciation Message Duration of Message
FIELD OVERVOLTAGE Maintained until reset
FIELD OVERCURRENT Maintained until reset
GEN. UNDERVOLTAGE Maintained until reset
GEN. OVERVOLTAGE Maintained until reset
UNDERFREQUENCY Clears 2 s after end of event
OVEREXCITATION LIMIT Clears 2 s after end of event

Annunciation Message Duration of Message
UNDEREXCITATION LIMIT Clears 2 s after end of event
LOST VOLTAGE SENSING Maintained until reset
FAILED TO BUILD UP Clears 2 s after end of event
SYSTEM BELOW 10 HZ Maintained until reset
EXCITER DIODE OPEN Maintained until reset
EXCITER DIODE SHORT Maintained until reset
Once the list of annunciation messages has been viewed, it may be cleared by pressing the Reset
pushbutton. If a condition that LED to an annunciation is still present when the alarm message screen is
cleared, then a new annunciation message will be generated.
Pressing the Reset pushbutton will also send the display back to the Metering screen. Furthermore, the
alarms message on the Metering screen will also be cleared. However, if the user leaves the alarm
message screen by pressing the Left, Right or Up scrolling pushbuttons, then the annunciation
messages list remains intact. This allows the user to maintain a short history of annunciations. In addition,
the alarms message on the Metering screen will also remain. The disadvantage of this is that the
metering screen would no longer indicate that a new annunciation occurred because the alarms message
would always be present.
Screens with Special Editing Modes

There are several screens that operate differently while in the edit mode. OPERATE_1 (1.1),
BAUD_RATE (8.1.1), and MODBUS (8.1.2) are examples of such screens. In each case, any changes
made to a setting are not used by the system (nor saved in nonvolatile memory) until the Edit pushbutton
is pressed again. The programmable inputs for output relays 1 through 4 work in the same manner.
These are on screens RELAY_1 (7.5.1) through RELAY_3B (7.5.9).
The REG_GAIN (3.1) screen also operates in a different manner when in the Edit mode. The first four
parameters on this screen represent a table containing twenty sets of predefined PID values and one set
of user-definable values. The first of these, STAB SET #, which means stability settings number, is the
index to the table. The second, third, and fourth parameters (AVR/FCR Kp, Ki, and Kd), are the actual
entries in the table. Stability setting numbers 1 to 20 are the predefined values, and 21 is the set of user-
definable values.
Editing these parameters works as follows: As long as STAB SET # is set to 21, then AVR/FCR Kp, Ki,
and Kd may be individually edited and customized. The values displayed are not used by the system until
they are saved by pressing the Edit pushbutton. This means that if a change is aborted by pressing the
Reset pushbutton, the PID numbers currently being used by the system remain unchanged.
If STAB SET # is 1 to 20, then AVR/FCR Kp, Ki and Kd may not be edited from the display (although the
cursor can be moved to their display fields). If the STAB SET # is changed, the values shown in the
display fields will not change until the selected STAB SET # is saved. When the STAB SET # is saved,
the table entries are saved, used by the system and displayed on the LCD.
If the DECS-200 is using the user-defined values previously set at STAB SET # 21 and a STAB SET # of
1 to 20 is saved, the user-defined values are lost. The next time that user-defined values for STAB SET #
21 are required, they must be manually entered and then saved. It is assumed that the table entries for
STAB SET # 1 to 20 will be used as starting points from which users will arrive at their own customized
values after the selected starting point has been saved (and thus copied into STAB SET # 21).
Menu Tree
The menu tree has eight branches:
1. OPERATING. Displays mode status and on or off status (AVR, FCR, var, PF, etc.)
2. SETPOINTS. Display and setting of mode values (AVR, FCR, var, PF, etc.)
3. LOOP GAINS. Loop gains for each element are set here (Kp, Ki, Kd, Kg)
4. METERING. Real-time metering of user-selected values and alarm messages.
5. PROTECTION. Display and setting of protective function parameters such as pickups.
6. LIMITERS. Display and setting of system limiters (OEL, UEL, etc.)
7. SYSTEM PARAMETERS. Display and setting of system parameters. This menu item consists of nine
sub-branches:
• Generator Data
• Field Data
• Transformers
• Configuration
• Output Contacts
• Traverse Rates
• Pre-position Modes
• Startup
• Tracking
8. GENERAL SETTINGS. Display and setting of communication setting parameters and LCD contrast.
Figures 2-2 through 2-11 illustrate all branches in the menu tree. In Figures 2-2 through 2-11, the upper
left corner of each screen displays a one, two or three digit number with decimal points between each
digit. These numbers are reference numbers to the screens in the menu tree. A letter at the upper right
corner (G, S, and N) indicates the security access level (global, setpoint and not applicable) required to
edit that screen.
Figure 2-2.Operating Menu Branch

Figure 2-3. Setpoint Menu Branch

Figure 2-4. Loop Gains Menu Branch

Figure 2-5. Metering Menu Branch

Figure 2-6. Protection Menu Branch

Figure 2-7. Limiters Menu Branch

Figure 2-8. System Parameters Menu Branch (Part 1 of 3)



Figure 2-11. General Settings Menu Branch

FRONT PANEL OPERATION
The following paragraphs describe the settings and adjustments that are available via the DECS-200 front
panel. They are grouped into eight main categories which include: operating modes, setpoints, loop gains,
metering, protection, limiters, system parameters, and general settings.
Front panel settings and adjustments are listed and described in the following paragraphs. Settings are
organized by category and by screen.
Operating Modes
Screen: \OPER\OPERATE_1 (1.1)
START/STOP - starts and stops the regulator
AVR OR FCR - selects the regulator mode: AVR for automatic voltage regulator, FCR for field current
regulator (also known as MANUAL mode)
PF OR var - selects the controller mode: OFF for none, var for var control, PF for power factor control
LOAD COMP - selects the load compensation type: OFF for none, DROOP for voltage droop.
PRE-POSITION - enables/disables the pre-position function: OFF to disable, ON to enable
Screen: \OPER\OPERATE_2 (1.2)
VOLT MATCH - turns the voltage matching function on and off (Internal tracking between modes)
INT TRACK - turns the internal tracking function on and off
EXT TRACK - turns the external tracking function on and off
UF OR V/HZ - selects either underfrequency or volts-per-hertz limiting
Setpoints
Screen: \SETPT\MODE_SET (2.1)
AVR MODE - the automatic voltage regulation setpoint in actual generator voltage
FCR MODE - the field current regulation setpoint in Amps
DROOP - the amount of voltage droop as a % of rated generator voltage when the kvar load numerically
equals the rated kW
Var MODE - the var controller regulation setpoint in var
PF MODE - the power factor controller regulation setpoint
Screen: \SETPT\MODES\RANGE_1 (2.1.1)
FINE V BD - the adjustable voltage band (var volt band) around the generator's output voltage as a % of
rated generator voltage when var/PF mode is active
AVR MIN - the minimum automatic voltage regulator setpoint as a % of rated generator voltage
AVR MAX - the maximum automatic voltage regulator setpoint as a % of rated generator voltage
FCR MIN - the minimum field current regulator setpoint as a % of rated field current
FCR MAX - the maximum field current regulator setpoint as a % of rated field current
Screen: \SETPT\MODES\RANGE_2 (2.1.2)
MIN var OUT - the minimum generated var setpoint as a numerical % of rated generator kVA (negative
for absorbing)
MAX var OUT - the maximum generated var setpoint as a numerical % of rated generator kVA (negative
for absorbing)
MAX LAG PF - maximum lagging power factor setpoint
MAX LEAD PF - maximum leading power factor setpoint
V MATCH BD - the adjustable voltage band allows the voltage matching function to activate if the bus
voltage is within this band. This setting is a numerical % of rated generator voltage.
V MATCH REF - (Gen to Bus PT Match Level) the bus voltage setpoint for the voltage matching function
as a numerical % of bus voltage

Screen: \SETPT\PREP_SET (2.2)
The present control mode operating setpoint is driven to the pre-position value when the unit receives a
pre-position command.
AVR MODE - the automatic voltage regulator setpoint pre-position value
FCR MODE - the field current regulator setpoint pre-position value
Var MODE - the var controller setpoint pre-position value
PF MODE - the power factor setpoint pre-position value
Loop Gains
Screen: \GAIN\REG_GAIN1 (3.1)
STAB RANGE - the index into the internally defined PID table. Table 2-7 lists the automatic pre-defined
stability gain settings for the exciter field and the 20 stability settings.
AVR/FCR Kp - proportional gain coefficient used in the AVR/FCR loop
AVR/FCR Ki - integral gain coefficient used in the AVR/FCR loop
AVR/FCR Kd - derivative gain coefficient used in the AVR/FCR loop
AVR/FCR Td - derivative time constant used in AVR/FCR loop
Table 2-7. Automatic Stability Range Gain Settings Index

Generator
Generator Open Exciter Time
Excitation Circuit Time Constant
Mode Setting Constant (T’do) (Texc) Kp Ki Kd
1 1.0 0.17 42.20 115.20 4.433
2 1.5 0.25 66.50 150.00 8.750
3 2.0 0.33 87.16 167.90 13.670
4 2.5 0.42 104.50 175.80 18.960
5 3.0 0.50 119.00 177.80 24.500
6 3.5 0.58 131.30 176.40 30.220
7 4.0 0.67 141.80 173.10 36.060
8 4.5 0.75 150.90 168.80 42.000
9 5.0 0.83 158.80 163.90 48.010
Exciter Field
10 5.5 0.92 165.70 158.70 54.080

11 6.0 1.00 171.80 153.60 60.200
12 6.5 1.08 177.20 148.50 66.350
13 7.0 1.17 182.10 143.60 72.540
14 7.5 1.25 186.50 138.90 78.750
15 8.0 1.33 190.50 134.40 84.980
16 8.5 1.42 194.10 130.10 91.230
17 9.0 1.50 197.40 125.90 97.500
18 9.5 1.58 200.40 122.10 103.800
19 10.0 1.67 203.20 118.40 110.100
20 10.5 1.75 205.70 114.80 116.400
Screen: \GAIN\REG GAIN2 (3.2)

AVR Kg - loop gain used in AVR mode
FCR Kg - loop gain used in FCR mode
Screen: \GAIN\LIM_GAINS (3.3)
OEL Ki - integral gain coefficient used in the overexcitation limiter loop
OEL Kg - loop gain used in the overexcitation limiter
UEL Ki - integral gain coefficient used in the underexcitation limiter loop
UEL Kg - loop gain used in the underexcitation limiter
SCL Ki - integral gain coefficient used in the stator current limiter
SCL Kg - loop gain used in the stator current limiter
Controller Gains
Screen: \GAIN\CTL_GAINS (3.4)
PF Ki - integral gain coefficient used in the power factor controller
PF Kg - loop gain used for the power factor controller
Var Ki - integral gain coefficient used in the var controller
Var Kg - loop gain used for the var controller
V MATCH Kg - loop gain used for the voltage matching function
Metering
Screen: \METER\ADJUST (4.1)
1st metering field - displays any one of several metering quantities
2nd metering field - displays any one of several metering quantities
3rd metering field - displays any one of several metering quantities
SETPT - the present control mode operating setpoint
Screen: \METER\ALARM_MSG (4.2)
Reset Button - clears any displayed alarm messages (and returns to the ADJUST metering screen).
Protection
Screen: \PROT\UNDERFREQ (5.1)
CORNR FREQ - the corner frequency for the underfrequency curve
UF SLOPE - the slope of the underfrequency curve
Screen: \PROT\PROT_ENABL1 (5.2)
FIELD OV - field overvoltage detection enable
FIELD OC - field overcurrent detection enable
STATOR OV - generator output overvoltage detection enable
STATOR UV - generator output undervoltage detection enable
NO SENSING – loss of voltage sensing detection enable
NO SNS→FCR – transfer to FCR mode enable (when a loss of voltage sensing is detected). Loss of
voltage sensing detection must also be enabled for this feature to work.
Screen: \PROT\PROT_ENAB2 (5.3)
EX DIOD OD - exciter open diode detection enable
EX DIOD SD - exciter shorted diode detection enable
LOSS FIELD - enables and disables loss of field protection
Screen: \PROT\PROT_LEVL (5.4)
FIELD OV - field overvoltage threshold
FIELD OC - field overcurrent base value (100%)
STATOR OV - generator output overvoltage threshold
STATOR UV - generator output undervoltage threshold
EDM OD RIPL - open exciter diode ripple threshold
EDM SD RIPL - shorted exciter diode ripple threshold
Screen: \PROT\PROT_LEVL2 (5.5)
EDM INH LVL - exciter diode detection inhibit level
LOS BAL V - loss of balanced sensing voltage threshold
LOS IMBAL V - loss of unbalanced sensing voltage threshold
LOSS FIELD - loss of field time delay
Screen: \PROT\PROT_TIMER (5.6)
FIELD OV - field overvoltage time delay
FIELD OC TD - field overcurrent time dial multiplier
STATOR OV - generator output overvoltage time delay
STATOR UV - generator output undervoltage time delay
NO SENSING - lost sensing voltage time delay
EX DIOD OD - exciter open diode time delay
Screen: \PROT\PROT_TIMR2 (5.7)
EX DIOD SD - exciter shorted diode time delay
LOSS FIELD - loss of field time delay
Limiters
Screen: LIMITERS (6.0)
ENABLED - selects which limiters are enabled: NONE, UEL, OEL, OEL/UEL, SCL, SCL/UEL, SCL/OEL,
or SCL/OEL/UEL
Screen: \LIMIT\OPTION (6.1)
On-line overexcitation limiter style and options.
OEL STYLE - selects Summing Point or Takeover style overexcitation limiter
OEL OPTION - selects on-line and off-line overexcitation limiter control options:
Option 1: On-line OEL settings are active when either the 52 J/K or 52 L/M contacts are open. Off-line
OEL settings are active when either the 52 J/K or 52 L/M contacts are closed.
Option 2: On-line OEL settings are active when the 52 J/K contact is open. Off-line OEL settings are
active when the 52 J/K contact is closed.
Option 3: On-line OEL settings are active at all times.
Screen: \LIMIT\ONLINE (6.2)
On-line overexcitation limiter (summing point) settings.
INST LIMIT - on-line overexcitation limiter instantaneous limit threshold
INST TIME - on-line overexcitation limiter instantaneous limit time delay
MED LIMIT - on-line overexcitation limiter medium current threshold
MED TIME - on-line overexcitation limiter medium current time delay
CONT LIMIT - on-line overexcitation limiter continuous (low) current threshold
Screen \LIMIT\OFFLINE (6.3)
Off-line overexcitation limiter (summing point) settings.
OEL HI LIM - off-line overexcitation limiter high current threshold
HI LIM TIME - off-line overexcitation limiter high current time delay
OEL LO LIM - off-line overexcitation limiter low current threshold

Screen \LIMIT\OFFTAKOVR (6.4)
Off-line overexcitation limiter (takeover) settings.
OEL MAX CUR - off-line takeover overexcitation limiter maximum current threshold
OEL MIN CUR - off-line takeover overexcitation limiter minimum current threshold
OEL TD - off-line takeover overexcitation limiter time delay
Screen \LIMIT\ONTAKOVR (6.5)
On-line overexcitation limiter (takeover) settings.
OEL MAX CUR - on-line takeover overexcitation limiter maximum current threshold
OEL MIN CUR - on-line takeover overexcitation limiter minimum current threshold
OEL TD - on-line takeover overexcitation limiter time delay
Screen \LIMIT\UEL_CRV_X (6.6)
Underexcitation limiter real-power curve points.
PNT 1 WATTS - underexcitation limiter real-power curve point 1
Screen \LIMIT\UEL_CRV_Y (6.7)
Underexcitation limiter reactive-power curve points.
PNT 1 vars - underexcitation limiter reactive-power curve point 1
Screen \LIMIT\SCLIM (6.8)
Stator current limiter settings.
SCL HI LIM - stator current limiter high current setpoint
HI LIM TIME - stator current limiter time delay
SCL LO LIM - stator current limiter low current setpoint
System Parameters
Screen: \GEN\GEN_DATA (7.1.1)
RATED VOLT - generator rated output voltage
RATED CURR - generator rated output current
FREQUENCY - generator rated frequency
Screen: \EXCTR\EXCTR_DATA (7.2.1)
FIELD VOLT - rated field voltage
FIELD CURR - rated field current
POLE RATIO - ratio between exciter poles to the number of generator poles
Screen: \XFMRS\XFMR_DATA (7.3.1)
GEN PT PRI - generator sensing transformer primary voltage rating
GEN PT SEC - generator sensing transformer secondary voltage rating
BUS PT PRI - bus sensing transformer primary voltage rating
BUS PT SEC - bus sensing transformer secondary voltage rating

GEN CT PRI - generator sensing transformer primary current rating
GEN CT SEC - generator sensing transformer secondary current rating
Screen: \CONFG\CNFG_DATA (7.4.1)
SENSING - sensing configuration: single-phase or three-phase
AUX IN TYPE - selects the auxiliary input type as voltage or current
CRSS I GAIN - cross current compensation input gain
Screen: \CNFG AUX Gains (7.4.2)
The auxiliary input allows an analog signal to be externally applied to the DECS-200 to modify the
operating setpoint. The amount of change that may be induced is proportional to the magnitude of the
signal and the input gain.
AVR MODE – auxiliary input gain in AVR mode
FCR MODE – auxiliary input gain in FCR mode
Var MODE – auxiliary input gain in var mode
PR MODE – auxiliary input gain in PF mode
INNER/OUTER – control loop summing point location where the auxiliary input signal is to be injected.
For AVR or FCR mode, select INNER. For var or PF mode, select outer. Once selected, the injection
point remains fixed across all modes of operation.
Screen: \CNTCT\RELAY_1 (7.5.1)
There are three types of relay annunciation: momentary, maintained and latched. A relay that is
programmed for momentary annunciation will do so for a (programmable) time interval and then cease.
The momentary annunciation for an existing condition will not repeat. A relay that is programmed for
maintained annunciation will do so for the duration of the condition that is being annunciated. A relay
programmed for a latched annunciation will continue to annunciate the condition until an alarm reset
command is given through the front panel, BESTCOMS software (via the front RS-232 port) or Modbus
(via the rear RS-485 port).
OUTPUT SENSE - relay 1 contact normal state: NO for normally open, NC for normally closed
OUTPUT TYPE - type of contact annunciation: MOMENT for momentary, MAINTN for maintained,
LATCHED for latched
MOMENT TIME - the duration of a momentary annunciation
FIELD O/V - assignment of field overvoltage annunciation to output relay 1
FIELD O/C - assignment of field overcurrent annunciation to output relay 1
STATOR U/V - assignment of stator undervoltage annunciation to output relay 1
Screen: \CNTCT\RELAY_1A (7.5.2)
STATOR O/V - assignment of stator overvoltage annunciation to output relay 1
UNDER FREQ - assignment of underfrequency annunciation to output relay 1
IN OEL - assignment of overexcitation limit annunciation to output relay 1
IN UEL - assignment of underexcitation limit annunciation to output relay 1
IN FCR MODE - assignment of FCR mode (Manual) annunciation to output relay 1
NO V SENSE - assignment of lost voltage sensing annunciation to output relay 1
Screen: \CNTCT\RELAY_1B (7.5.3)
AT LO LIMIT - assignment of setpoint at low limit annunciation to output relay 1
AT HI LIMIT - assignment of setpoint at high limit annunciation to output relay 1
BELOW 10 HZ - assignment of generator frequency below 10 hertz annunciation to output relay 1
EXC DIOD OD - assignment of open exciter diode to output relay 1
EXC DIOD SD - assignment of shorted exciter diode to output relay 1
LOSS FIELD - enables and disables annunciation of loss of field protection

Screen: \CNTCT\RELAY_1C (7.5.4)
IN SCL - enables and disables stator current limiting annunciation
OUTPUT TYPE - duration of contact annunciation: MOMENT for momentary, MAINTN for maintained,
LATCHED for latched
IN FCR MODE - assignment of FCR mode (manual) annunciation to output relay 2
BELOW 10 HZ – assignment of generator frequency below 10 hertz annunciation to output relay 2
OUTPUT TYPE - duration of contact annunciation: MOMENT for momentary, MAINTN for maintained,
LATCHED for latched
IN FCR MODE - assignment of FCR mode (Manual) annunciation to output relay 3
BELOW 10 HZ – assignment of generator frequency below 10 hertz annunciation to output relay 3

Screen: \TRVRS\TRVRS_RATE (7.6.1)
The traverse rate is the time required to adjust the present control mode setpoint from one extreme of the
programmed adjustment range to the other extreme.
AVR MODE - the automatic voltage regulator mode traverse rate
FCR MODE - the field current regulator mode traverse rate
Var MODE - the var control mode traverse rate
PF MODE - the power factor control mode traverse rate
Screen: \PMODE\PREP_MODE (7.7.1)
The pre-position mode for the present control mode determines whether or not the unit will respond to
further setpoint change commands once the operating setpoint is driven to the pre-position value. If the
pre-position mode is set for MAINTAIN, then further setpoint change commands are ignored. If the pre-
position mode is set for RELEASE, then subsequent setpoint change commands are followed.
AVR MODE - automatic voltage regulator pre-position mode
FCR MODE - field current regulator pre-position mode
Var MODE - var controller pre-position mode
PF MODE - power factor controller pre-position mode
Screen: \START\START_UP (7.8.1)
SS LEVEL - soft start level
SS TIME - soft start time
Screen: \TRACK\TRACK_DATA (7.9.1)
Internal tracking (autotracking) and external tracking (auto-transfer)
INT RATE - the traverse rate of internal tracking from minimum setpoints to maximum setpoints
INT DELAY - the time delay before internal tracking begins after it is turned on
EXT RATE - the traverse rate of external tracking from minimum setpoints to maximum setpoints
EXT DELAY - the time delay before external tracking begins after it is turned on
General Settings
Screen: \COMMS\BAUD_RATE (8.1.1)
COM0 RS232 - the front panel RS232 communications port baud rate
COM1 RS232 - the rear panel RS232 autotracking communications port baud rate
COM2 RS485 - the rear panel RS485 Modbus communications port baud rate
Screen: \COMMS\MODBUS (8.1.2)
Settings for the rear panel RS485 Modbus communications port
COM2 ADDR - device address
COM2 DELAY - response delay time
PARITY - parity: NONE, ODD, or EVEN
STOP BITS - number of stop bits: 1 or 2
Screen: \SETUP\CONTRAST (8.2)
Front panel LCD contrast setting

Screen: \D200\SETUP\CLOCK (8.3)
TIME - displays and sets the current time
DATE - displays and sets the current date
Screen: \RTC\CLK_FORMAT (8.3.1)
TIME FORMAT - selects the format for displaying time on Screen 8.3
DST FORMAT - selects the DECS-200 RTC for day light savings time
DATE FORMAT - selects the format for displaying the date on Screen 8.3

SECTION 3 ● FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 3 ● FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................... 3-1
INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................... 3-1
FUNCTION BLOCK DESCRIPTIONS ................................................................................................... 3-1
Contact Input Circuits ......................................................................................................................... 3-2
Analog Inputs ..................................................................................................................................... 3-3
Operating Power ................................................................................................................................ 3-4
Control Power ..................................................................................................................................... 3-5
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) ..................................................................................................... 3-5
Microprocessor ................................................................................................................................... 3-5
Digital Signal Processor (DSP) .......................................................................................................... 3-5
Operational Settings ........................................................................................................................... 3-5
Watchdog Timer ................................................................................................................................. 3-5
Real-Time Clock ................................................................................................................................. 3-5
Pulse-Width Modulated (PWM) Output .............................................................................................. 3-5
Relay Output Circuits ......................................................................................................................... 3-5
Communication .................................................................................................................................. 3-6
Memory Circuits ................................................................................................................................. 3-7
Protection Functions ........................................................................................................................... 3-7
SOFT START ......................................................................................................................................... 3-9
LIMITER FUNCTIONS ......................................................................................................................... 3-10
Underfrequency Limiter .................................................................................................................... 3-10
Volts per Hertz Ratio Limiter ............................................................................................................ 3-11
Overexcitation Limiter (OEL) ............................................................................................................ 3-11
Underexcitation Limiter ..................................................................................................................... 3-13
Stator Current Limiting ..................................................................................................................... 3-13
DROOP AND LINE-DROP COMPENSATION .................................................................................... 3-14
DATA LOGGING AND REPORTING................................................................................................... 3-14
Sequence of Events Reporting......................................................................................................... 3-14
Oscillography .................................................................................................................................... 3-15
Figures
Figure 3-1. Simplified Block Diagram ........................................................................................................ 3-1
Figure 3-2. Field Overcurrent Timing Curves ............................................................................................ 3-7
Figure 3-3. Soft Start Voltage Reference ................................................................................................ 3-10
Figure 3-4. Typical Underfrequency Compensation Curve ..................................................................... 3-10
Figure 3-5. Typical 1.10 PU V/Hz Limiter Curve ..................................................................................... 3-11
Figure 3-6. Off-Line Overexcitation Limiting ............................................................................................ 3-11
Figure 3-7. On-Line Overexcitation Limiting ............................................................................................ 3-11
Figure 3-8. Inverse Time Characteristic for Takeover-Style OEL ........................................................... 3-12
Figure 3-9. Custom Five-Point Curve ...................................................................................................... 3-13
Figure 3-10. Stator Current Limiting ........................................................................................................ 3-13
Figure 3-11. Data Record Example ......................................................................................................... 3-16
Tables
Table 3-1. 52L/M and 52J/K Truth Table (Option 1, Default Settings) ...................................................... 3-3
9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 Functional Description i

ii DECS-200 Functional Description 9360100990 Rev H

SECTION 3 ● FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
INTRODUCTION
This section illustrates and describes the functional capabilities of the DECS-200.
FUNCTION BLOCK DESCRIPTIONS

The function blocks of the DECS-200 are illustrated in Figure 3-1 and described in the following
paragraphs.
FLASH
RAM EEPROM
START MEMORY
STOP
WTCHD
SECEN
52L/M
FRONT COM0 ON/OF
AUTO
CONTACT PANEL RS-232 RELAY
FCR INPUT KEYPAD PORT OUTPUT RLY3
PRE-P CIRCUITS CONTACTS
RAISE RLY2
LOWER
52J/K RLY1
ALRST
ZCD
FRONT
ZCD PANEL
LEDS
BUS VCA MICRO
PROCESSOR
GEN VCA FRONT
GEN VAB
ANALOG PANEL
INPUT LCD
LINE IB CIRCUITS
ADC
LINE IA/C
ACC V/I
COM1
RS-232
PORT
COM2
RS-485
+5
VAC WATCH-DOG PORT
+12
POWER TIMER
-12
SUPPLY
VDC
+24 F+
CHOPPER
DIGITAL
(PWM)
SIGNAL F-
P0003-19.vsd PROCESSOR
03-09-01
POWER
INPUT
Figure 3-1. Simplified Block Diagram
9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 Functional Description 3-1

Contact Input Circuits
Eleven contact input circuits, powered by isolated 12 Vdc, provide operational input control for the DECS-
200. If the start and stop inputs should become active at the same time, the stop input has priority. If the
AVR and FCR inputs should become active at the same time, the FCR input has priority. Each of the
eleven inputs, their functions, and types of input required are defined in the following paragraphs.
Start
This input accepts a momentary contact closure and enables the DECS-200. Once the DECS-200 is
enabled, this input has no effect.
Stop
This input accepts a momentary contact closure and disables the DECS-200. Once the DECS-200 is
disabled, this input has no effect. The Stop input also takes precedence over the Start input.
AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulation)
This input accepts a momentary contact closure that places the DECS-200 in AVR mode. Once the
DECS-200 is in AVR mode, this input has no effect.
FCR (Field Current Regulation)
This input accepts a momentary contact closure that places the DECS-200 in FCR mode. Once the unit is
in FCR mode, this input has no effect. The FCR input takes precedence over the AVR input.
Raise
This input increases the active operating setpoint. This function is active as long as the contact is closed.
The raise increment is a function of the setpoint range of adjustment and the active mode traverse rate.
The increments are directly proportional to the adjustment range and inversely proportional to the traverse
rate. This input has no effect when the active pre-position mode is Maintain.
Lower
This input decreases the active operating setpoint. This function is active as long as the contact is closed.
The lower increment is a function of the setpoint range of adjustment and the active mode traverse rate.
The increments are directly proportional to the adjustment range and inversely proportional to the traverse
rate. This input has no effect when the active pre-position mode is Maintain.
PRE-P (Pre-Position)
This input accepts a continuous contact closure that causes all setpoints to be changed to the pre-
position (predefined) value. If the active pre-position mode is Maintain, then the pre-position input will
override the raise and lower inputs to maintain the setpoint at the pre-position value while the contact is
closed. If the active pre-position mode is Release, then the pre-position input will change the setpoint to
the pre-position value and respond to raise and lower inputs.
If the non-active pre-position mode is Maintain and internal tracking is enabled, the non-active mode will
maintain the non-active setpoint at the pre-position value and override the tracking function. If the non-
active pre-position is Release and internal tracking is enabled, then the pre-position input will change the
setpoint to the pre-position value and respond to the tracking function.
Typically, this input is connected to a 52b auxiliary contact on the generator breaker. When the generator
breaker opens, all setpoints are forced to the pre-position settings. This is especially helpful if FCR mode
is active and the generator is under a load. Utilizing a 52b contact will force the FCR setpoint to its pre-
position setting which could be preset to the generator’s no-load, nominal voltage.
52L/M (Unit/Parallel)
This input informs the DECS-200 that the system is operating in single-unit operation or paralleled to
another generator or power grid in droop mode. It also switches between which overexcitation limiter (off-
line limiter or on-line limiter) is activated when excitation levels exceed the OEL settings. This input is
typically connected to a 52b auxiliary contact of the generator breaker and requires a continuous contact
closure to switch modes. Refer to the 52J/K (Var/PF Enable) paragraph for more information.
If both the 52L/M and 52J/K contact inputs are closed, AVR mode is active while the off-line
overexcitation limiter is enabled and will limit if the settings are exceeded. This mode is intended for
stand-alone (single unit) generator operation. SCL and UEL are disabled when both 52L/M and 52J/K
contact inputs are closed.
3-2 DECS-200 Functional Description 9360100990 Rev H

If the 52L/M contact input is open and 52J/K contact input is closed, droop mode is active while the on-
line overexcitation limiter is enabled and will limit if the settings are exceeded. This mode is intended for
two or more generators paralleled together on an isolated bus (islanded) or paralleled directly to the utility
grid. Cross-current compensation (CCC) can also be utilized in this contact configuration. However, this
mode (CCC) is not intended for paralleling to the utility grid.
If both 52L/M is open and 52J/K are open, var/power factor mode is active while the on-line overexcitation
limiter is enabled and will limit if the settings are exceeded. This mode is intended for applications
requiring var or power factor regulation when paralleled to the utility grid.
Table 3-1 describes 52 L/M and 52 J/K contact functionality for default OEL option 1. OEL options 2 and 3
are discussed in Overexcitation Limiter, On-Line/Off-Line OEL Options.
Table 3-1. 52L/M and 52J/K Truth Table (Option 1, Default Settings)
DECS-200 Operating Mode 52L/M 52J/K Generator Operating Mode
AVR mode active, off-line OEL Closed Closed Single unit/stand-alone
enabled, no droop, no var/PF, SCL
and UEL disabled
Droop mode active, on-line OEL Open Closed Paralleled to the utility grid (droop) or
enabled, no var/PF two or more generators islanded
(droop or cross-current comp.)
Var/PF mode active, on-line OEL Open Open Paralleled to utility grid
enabled
52J/K (Var/Power Factor Enable)

This input accepts a continuous contact closure that disables var/power factor operation. An open contact
enables the DECS-200 to control the generator reactive power in either the var or power factor modes.
These functions must be enabled via HMI, BESTCOMS, or Modbus before use. For more information,
refer to the 52L/M (Unit/Parallel) paragraphs. If neither var nor power factor mode is desired, it is
recommended that a jumper wire be placed across the 52J/K and common terminals, and switch the
52L/M input with the generator breaker auxiliary contact (52b).
SECEN (Secondary Enable)
This input accepts a continuous contact closure and enables the DECS-200 unit as the secondary unit to
another excitation control system.
ALRST (Alarm Reset)
This input accepts a momentary contact closure to clear all latched relay annunciations and front panel
alarm messages.
Analog Inputs
The following analog inputs are used to sense the following quantities:
• Generator voltage (three-phase/single-phase)
• Bus voltage (single-phase)
• Phase B (line) current
• Cross current loop input
• Accessory input (remote setpoint control)
• Field voltage (internal)
• Field current (internal)
Generator Voltage Sensing Ranges
The ac voltage sensing range of the DECS-200 is split into four operating ranges: 120 volts nominal, 240
volts nominal, 480 volts nominal, and 600 volts nominal. The range selection is the same for generator
and bus voltages and is based on the secondary VT voltage for the generator voltage sensing. The 120-
volt range is selected if the generator secondary VT voltage is between 85 and 153 Vac. The 240 volts
range is selected if the generator secondary VT voltage is between 170 and 300 Vac. The 480-volt range
is selected if the generator secondary VT voltage is between 340 and 528 Vac. The 600-volt range is
selected if the generator VT voltage is between 540 and 690 Vac.

Generator Voltage (VCA)
The GEN VCA input senses the generator voltage across phases A and C and is used to estimate the
generator rms voltage and frequency. This input is not internally isolated.
Generator Voltage (VAB)
The GEN VAB input senses the generator voltage across phases A and B and is used to estimate the
Generator Voltage (VBC)
The GEN VBC input senses the generator voltage across phases B and C and is used to estimate the
Bus Voltage (BUS VCA)
The BUS VCA input senses the bus voltage across phases A and C. This voltage is used to estimate the
bus rms voltage and frequency. The BUS VCA input is not internally isolated.
Phase B Line Current
This internally isolated input is developed from a current transformer (CT) and used to calculate the B-
phase generator line current.
Cross-Current Loop Input
This input is developed from a current transformer (CT) connected to phase B of a generator and used
when generators are operating in cross-current compensation mode.
Accessory Input (Remote Setpoint Control)
This internally isolated input may be either an analog voltage (–10 to +10 Vdc) or current (4 to 20
milliamperes). Separate terminals provide convenient terminations but only one input may be used in any
application. This input is typically supplied by a power system stabilizer or similar device.
The accessory voltage input signal changes the setpoint of the selected operating mode. This input may
be in the range of –10 to +10 Vdc or 4 to 20 milliamperes. The input signal is named a voltage signal
even though one input mode may be 4 to 20 milliamperes. When the current input mode is selected, the
input current (4 to 20 milliamperes) is converted by the DECS-200 to –5 to +5 Vdc voltage signal. The
following equation is used when converting current signals to voltage signals.
V AUX = 0.625(I − 12)

Where: VAUX is the voltage signal
I is the current in milliamperes
The accessory voltage input signal is multiplied by the accessory gain setting. The gain setting is in the
range of –99 to +99. If the gain is set to zero, the accessory voltage input signal is made inactive. The
accessory voltage input can be active in all four operating modes.
In AVR mode, the accessory voltage input signal is multiplied by the voltage gain setting which defines
the setpoint change as a percentage of the rated generator voltage.
In FCR mode, the accessory voltage input signal is multiplied by the current gain setting which defines the
setpoint change as a percentage of the rated field current.
In var mode, the accessory voltage input signal is multiplied by the var gain setting which defines the
setpoint change as a percentage of the rated apparent power of the generator.
In power factor mode, the accessory voltage input signal is multiplied by the power factor gain setting and
divided by 100, which defines the power factor setpoint change.
Field Current and Field Voltage
These signals are sensed internally. The field voltage signal is used for field overvoltage protection. The
field current signal is used for: off-line and on-line overexcitation limiting, auto-tracking, and field over-
current protection.
Operating Power
The DECS-200 operating power input accepts three-phase or single-phase voltage over the range of 50
to 277 Vac (depending on the nominal field voltage) at 50 to 500 hertz. The input is rectified and filtered
by the input’s low-pass filter, which feeds the chopper stage. Depending on the operating power applied,
three nominal output voltages are possible: 32, 63, or 125 Vdc.
Control Power
Control power may be either of two types: nominal 24/48 Vdc or nominal 120 Vac/125 Vdc. For the 120
Vac/125 Vdc control power type, both ac and dc input power voltage might be applied for redundant
power supply operation. Refer to Section 1, General Information, Specifications, for voltage ranges. The
power supply provides +5 Vdc, ±12 Vdc, and +24 Vdc for the DECS-200 internal circuitry. When dual
power sources are used, an isolation transformer is required for the ac input.
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)

All analog input signals are brought to the input of the 12-bit ADC. Each input signal is sampled at a rate
that is controlled by the digital signal processor (DSP).
Microprocessor
The microprocessor is the heart of the DECS-200 and performs control, computation, self-testing, and
communication functions. The main processor (labeled microprocessor in Figure 3-1) generally performs
low speed tasks such as protective functions, frequency measurements, communication, watchdog alarm,
and other system functions. The microprocessor generates the PWM (pulse width modulated) control
signal needed for chopper control and monitors its status.
Digital Signal Processor (DSP)

The DSP supports measurement, control (output and converters), metering functions, and filtering. It
controls both the ADC and the digital-to-analog converter (DAC). All eight analog input signals from the
ADC are filtered by the finite impulse response (FIR) filters. AC signals are also filtered by the infinite
impulse response (IIR) filters and dc signals (field voltage and current) are filtered by averaging filters.
The DSP provides the microprocessor with the signal defining the chopper duty cycle/PWM control.
Operational Settings
Operational settings that affect the system are stored in nonvolatile memory. These settings may be
changed through BESTCOMS or the front panel interface. Password access is required to change
settings. Settings may be viewed without obtaining password access.
Watchdog Timer
If the microprocessor fails for any reason, output pulses to the watchdog timer stop and, after a brief
interval, the watchdog timer takes the system off line and closes the watchdog output contacts.
Real-Time Clock
The real-time clock is used by the event and data logging functions to timestamp events. Time can be
displayed in either 12- or 24-hour formats and can be selected to allow for daylight saving time. Two date
formats are available: d-m-y or m/d/y. All formats may be selected either through the front panel HMI or
BESTCOMS. Any cycling of power to the DECS-200 will reset the clock.
Pulse-Width Modulated (PWM) Output

The pulse-width modulated signal provided by the microprocessor controls the field voltage by modulating
the duty cycle of the chopper (power module).
Relay Output Circuits

There are five output relays. These relay outputs are controlled by the microprocessor and sustain seven
amperes at 240 Vac. Each output relay has 300-volt surge protectors across the contacts to protect
against arcing from inductive loads. Relay outputs one through three are fully programmable via all
interfaces. Two output relays (one form A and one form B) have predetermined functions. All output
relays are described in the following paragraphs.
Programmable Outputs
Output relays RLY1, RLY2, and RLY3 may be programmed using the front panel HMI, BESTCOMS
software (using the front RS-232 port (COM0)) or through the Modbus™ protocol (using the left RS-485
port (COM2)).
The three output relays labeled RLY1, RLY2, and RLY3 have the following programmable features.

• Selection of contact functionality (normally open or normally closed)
• Selection of output type (momentary, maintained for as long as the condition is present, or latched
until reset)
• Program duration of momentary annunciation (from 0.1 to 5 seconds in 50 millisecond steps)
• Selection of conditions to be annunciated, including:
o Field overvoltage
o Field overcurrent
o Generator undervoltage
o Generator overvoltage
o Volts per hertz or underfrequency limit
o Overexcitation limit
o Underexcitation limit
o FCR mode
o Loss of sensing (LOS) voltage
o Active setpoint at low limit
o Active setpoint at high limit
o Generator frequency below 10 hertz
o Open exciter diode
o Shorted exciter diode
o Loss of field
o Stator current limit
NOTE
If the contacts of a programmable output relay are configured as normally closed,
the normally closed contact state is maintained only while the DECS-200 has
control power applied. When power is removed from the DECS-200, these
contacts will open.
Watchdog Output
The Watchdog (WTCHD) output indicates a software execution problem within the DECS-200. The
contact closes under the following circumstances:
• No control power is applied to the DECS-200
• After application of power for approximately eight seconds
• Software in the DECS-200 stops executing normally
On/Off Output
The On/Off (ON/OF) output indicates the enabled/disabled status of the DECS-200. The On/Off output
closes when the DECS-200 is enabled and opens when the DECS-200 is disabled.
Communication
The RS-232 port (Com 0), located on the front panel, is dedicated for communication with a PC running
BESTCOMS software.
The RS-232 port (Com 1), located on the right side of the unit, is dedicated for communication with a
second DECS-200. This port provides tracking between units in a redundant DECS-200 system.
The RS-485 Port (Com 2), located on the left side of the unit, is dedicated for communication in remote
terminal unit (RTU) mode using the Modbus protocol.
NOTE
Changing the baud rate or data format while that interface is in use will result in a
loss of data and probably a complete loss of communication.
All three ports have a default baud rate of 9600. However, the baud rate for each port can be set
independently. Available baud rates are 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200. Ports Com ) and Com 1 use
a data format of 8N1 which stands for 8 data bits, no parity, and 1 stop bit. Port Com 2 has a default data

format of 8N2 but the parity and number of stop bits are programmable. The choices for parity include
none, Odd, and Even. The number of stop bits may be either 1 or 2.
Memory Circuits
There are three types of memory circuits: flash memory, random access memory (RAM) and electrically
erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM). Flash memory is nonvolatile and stores the
operating software. RAM is volatile and serves as temporary storage for data. EEPROM is nonvolatile
and stores the settings and configuration.
Protection Functions
Eight protection functions are available in the DECS-200:
• Field overvoltage • Loss of sensing
• Field overcurrent • Generator frequency below 10 hertz
• Generator undervoltage • Loss of field
• Generator overvoltage • Exciter diode monitor
Each protection function can be indicated locally on the front panel display, remotely through
communication port Com 0 or Com 2, and any of the three programmable output relays.
Field Overvoltage
When the field voltage increases above the Exciter Field Overvoltage Level setting for the duration of the
Field Overvoltage Delay setting, a field overvoltage condition is annunciated. A field overvoltage condition
is annunciated on the front panel metering screen and may be assigned to a programmable output relay
for external annunciation. The Exciter Field Overvoltage Level setting is adjustable from 1 to 325 Vdc in 1
Vdc increments. The Exciter Field Overvoltage Delay setting is adjustable from 0.2 to 30.0 seconds in 0.1
second increments. If the field overvoltage timer is timing down and the field voltage drops below the
Exciter Field Overvoltage Level setting, the field overvoltage timer is reset. The field overvoltage function
may be disabled without changing the level or time delay settings.
Field Overcurrent
When the field current increases above the Exciter Field Overcurrent Level setting for the duration of the
Exciter Field Overcurrent Delay setting, a field overcurrent condition is annunciated. Field overcurrent is
annunciated on the front panel metering screen and may be assigned to a programmable output relay for
external annunciation. The Exciter Field Overcurrent Level and Exciter Field Overcurrent Delay settings
are related by an inverse function. This means that the higher the field current goes above the threshold,
the shorter the time to an annunciation. The Exciter Field Overcurrent Delay setting is a linear multiplier
for the time to an annunciation. The Exciter Field Overcurrent Level setting is adjustable from 0.1 to 20
Adc in 0.1 Adc increments. The Exciter Field Overcurrent Delay setting is adjustable from 0.1 to 20.0 in
increments of 0.1. The field overcurrent protection function may be disabled without changing the level or
time delay settings. Figure 3-2 shows a set of typical field overcurrent timing curves. Notice that field
current levels below 103% of the field overcurrent setpoint value are unpredictable and may not cause an
annunciation. Also, field current levels greater than 250% (field current multiple of 2.5 in Figure 3-2) of the
setpoint value cause an annunciation in the same amount of time as the 250% level.
Figure 3-2. Field Overcurrent Timing Curves

Generator Overvoltage
When the generator voltage increases above the Generator Overvoltage Level setting for the duration of
the Generator Overvoltage Delay setting, a generator overvoltage condition is annunciated. A generator
overvoltage condition is annunciated on the front panel metering screen and may be assigned to a
programmable output relay for external annunciation. The Generator Overvoltage Level setting is
adjustable from 0 to 30,000 Vac in 1 Vac increments. The Generator Overvoltage Delay setting is
adjustable from 0.1 to 60.0 seconds in 0.1 second increments. If the generator voltage drops below the
Generator Overvoltage Level setting while the delay timer is timing down, the delay timer is reset.
Generator overvoltage protection may be disabled without changing the level or time delay settings.
Generator Undervoltage
When the generator voltage decreases above the Generator Undervoltage Level setting for the duration
of the Generator Undervoltage Delay setting, a generator undervoltage condition is annunciated. A
generator undervoltage condition is annunciated on the front panel metering screen and may be assigned
to a programmable output relay for external annunciation. The Generator Undervoltage Level setting is
adjustable from 0 to 30,000 Vac in 1 Vac increments. The Generator Undervoltage Delay setting is
adjustable from 0.5 to 60.0 seconds in 0.1 second increments. If the generator voltage increases above
the Generator Undervoltage Level setting while the delay timer is timing down, the delay timer is reset.
Generator undervoltage protection may be disabled without changing the level or time delay settings.
Loss of Sensing
A loss of sensing voltage is annunciated when either of two conditions exist:
• All three phases of generator voltage decrease below the Loss of Sensing Voltage–Balanced Level
setting for the duration of the Loss of Sensing Voltage Time Delay setting.
• Any individual phase of generator sensing voltage differs by more than the Loss of Sensing Voltage–
Unbalanced Level setting for the duration of the Loss of Sensing Voltage Time Delay setting.
A loss of sensing voltage is annunciated on the front panel Metering screen and may be assigned to a
programmable output relay for external annunciation. The Balanced and Unbalanced Level settings are
adjustable from 0 to 100% in 0.1% increments. The Time Delay setting is adjustable from 0 to 30.0
seconds in 0.1 second increments.
Below 10 Hertz
When the generator frequency decreases below 10 hertz, the condition is annunciated on the front panel
display as SYSTEM BELOW 10 Hz. The programmable output relays may be configured to initiate
additional annunciations or actions. A system below 10-hertz annunciation is reset automatically when the
generator frequency increases above 10 hertz.
Loss of Field
When the reactive power absorbed by the generator exceeds the Loss of Field Level setting for the
duration of the Loss of Field Delay setting, a loss of field condition is annunciated. A loss of field is
annunciated on the front panel metering screen and may be assigned to a programmable output relay for
external annunciation. The Loss of Field Level setting is adjustable from 0 to 3,000 Mvar in 1 kvar
increments. The Loss of Field Delay setting is adjustable from 0 to 9.9 seconds in 0.1 second increments.
If the absorbed reactive power decreases below the Loss of Field Level setting while the delay timer is
timing down, the delay timer is reset. Loss of field protection can be disabled without changing the level or
time delay settings.
Exciter Diode Monitor (EDM)
The DECS-200 monitors the output of the brushless exciter power semiconductors through the exciter
field current and protects against both open and shorted diodes in the exciter bridge. When implementing
the EDM, it is imperative that the user know and specify the number of poles for the exciter armature and
the number of poles for the generator rotor.
NOTE
If the number of poles for the exciter armature and the generator rotor is
unknown, the EDM function will still operate. However, only a shorted diode can
be detected. If the number of poles is not known, it is best to select all
parameters for the exciter open diode to off. In this situation, the generator and
exciter pole parameters must be set at zero to prevent false tripping.

The EDM function estimates the fundamental harmonic of the exciter field current using discrete Fourier
transforms (DFTs). The harmonic, expressed as a percentage of the field current, is then compared to the
trip levels for open diode detection (OD ripple) and shorted diode detection (SD ripple). If the percentage
of field current exceeds the OD Level or SD Level setting, then the appropriate delay will begin. After the
programmable delay for the OD or SD event expires, and if the percentage of field current still exceeds
the OD Level or SD Level setting, the event is annunciated. An exciter diode failure is annunciated on the
front panel HMI and can be assigned to a programmable output relay for external annunciation. EDM
inhibit parameters prevent nuisance annunciations due to low excitation current or out-of-range generator
frequency. The following parameters are required for complete operation of the EDM function.
• Pole ratio • Open exciter diode delay
• Trip level of EDM OD ripple • Shorted exciter diode delay
• Trip level of EDM SD ripple • EDM inhibit level
Exciter Diode Monitor Settings
It is especially difficult to detect open diode conditions when the number of generator and exciter poles is
unknown. For this reason, the ratio of the number of poles for the brushless exciter armature to the
generator rotor is entered to ensure proper operation for both open and shorted diode protection.
Setting the Trip Level
To set the trip level of the EDM OD (open diode) ripple and EDM SD (shorted diode) ripple parameters,
the maximum ripple current on the field must be known. This can be accomplished by running the
generator unloaded and at rated speed. Vary the generator voltage from minimum to maximum voltage
while monitoring the EDM OD and EDM SD % ripple on the DECS-200 HMI metering screen. Record the
highest value for each. See Section 2, Human-Machine Interface for more details on displaying metering
quantities.
With Number of Generator Poles Known
Multiply the highest EDM OD value, obtained under Setting the Trip Level , by 3. The result is the Exciter
Open Diode % Ripple Level (EDM OD % Ripple). The multiplier can be varied between 2 and 5 to
increase or decrease the trip margin. However, reducing the multiplier could result in nuisance EDM OD
indications. A time delay is also adjustable from 10 to 60 seconds.
Multiply the highest EDM SD value, obtained under Setting the Trip Level by 50. The result is the Exciter
Shorted Diode % Ripple Level (EDM SD % Ripple). The multiplier can be varied between 40 and 70 to
increase or decrease the trip margin. However, reducing the multiplier could result in nuisance EDM SD
indications. A time delay is also adjustable from 5 to 30 seconds.
The DECS-200 has fixed EDM inhibit levels to prevent nuisance EDM indications while the generator
sensing voltage is less than 45 Hz, greater than 70 Hz, or when the field current is less than 1 Adc.
Although the user can adjust the field current inhibit level from 0 to 100%, the fixed EDM inhibit levels
take priority. Pole ratios must be in the range of 1 to 10 with 0 used if the ratio is unknown.
With Number of Generator Poles Unknown
The DECS-200 can detect shorted diode conditions when the number of generator poles is not known. To
provide this protection, disable EDM OD protection and set the pole ratio to zero. Enable EDM SD
protection. Multiply the maximum EDM SD % ripple value, obtained under Setting the Trip Level, by 30.
The multiplier can be varied between 20 and 40 to increase or decrease the trip margin. Reducing the
multiplier could result in nuisance EDM SD indication.
Test the EDM Settings
Start the generator from a dead stop condition and increase its speed and voltage to the rated value.
Load the machine to its rating and confirm no EDM alarm indications occur. All of the EDM setup
guidelines presented here assume the exciter diodes were not opened or shorted at the time of setup and
testing.
SOFT START
DECS-200 soft start capability provides for an orderly buildup of terminal voltage from residual to the
voltage setpoint in the desired time with minimal overshoot. When the system is in startup, the voltage
reference is adjusted by the amount calculated based on two parameters. These parameters are level
and time. Soft start bias level is adjustable from 0 to 90 percent of the active mode setpoint in increments
of 1 percent with a default setting of 5 percent. Soft start time is adjustable from 1 to 7,200 seconds in
increments of 1 second with a default setting of 5 seconds. Figure 3-3 illustrates a plot of the voltage
reference showing soft-start bias at 30%, soft-start time at 8 seconds and a voltage setpoint of 100%. Soft
start level is the same parameter as soft-start bias when accessed on the Startup tab of the BESTCOMS
System Settings screen.
Figure 3-3. Soft Start Voltage Reference
LIMITER FUNCTIONS
DECS-200 limiter functions include an underfrequency limiter, V/Hz ratio limiter, overexcitation limiter,
underexcitation limiter, and a stator current limiter.
Underfrequency Limiter
When the generator frequency drops below the Corner Frequency
corner frequency for the underfrequency slope
(Figure 3-4), the voltage setpoint is automatically 100 %
adjusted by the DECS-200 so that generator P0004-34.vsd
voltage will follow the underfrequency slope and 12-03-01
an underfrequency annunciation occurs. The

GENERATOR VOLTS
underfrequency slope can be tuned to have zero

to three times the volts/hertz slope in 0.01
increments. The corner frequency can be set
across a range of 45 to 65 hertz in 0.1 hertz
increments. This adjustability enables the DECS-
200 to precisely match the operating
characteristics of the prime mover and the loads
being applied to the generator. The generator
underfrequency function may be effectively
disabled by setting the slope to zero. However, if
0%
the system frequency is below the corner
10 Hz Nominal
frequency, underfrequency will be annunciated
even if the slope is set at zero. GENERATOR FREQUENCY
Figure 3-4. Typical Underfrequency
Compensation Curve

When the underfrequency function is active, an
underfrequency annunciation occurs. Underfre-
110 %
quency is annunciated on the front panel Metering
screen and may be assigned to a programmable
output relay for external annunciation. 100 %
P0004-33.vsd
12-03-01
GENERATOR VOLTS
Volts per Hertz Ratio Limiter
The volts per hertz ratio limiter prevents the
tio
regulation setpoint from exceeding the volts per
Ra
hertz ratio that is prescribed by the slope setting
tz
er
of the DECS-200 as stated in the previous
/H
lts
paragraphs. This feature is also useful for other
Vo
potentially damaging system conditions such as a
change in system voltage and reduced frequency
situations that could exceed the systems volts per
hertz ratio limit. Figure 3-5 illustrates a typical 1.10 0%
PU volts per hertz limiter curve. 0 Hz Nominal
GENERATOR FREQUENCY
Overexcitation Limiter (OEL)
Figure 3-5. Typical 1.10 PU V/Hz Limiter Curve
Overexcitation limiting operates in all modes
except FCR mode. The DECS-200 senses the
FIELD CURRENT
field current output and limits the field current to
prevent field overheating. In FCR mode, the
DECS-200 announces that all conditions for OEL High
are fulfilled. The DECS-200 provides two types of Current
High Low Level
overexcitation limiting: Summing Point and CONTINUOUS 0-30Adc
Current Current
Takeover. Time Level
0-10sec 0-15Adc
Summing Point OEL
D2851-18.vsd
Two OEL current levels are defined for off-line TIME IN SECONDS 04-03-01
operation: high and low (see Figure 3-6). The

generator can operate continuously at the low Figure 3-6. Off-Line Overexcitation Limiting
OEL current level and for a programmed time at
the high OEL current level.
Three OEL current levels are defined for on-line operation: high, medium, and low (see Figure 3-7). The
high and medium current levels can be maintained only for a user-defined amount of time. The generator
can operate continuously at the low OEL current level.
FIELD CURRENT
High
Current
Medium Level
High Current 0.0 - 30Adc
Medium Level
Current Current Low
Time CONTINUOUS 0.0 - 20 Adc
Time Current
0-10sec 0-120sec Level
0.0 - 15 Adc
D2851-17.vsd
TIME IN SECONDS 04-03-01
Figure 3-7. On-Line Overexcitation Limiting

The 52L/M (unit/parallel) contact input status determines which limiter is active (on-line or off-line). When
the 52L/M input is closed, the off-line limiter is active. When the 52L/M input is open, the on-Line limiter
setting is active.

In addition to the three current levels, the DECS-200 also uses embedded timers to prevent excessive
heating of the exciter field that may be a result of repetitive overexcitation conditions. A duration timer
monitors the accumulated time actually spent in an overexcitation condition and a reset timer is used to
count backward from either the High OEL Current Time setting or the sum of the high plus the Medium
OEL Current Time setting depending on the duration timer value. The reset timer countdown begins when
the excitation current falls below the low OEL current limit level. In the event a subsequent overexcitation
condition occurs before the reset timer reaches zero, the OEL limiter will resume from its state prior to the
excitation current falling below the low OEL current limit level. A full OEL cycle cannot occur until the reset
timer has counted down to zero after a previous OEL condition.
When the system is limiting overexcitation, an OEL condition is annunciated on the front panel Metering
screen and may be assigned to a programmable output relay for external annunciation.
Takeover OEL
When takeover-style overexcitation limiting is used, the level of field current at which limiting occurs is
determined by an inverse time characteristic. This inverse time characteristic is similar to that shown in
Figure 3-8. Two current levels and a time dial setting are defined for the takeover OEL. Separate curves
may be selected for on-line operation. If the system enters an overexcitation condition, the field current is
limited and forced to follow the selected curve.
Figure 3-8. Inverse Time Characteristic for Takeover-Style OEL
On-Line/Off-Line OEL Options

Selection of on-line or off-line OEL levels/curves is determined by an OEL option selection. The following
options are available.
Option 1 (default). When option 1 is selected, on-line overexcitation limiter settings are active when either
the 52J/K contact input or 52L/M contact input are open. Off-line OEL settings are active when both the
52J/K contact input and 52L/M contact input are closed. The 52J/K contact input can be used to switch
between on-line OEL and off-line OEL when the 52L/M contact input is jumpered. If var/power factor
correction is disabled, Droop mode will be active when the 52L/M contact input is opened and AVR mode
will be active when the 52J/K contact input is closed.
Option 2. Option 2 allows the 52J/K contact input to define when the off-line and on-line limiters are
active. When option 2 is selected, on-line overexcitation limiter settings are active when the 52J/K contact
input is open. Off-line OEL settings are active when the 52J/K contact input is closed. Option 2 is
intended for cross-compound generator applications where both machines are paralleled at low rpm.
Therefore, Droop mode needs to be active (52L/M contact input opened) as the speed of the machines
are increased. However, off-line OEL settings for both machines need to be active.
Option 3. When option 3 is selected, on-line overexcitation limiting settings are active at all times. Option
3 allows the DECS-200 to operate in AVR mode (stand-alone application) without restriction from the off-
line OEL settings. In this case, the on-line OEL settings are active to limit excessive excitation current.
This option also eliminates the need for the DECS-200 to operate in Droop mode when applied in a single
unit application. Therefore, voltage should not droop as reactive load increases.

Underexcitation Limiter
Underexcitation limiting (UEL) operates in all modes except FCR mode. UEL senses the leading var
output of the generator and limits any further decrease in excitation to prevent loss of synchronization and
end-iron heating during parallel operation. In FCR mode, the DECS-200 announces that all conditions for
UEL are fulfilled. The reactive power level is selected at zero active power and the UEL limiting curve is
calculated based on this value and the generator voltage and current rating. Typical leading kvar curves
and a user-selected, five-point curve are shown in 3-9.
Real Power Generate (W) x 1000

0.0 7.5k 15.0k 22.5k 30.0k 37.5k 45.0k
0.0
7.5k
Reactive Power Absorb (var) x 1000
15.0k
22.5k
30.0k
37.5k
D2851-25
06-28-05
45.0k
Figure 3-9. Custom Five-Point Curve
When the system is limiting underexcitation, a UEL annunciation occurs. Underexcitation is annunciated
on the front panel Metering screen and may be assigned to a programmable output relay for external
annunciation.
Stator Current Limiting

The stator current limiter (SCL) senses the level of stator current and limits it to prevent stator
overheating. The SCL operates in all modes except FCR. In FCR mode, the DECS-200 only announces
that a stator overcurrent condition exists; it does not provide current limiting.
Two SCL current levels are provided: high and low (see Figure 3-10). The generator can operate
continuously at the low SCL level and for a programmed time at the high SCL level.
The SCL will not respond until the SCL Initial Delay setting has expired.
STATOR CURRENT
High
Current
Initial High Low Level
Continuous Current 0-66,000 Aac
Delay Current
Time Time Level
0-10 s 0-60 s 0-66,000 Aac
TIME IN SECONDS P0059-45
Figure 3-10. Stator Current Limiting

DROOP AND LINE-DROP COMPENSATION
Droop and line-drop compensation are accomplished through the load compensation equation:
VC1 = VT + (RC + jX C )I T
Where: VC1 is the compensated output voltage

VT is the measured terminal-voltage vector
(Rc + jX C ) are the compensation impedance values
I T is the measured terminal-current vector
When the droop percentage is a positive quantity, reactive droop compensation is performed. Droop is
the product of the output voltage and the kvar that the generator is exporting. This is equivalent to the
above compensation equation with RC equal to zero and neglecting the real part of the vector, I T .
When the droop percentage is a negative quantity, line-drop compensation (LDC) is preformed. LDC
takes into account the real part of the vector, I T . Since LDC is typically used to compensate for reactive
impedance losses in transformers, RC is assumed zero. For LDC, the above equation becomes:
VC1 = VT + ( jX C )I T
DATA LOGGING AND REPORTING

DECS-200 data logging and reporting features include a sequence of events recorder that records up to
eight oscillography records.
Sequence of Events Reporting

A sequence of events recorder monitors the internal and external status of the DECS-200. Events are
scanned at 50 millisecond intervals with 127 events stored per record. All changes of state that occur
during each scan are time tagged. Sequence of events reports are available through BESTCOMS. All
monitored events are listed below.
System Contact Input State Changes
• Alarm reset • Start
• AVR mode enable • Stop
• FCR mode enable • Unit/Parallel (52 L/M)∗
• Pre-Position • VAR/PF enable (52 J/K)∗
• Secondary enable
∗ The 52 contacts are reported as disabled when the input is jumpered to common and reported as
enabled when the input is not jumpered. All other contacts are reported as enabled when the inputs
are jumpered to common.
System Output State Changes
• On/Off relay output • Relay 3 output
• Relay 1 output • Watchdog relay output
• Relay 2 output
System Alarm State Changes
• Exciter diode open • Loss of field
• Exciter diode shorted • Lost voltage sensing
• Field overcurrent • Overexcitation limit
• Field overvoltage • Stator current limit
• Generator overvoltage • Underexcitation limit
• Generator undervoltage • Underfrequency
Changes in State of System Status
• Auto tracking mode • Soft-start mode
• Control mode • Stop/Start
• Limiter mode • Underfrequency mode
• Load compensation mode • Voltage matching mode
• Operating mode
Oscillography
The data recording function of the DECS-200 can record up to eight oscillography records. Oscillography
records recorded by the DECS-200 use the IEEE Standard Common Format for Transient Data
Exchange (COMTRADE). Each record is time and date stamped. After eight records have been recorded,
the DECS-200 begins recording the next record over the oldest record. Because all oscillography records
are stored in volatile memory, the records will be lost if power is lost.
A record consists of six user selectable variables with 600 data points recorded for each variable. The
sample rate or time between data point samples is user selectable from 4 milliseconds to 10 seconds.
Therefore, the recording duration for a variable can range from 2.4 seconds to 6,000 seconds.
Data points may be selected for pre-trigger operation in order to capture events prior to a fault. Up to 599
pre-trigger data points may be selected. Data points that are not designated for pre-trigger recording are
assigned to the post-trigger portion of the fault record. This feature combined with the adjustable sample
rate allows for flexible data sampling around the fault.
The DECS-200 monitors six user-selectable internal variables. The following internal variables may be
selected:
Internal Variables
• Auto tracking output (for future use)
• Auxiliary input voltage∗
• AVR Error Signal
• Bus frequency
• Bus voltage
• Control output
• Crosscurrent input∗
• Exciter field current Ifd
• Exciter field voltage Vfd
• Generator average L-L voltage
• Generator frequency
• Generator Ib in amps
• Generator kVA
• Generator kvar
• Generator kW
• Generator power factor
• Generator Vab
• Generator Vbc
• Generator Vca
• Generator V-I phase angle∗
• Internal PID Integrator State
∗ Typically, these are used when commissioning or troubleshooting.
Data recording may be triggered manually using BESTCOMS, logic triggers, or level triggers.
Logic triggers allow data recording to occur because of an internal or external status change of the
DECS-200.
Level triggering allows the user to select triggering of a data record based on the value of one of the
internal variables. The value can be a minimum or maximum value and can be specified to trigger a
record when the monitored variable crosses a minimum threshold from above or a maximum threshold
from below. A minimum and maximum threshold may also be selected for the monitored variable causing
the monitored value to trigger a record when it goes above its maximum or falls below its minimum.
Figure 3-11 shows an example of a data record as it would look when viewed with BESTwave software.
The example illustrates a voltage step change while monitoring average voltage, field voltage, and field
current over a time of 2.75 seconds.
For more information about selecting triggering types or levels, selecting internal variables for monitoring
or viewing oscillography records, see Section 5, BESTCOMS Software.

Figure 3-11. Data Record Example

SECTION 4 ● INSTALLATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 4 ● INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................. 4-1
GENERAL .............................................................................................................................................. 4-1
PRODUCT REGISTRATION ................................................................................................................. 4-1
MOUNTING............................................................................................................................................ 4-1
CONNECTIONS..................................................................................................................................... 4-6
Right-Hand Panel Connections .......................................................................................................... 4-6
Front Panel Connections .................................................................................................................... 4-7
Left-Hand Panel Connections ............................................................................................................ 4-7
Typical Connections ......................................................................................................................... 4-13
Figures
Figure 4-1. Overall Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 4-2
Figure 4-2. Panel Drilling Diagram, Projection Mount ............................................................................... 4-3
Figure 4-3. Escutcheon Plate Dimensions ................................................................................................ 4-4
Figure 4-4. Panel Cutting and Drilling Dimensions, Panel Mount ............................................................. 4-5
Figure 4-5. DECS-200 to DECS-200 Communication Connections ......................................................... 4-6
Figure 4-6. DECS-200 Left-Side Terminals ............................................................................................... 4-7
Figure 4-7. Typical Cross-Current Compensation Connections .............................................................. 4-10
Figure 4-8. RS-485 DB-37 to DECS-200 ................................................................................................ 4-12
Figure 4-9. Typical Connections .............................................................................................................. 4-13
Tables
Table 4-1. Com 1 Pin Functions ................................................................................................................ 4-6
Table 4-2. Left-Hand Panel Terminal Specifications ................................................................................. 4-8
Table 4-3. Control Power Terminals .......................................................................................................... 4-8
Table 4-4. Operating Power Terminals ..................................................................................................... 4-8
Table 4-5. Generator and Bus Voltage Sensing Terminals ....................................................................... 4-9
Table 4-6. Generator Current Sensing Terminals ..................................................................................... 4-9
Table 4-7. Accessory Input Terminals ..................................................................................................... 4-10
Table 4-8. Contact Input Terminals ......................................................................................................... 4-10
Table 4-9. Output Contact Terminals ...................................................................................................... 4-11
Table 4-10. Field Output Terminals ......................................................................................................... 4-11
Table 4-11. Com 2 Terminals .................................................................................................................. 4-11
9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 Installation i

ii DECS-200 Installation 9360100990 Rev H

SECTION 4 ● INSTALLATION
GENERAL
DECS-200 Digital Excitation Control Systems are delivered in sturdy cartons to prevent shipping damage.
Upon receipt of a system, check the part number against the requisition and packaging list for agreement.
Inspect for damage, and if there is evidence of such immediately file a claim with the carrier and notify the
Basler Electric Regional Sales Office, your sales representative or a sales representative at Basler
Electric, Highland, Illinois.
If the unit is not installed immediately, store it in the original shipping package in a moisture- and dust-free
environment.
PRODUCT REGISTRATION
Registering with Basler Electric enables you to receive important information updates on your product
plus new product announcements. Register your product by directing your web browser to
http://www.basler.com/Register.
MOUNTING
The orientation of the DECS-200 heat sink requires vertical mounting for maximum cooling. Any other
mounting angle will reduce the DECS-200’s heat dissipation capability and possibly lead to premature
failure of critical components. The DECS-200 may be mounted anywhere that the ambient temperature
does not exceed the environmental conditions listed in Section 1, General Information, Specifications.
Overall DECS-200 dimensions are shown in Figure 4-1.
Two DECS-200 mounting configurations are possible: projection mounting and panel mounting. The
panel drilling diagram for projection mounting of a DECS-200 is shown in Figure 4-2. Panel mounting of a
DECS-200 is possible with the optional escutcheon plate (part number 9360107100). Escutcheon plate
dimensions are shown in Figure 4-3. The panel cutting and drilling diagram for the escutcheon plate is
illustrated in Figure 4-4.
CAUTION
The hardware provided with the escutcheon plate should be used to attach the
plate to the DECS-200. If other screws are used, ensure that the screw length is
no greater than ¼” (0.25”) and no less than 7/32” (0.219”).
9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 Installation 4-1

Figure 4-1. Overall Dimensions
4-2 DECS-200 Installation 9360100990 Rev H

Figure 4-2. Panel Drilling Diagram, Projection Mount

Figure 4-3. Escutcheon Plate Dimensions

Figure 4-4. Panel Cutting and Drilling Dimensions, Panel Mount

CONNECTIONS
DECS-200 connections are dependent on the application and excitation scheme used. Observe the
following guidelines when making DECS-200 connections:
• A given application may not require the use of all DECS-200 inputs and outputs.
• Incorrect wiring may result in damage to the unit.
• Applying incorrect control power, operating power, or sensing values may damage the unit. Compare
the unit style number with the style chart (Figure 1-2) before applying control power.
NOTE
The DECS-200 must be hard-wired to earth ground with no smaller than 12 AWG
copper wire attached to ground terminal C1. When the DECS-200 is configured
in a system with other devices, a separate lead should be used to connect each
device to the ground bus.
Terminations for DECS-200 connections are located on the right-hand panel, the front panel, and the left-
hand panel.
Right-Hand Panel Connections

Right-hand panel terminations consist of a nine-pin, female, D-type connector (Com 1) that is used for
communication with a second DECS-200 unit when operating in a redundant system. A communication
cable, part number 9310300032, is available for interconnecting two DECS-200 units. Table 4-1 lists the
Com 1 pin numbers and functions. Figure 4-5 illustrates the communication connections between DECS-
200 units.
Table 4-1. Com 1 Pin Functions
Pin Name Description Function
1 Not used N/A
2 XMIT Transmit Sends serial data from DECS-200
3 RCV Receive Receives serial data from DECS-200
4 DTR Data Terminal Ready Receives signal indicating that the
sending unit is operational
5 GND Ground Provides the signal ground
6 DSR Data Set Ready Sends a signal indicating that the
DECS-200 is operational
7, 8, 9 Not used N/A
TO DECS-200 TO DECS-200
DB-9 FEMALE DB-9 FEMALE
DB-9 MALE DB-9 MALE
1 NO CONNECTION 1
XMIT 2 2 XMIT
RCV 3 3 RCV
DTR 4 4 DTR
GND 5 5 GND
DSR 6 6 DSR
7 NO CONNECTION 7
8 8 P0007-07
NO CONNECTION 03-13-01
9 NO CONNECTION 9
Figure 4-5. DECS-200 to DECS-200 Communication Connections

Front Panel Connections
Front panel terminations consist of a nine-pin, female, D-type connector (Com 0) that is intended for
short-term, RS-232 serial communication with a PC operating BESTCOMS software. Refer to Section 5,
BESTCOMS Software for information about using BESTCOMS to communicate with the DECS-200.
Left-Hand Panel Connections

Left-hand panel terminations consist of screw compression terminals. These terminals are illustrated in
Figure 4-6. Table 4-2 lists the wire size capacity and maximum screw torque for each terminal on the left-
hand panel.
Figure 4-6. DECS-200 Left-Side Terminals

Table 4-2. Left-Hand Panel Terminal Specifications
Terminals Wire Size Capacity Maximum Screw Torque
A1 – A45 14 AWG 0.4 N•m (3.5 in-lb)
B7 – B10
B1 – B6 10 AWG 0.5 N•m (4.4 in-lb)
C1 – C6
In the following paragraphs, DECS-200 terminal functions are described and the terminal assignments for
each function are listed.
Control Power
DECS-200 units have two sets of power terminals. One set receives dc control power and the other set
receives ac control power.
A DECS-200 with a style number of XL accepts nominal dc control power of 24 or 48 Vdc. The ac control
power input of a style XL DECS-200 is not used.
A DECS-200 with a style number of XC accepts nominal dc control power of 125 Vdc and nominal ac
control power of 120 Vac. One source (either dc or ac) is sufficient for operation, but two sources can be
used to provide redundancy. The dc input has internal protection against reversed polarity connections.
When dual control power sources are used, an isolation transformer (part number BE31449001) is
required for the ac input. Control power terminal functions are listed in Table 4-3.
Table 4-3. Control Power Terminals
Terminal Description
B7 (BAT+) Positive side of dc input
B8 (BAT–) Negative side of dc input
B9 (L) Line side of ac input
B10 (N) Return or neutral side of ac input
Operating Power
Operating power for the pulse-width modulated (PWM) excitation output is usually derived from the
generator output. This input can also be developed by any suitable source that delivers voltage within the
limits specified in Section 1, General Information, Specifications.
Operating power may be either three-phase or single-phase. For single phase connections, any terminal
combination can be used.
The operating power applied must be of sufficient magnitude to support the required level of excitation
voltage. For 32 Vdc field voltage, the operating power voltage should be in the range of 56 to 70 Vac (60
Vac nominal). For 63 Vdc field voltage, the operating power voltage should be in the range of 100 to 139
Vac (120 Vac nominal). For 125 Vdc field voltage, the operating power voltage should be in the range of
190 to 277 Vac (240 Vac nominal). The operating power frequency can be within the range of 50 to 500
hertz.
Table 4-4. Operating Power Terminals
C2 (A) A-phase operating power input
C3 (B) B-phase operating power input
C4 (C) C-phase operating power input
Chassis Ground
Terminal C1 (GND) serves as the DECS-200 chassis ground connection.
Generator and Bus Voltage Sensing
The DECS-200 accommodates either three-phase or single-phase generator sensing voltage with four
automatically selected ranges: 120, 240, 400, or 600 Vac for 60 hertz systems or 100, 200, 400, or 500
Vac for 50 hertz systems. When single-phase generator sensing voltage is used, use terminals A1 and A3
for the sensing connections.

A single bus sensing voltage input connects from phase A to phase C. The bus voltage sensing input has
four automatically selected ranges which are identical to the generator sensing voltage ranges.
Generator and bus voltage sensing terminals are listed in Table 4-5.
Table 4-5. Generator and Bus Voltage Sensing Terminals
A1 (E1) A-phase generator sensing voltage input
A2 (E2) B-phase generator sensing voltage input
A3 (E3) C-phase generator sensing voltage input
A4 (B1) A-phase bus sensing voltage input
A5 (B3) C-phase bus sensing voltage input
Generator Current Sensing

A single current sensing input connects to a CT monitoring generator current on phase B. Two terminals
are provided to accommodate 1 Aac or 5 Aac CTs.
An input is also provided for sensing the current in a cross-current (reactive differential) compensation
loop. Two or more paralleled generators can operate in cross-current compensation mode. Figure 4-7
illustrates a typical connection diagram for two paralleled generators using the 5 Aac sensing range on
the DECS-200 cross-current input. The 1 Ω resistor is a typical value that can be used to set the burden.
(Ensure that the resistor power rating is adequate for the installation.) Like the generator current sensing
input, the cross-current input has two terminals to accommodate 1 Aac or 5 Aac CTs.
Generator current sensing terminals are listed in Table 4-6.
Table 4-6. Generator Current Sensing Terminals
B1 B-phase generator current input for 1 Aac sensing
(CTB 1 AMP)
B2 B-phase generator current input for 1 Aac sensing
(CTB 5 AMP)
B3 B-phase generator sensing current common terminal
(CTB COM)
B4 Cross-current input for 1 Aac sensing
(CT CC 1A)
B5 Cross-current input for 5 Aac sensing
(CT CC 5A)
B6 Cross-current common terminal
(CT CC COM)

CT
Phase B
GEN 1
1.0
CT CC 5A
CT CC COM
DECS-200
CCC LOAD
DECS-200 ENABLE
1.0 CONTACT
CT CC 5A
CT CC COM
P0005-02
05-28-04
GEN 2 Phase B
CT
Figure 4-7. Typical Cross-Current Compensation Connections
Accessory Input
DECS-200 units accept analog accessory signals from other controllers (e.g., power system stabilizers)
for remote control of the setpoint. Two types of accessory inputs are provided: voltage and current. Only
one accessory input (voltage or current) may be used at one time. The voltage input accepts a signal over
the range of –10 Vdc to +10 Vdc. The current input accepts a signal over the range of 4 mAdc to 20
mAdc. Shielded cable is recommended for the accessory signal. Terminal A8 is provided for the shield
connection. Accessory input terminal assignments are listed in Table 4-7.
Table 4-7. Accessory Input Terminals
A6 (I+) Positive side of current accessory input
A7 (I–) Negative side of current accessory input
A8 (GND) Shield connection for accessory input
A9 (V+) Positive side of voltage accessory input
A10 (V–) Negative side of voltage accessory input
Contact Inputs
The DECS-200 has 11 fixed-function contact inputs. Each contact input supplies an interrogation voltage
of 12 Vdc and accepts dry switch/relay contacts or open-collector PLC outputs. Open-collector devices
connected to the contact inputs must be compatible with the 12 Vdc interrogation voltage, be capable of
conducting a minimum of 5 mAdc, and have off-state leakage current no greater than 100 µAdc. Table 4-
8 lists the contact input terminals.
Table 4-8. Contact Input Terminals
Function Terminal Common Terminal Input Type
Start A21 (START) A22 (COM) Momentary
Stop A23 (STOP) A24 (COM Momentary
AVR Mode Enable A25 (AUTO) A26 (COM) Momentary

Function Terminal Common Terminal Input Type
FCR Mode Enable A27 (FCR) A28 (COM) Momentary
Raise Command A29 (RAISE) A30 (COM) Momentary
Lower Command A31 (LOWER) A32 (COM) Momentary
Pre-Position A33 (PRE-P) A34 (COM) Continuous
Unit/Parallel A35 (52L/M) A36 (COM) Continuous
Var/PF Enable A37 (52J/K) A38 (COM) Continuous
Secondary Enable A39 (SECEN) A40 (COM) Continuous
Alarm Reset A41 (ALRST) A42 (COM) Momentary
Output Contacts
The DECS-200 has two fixed-function contact outputs and three user-programmable contact outputs. All
output contacts are normally open (NO) except for the Watchdog output which is normally closed (NC).
Output contact terminal assignments are listed in Table 4-9. For additional information about relay output
specifications, refer to Section 1, General Information. For information about configuring the user-
programmable outputs, refer to Section 3, Functional Description.
Table 4-9. Output Contact Terminals
A11 (ON/OF) On/Off contact terminals
A12 (ON/OF)
A13 (WTCHD) Watchdog contact terminals (normally closed)
A14 (WTCHD)
A15 (RLY1) Programmable relay #1 terminals
A16 (RLY1)
A18 (RLY2)
A20 (RLY3)
Field Output
The DECS-200 output is capable of supplying 15 Adc of continuous excitation current to a field with no
less than 2.13 ohms of resistance (at 32 Vdc), 4.2 ohms of resistance (at 63 Vdc), or 8.3 ohms of
resistance (at 125 Vdc). Field output terminals are listed in Table 4-10.
Table 4-10. Field Output Terminals
C5 (F+) Field output positive terminal
C6 (F–) Field output negative terminal
Com 2 Connections
Communication port Com 2 is intended for Table 4-11. Com 2 Terminals
polled communication over a Modbus network. Terminal Description
Twisted-pair cable is recommended for Com 2
A43 (A) RS-485 send/receive A terminal
connections. Com 2 terminals are listed in Table
4-11. Figure 4-8 illustrates the Com 2 A44 (B) RS-485 send/receive B terminal
connections used for multiple DECS-200 units A45 (C) RS-485 signal ground terminal
communicating over a Modbus network.

T0 RS-422/RS-485 To DECS-200
DB-37 Female Terminal Block
4
6
22 Rt A A43
DECS-200
24 B A44
Com 2
19 C A45
A A43
DECS-200
B A44
Com 2
C A45
4000'
MAX.
P0007-08
11-21-05
Rt A A43
DECS-200
B A44
Com 2
C A45
Rt = Optional terminating resistor (120 O typical)
Figure 4-8. RS-485 DB-37 to DECS-200

Typical Connections
Connections for a typical DECS-200 application are illustrated in Figure 4-9.
Figure 4-9. Typical Connections


SECTION 5 ● BESTCOMS SOFTWARE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 5 ● BESTCOMS SOFTWARE .................................................................................................. 5-1
INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................... 5-1
INSTALLATION...................................................................................................................................... 5-1
Operating Requirements .................................................................................................................... 5-1
Installing BESTCOMS ........................................................................................................................ 5-1
Connecting the DECS-200 and PC .................................................................................................... 5-1
STARTING BESTCOMS ........................................................................................................................ 5-1
Establishing Communication .............................................................................................................. 5-1
Configuring the Communication Ports ............................................................................................... 5-2
Configuring the Real-Time Clock ....................................................................................................... 5-2
Assigning Identification Labels ........................................................................................................... 5-3
Creating a Password .......................................................................................................................... 5-3
CHANGING SETTINGS ......................................................................................................................... 5-3
Sending Settings to the DECS-200 .................................................................................................... 5-3
Retrieving DECS-200 Settings ........................................................................................................... 5-3
Saving Settings in DECS-200 Memory .............................................................................................. 5-3
SETTINGS, METERING VALUES, AND DATA RECORDS ................................................................. 5-4
System Configuration ......................................................................................................................... 5-4
Setting Adjustments ........................................................................................................................... 5-8
Control Gain ..................................................................................................................................... 5-15
Analysis ............................................................................................................................................ 5-17
Protection/Relay ............................................................................................................................... 5-21
Data Log ........................................................................................................................................... 5-25
Metering............................................................................................................................................ 5-30
SAVING, PRINTING, AND OPENING FILES ...................................................................................... 5-32
Saving Files ...................................................................................................................................... 5-32
Printing Files ..................................................................................................................................... 5-33
Opening/Uploading Files .................................................................................................................. 5-33
PID WINDOW ...................................................................................................................................... 5-33
PID Calculations Based On Input Values ......................................................................................... 5-34
Adding To PID List ........................................................................................................................... 5-35
Removing A PID List Record............................................................................................................ 5-35
Retrieving Existing Data From PID List ............................................................................................ 5-35
TERMINATING COMMUNICATION .................................................................................................... 5-35
Figures
Figure 5-1. Wait Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................... 5-1
Figure 5-2. Communication Port Settings ................................................................................................. 5-2
Figure 5-3. Password Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 5-2
Figure 5-4. Set Real Time Clock Screen ................................................................................................... 5-2
Figure 5-5. Device ID Screen .................................................................................................................... 5-3
Figure 5-6. Change DECS Password Screen ........................................................................................... 5-3
Figure 5-7. System Configuration Screen, System Options Tab .............................................................. 5-4
Figure 5-8. System Configuration Screen, System Data Tab ................................................................... 5-5
Figure 5-9. System Configuration Screen, Rated Data Tab ...................................................................... 5-6
Figure 5-10. Pole Ratio Calculator ............................................................................................................ 5-7
Figure 5-11. System Configuration Screen, Auxiliary Input Tab ............................................................... 5-7
Figure 5-12. Setting Adjustments Screen, AVR/FCR Tab ........................................................................ 5-8
Figure 5-13. Setting Adjustments Screen, var/PF Tab .............................................................................. 5-9
Figure 5-14. System Settings Screen, Startup Tab ................................................................................. 5-11
Figure 5-15. System Settings Screen, OEL Type Tab ............................................................................ 5-11
Figure 5-16. System Settings Screen, OEL (Summing) Tab .................................................................. 5-12
Figure 5-17. Setting Adjustments Screen, OEL (Takeover) Tab............................................................. 5-13
Figure 5-18. Setting Adjustments Screen, UEL Tab ............................................................................... 5-14
9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software i

Figure 5-19. Setting Adjustments Screen, SCL Tab ............................................................................... 5-15
Figure 5-20. Control Gain Screen............................................................................................................ 5-15
Figure 5-21. Analysis Screen, AVR Tab .................................................................................................. 5-18
Figure 5-22. Analysis Screen, FCR Tab .................................................................................................. 5-18
Figure 5-23. Analysis Screen, var Tab .................................................................................................... 5-19
Figure 5-24. Analysis Screen, PF Tab..................................................................................................... 5-20
Figure 5-25. Protection Screen, Options Tab .......................................................................................... 5-22
Figure 5-26. Protection Screen, Settings Tab ......................................................................................... 5-22
Figure 5-27. Protection Screen, Relay #1, #2 Logic Tab ........................................................................ 5-24
Figure 5-28. Protection Screen, Relay Setting Tab ................................................................................. 5-25
Figure 5-29. Data Log Screen, Log Setup/Sequence of Events Tab ...................................................... 5-25
Figure 5-30. Sequence of Event Reporting ............................................................................................. 5-26
Figure 5-31. Data Logging Screen .......................................................................................................... 5-27
Figure 5-32. Data Log Screen, Logic Triggers Tab ................................................................................. 5-28
Figure 5-33. Data Log Screen, Level Triggers/Logged Parameters ....................................................... 5-29
Figure 5-34. Metering Screen, Operation Tab ......................................................................................... 5-31
Figure 5-35. Metering Screen, Alarm/Status Tab .................................................................................... 5-32
Figure 5-36. PID Window ........................................................................................................................ 5-34
Tables
Table 5-1. Predefined Stability Setting Groups ....................................................................................... 5-16
Table 5-2. Data Log Report Parameter Triggers ..................................................................................... 5-30
Table 5-3. 52J/K and 52L/M Logic ........................................................................................................... 5-31
ii DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 9360100990 Rev H

SECTION 5 ● BESTCOMS SOFTWARE
INTRODUCTION
®
BESTCOMS is a Windows -based application that provides a user-friendly environment for programming
and customizing the DECS-200. In addition to screens for configuring DECS-200 settings, BESTCOMS
has metering screens for viewing machine and system parameters and control screens for remote control
of the excitation system. An integrated PID calculator simplifies the selection of stability settings.
INSTALLATION
BESTCOMS-DECS200 software contains a setup utility that installs the program on your PC. When it
installs the program, an uninstall icon is created that you may use to uninstall (remove) the program from
your PC. The minimum recommended operating requirements are listed in the following paragraph.
Operating Requirements
• IBM compatible PC, 486 DX2 or faster (100 MHz or higher speed microprocessor recommended),
with a minimum 20 megabytes of RAM
®
• Microsoft Windows Vista, XP, or 2000
• CD-ROM drive
• One available serial port
Installing BESTCOMS
1. Insert the DECS-200 CD-ROM into the PC CD-ROM drive.
2. When the DECS-200 Setup and Documentation CD Menu appears, click the Install button for
BESTCOMS-DECS200. The BESTCOMS setup utility automatically installs BESTCOMS.
When BESTCOMS is installed, a Basler Electric folder is added to the Windows program menu. This
folder is accessed by clicking the Start button and pointing to Programs. The Basler Electric folder
contains an icon for BESTCOMS-DECS200.
Connecting the DECS-200 and PC

Connect a communication cable between the DECS-200 front panel RS-232 connector (Com 0) and the
appropriate communication port of the PC.
STARTING BESTCOMS
BESTCOMS is started by clicking the Windows Start button, pointing to Programs, the Basler Electric
folder, and then clicking the BESTCOMS-DECS200 icon. At startup, a dialog box with the program title
and version number is displayed briefly. After this dialog box is displayed, the System Configuration
Screen is displayed (Figure 5-7).
Establishing Communication
Communication between BESTCOMS and the DECS-200 must be established before viewing metering
values or reading or changing settings. BESTCOMS screen settings are updated only after
communication is opened or the communication settings have been changed.
Open the DECS-200 communication port by clicking Communications on the menu bar, hovering the
mouse pointer over Open Comm Port and clicking Front Port - RS-232 (Figure 5-2). When the Comm
Port dialog box appears, select the appropriate PC communication port and click the Initialize button.
BESTCOMS initiates communication by retrieving the configuration settings from the DECS-200.
NOTE
BESTCOMS may display the dialog box of Figure 5-1 when initiating
DECS-200 communication, obtaining DECS-200 configuration settings
or performing other tasks. It's important to wait until the box disappears
before trying to execute communication commands. Issuing commands Figure 5-1. Wait Dialog Box
while the Reading from DECS-200 dialog box is present may disrupt
communication between BESTCOMS and the DECS-200.
9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 5-1

Configuring the Communication Ports
DECS-200 communication settings are changed
through the Communication Port Settings screen.
To access this screen, click Communications on
the menu bar and click Port Configuration.
Communication port settings are illustrated in
Figure 5-2 and described in the following
paragraphs.
Serial Port. To modify the settings of a
communication port, the serial port must first be
selected. Each port has a corresponding setting
selection. Front-panel communication port settings
are adjusted by selecting COM0 RS-232. Right-
hand panel communication port settings are
adjusted by selecting COM1 RS-232. Left-hand
panel communication port settings are adjusted by
selecting COM2 RS-485.
Baud Rate. A baud rate of 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
or 19200 may be selected for each serial port.
Parity. This setting can be adjusted only for port
Figure 5-2. Communication Port Settings
Com 2. A setting of N (no parity) O (odd parity), or
E (even parity) may be selected.
Data Bits. The number of data bits is not adjustable
and fixed at 8.
Stop Bits. This setting can be adjusted only for port
Com 2. One (1) stop bit or two (2) stop bits may be
selected.
Modbus Settings, Address. This setting is enabled
only for port Com 2. A device address of 1 through
247 may be selected. Figure 5-3. Password Dialog Box
Modbus Settings, Response Time Delay. This
setting is enabled only for port Com 2. A response
time delay of 10 to 200 milliseconds may be
entered in 10 millisecond increments.
Once changes are made to the communication
settings and the OK button is clicked, the Password
dialog box of Figure 5-3 appears and prompts you
to enter a password. Each DECS-200 is delivered
with "decs2" as the default password. See Creating
a Password for information about changing the
password. After the correct password is entered,
the communication setting changes are made
active.
Configuring the Real-Time Clock

DECS-200 timekeeping is set and configured
through the Set Real Time Clock screen (Figure 5-
4). To access the Set Real Time Clock screen, click
Configure on the menu bar and click Real Time
Clock. The DECS-200 date and time are set by
altering the date and time fields or by retrieving the
PC date and time and then sending the values to Figure 5-4. Set Real Time Clock Screen
the DECS-200. The date format can be selected as
MM/DD/YY or DD-MM-YY. Timekeeping can use
the 12-hour or 24-hour format. Daylight saving time
compensation can be enabled or disabled.
5-2 DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 9360100990 Rev H
Assigning Identification Labels
Identification labels can be assigned to the DECS-
200 through the Device ID screen (Figure 5-5). The
information entered on the Device ID screen
identifies the DECS-200 unit and associates it with
a location and one or two operators. The Device ID
screen is accessed by clicking Configure on the
menu bar and clicking Device ID Information.
Information entered on the Device ID screen is
used in sequence-of-events reporting and settings
printouts. Each field of the Device ID screen
accepts a maximum of 30 alphanumeric characters.
Figure 5-5. Device ID Screen
Creating a Password
Password protection guards against unauthorized
changing or viewing of DECS-200 settings. A single
password protects all DECS-200 settings. The
DECS-200 is delivered with a default password of
decs2. The password can be changed only after
communication between BESTCOMS and the
DECS-200 is established. Once the password is
changed, it should be stored in a secure location. If
the user-defined password is lost or forgotten,
BESTCOMS must be reloaded to restore the
default password. A user password is entered on
the Change DECS Password screen. This screen,
illustrated in Figure 5-6, is accessed by clicking
Figure 5-6. Change DECS Password Screen
Communications on the menu bar and clicking
Password Change. A password containing up to
six alphanumeric characters may be entered.
CHANGING SETTINGS
A setting is changed by clicking within the setting field and typing the new setting value. When the cursor
is placed within a setting field, the range limits and increments for the setting are displayed on the status
bar. If a value outside the range limits is entered, an Input Error dialog box will appear and display the
acceptable range limits for the setting.
Sending Settings to the DECS-200

Once all desired setting changes have been made on a setting group screen, the settings must be sent to
the DECS-200 before viewing other screens. Otherwise, the setting changes will be lost. Setting changes
can be sent to the DECS-200 by clicking the SendToDECS button or by clicking Communications on
the menu bar and then clicking Send To DECS. A single setting change can be sent to the DECS-200 by
pressing the keyboard Enter key. Functions controlled by option buttons or checkboxes are immediately
sent to the DECS-200 when the option button or checkbox is selected.
Retrieving DECS-200 Settings

Settings are retrieved from the DECS-200 by clicking the GetFromDECS button. This causes the current
DECS-200 settings to be displayed on the BESTCOMS setting screens. DECS-200 settings can also be
retrieved by clicking Communications on the menu bar and clicking Get From DECS.
Saving Settings in DECS-200 Memory

DECS-200 settings are saved in nonvolatile memory (EEPROM). In the event of a control power loss,
these are the settings that are active at power-up. When setting changes are made and sent to the
DECS-200, they are automatically saved to EEPROM (if the correct password is entered). When you
close communication or exit BESTCOMS, you may be asked for a password. Enter the correct password
to ensure that all setting changes are saved.

SETTINGS, METERING VALUES, AND DATA RECORDS
DECS-200 settings, metering values, and data records are arranged into seven groups within
BESTCOMS:
• System Configuration • Protection/Relay
• Setting Adjustments • Data Log
• Control Gain • Metering/Operation
• Analysis
Each group is contained on a BESTCOMS screen. A screen’s settings and parameters are further
organized by labeled tabs within the screen. In the following paragraphs, settings, metering values, and
data records are arranged and defined according to the organization of the BESTCOMS screen and tabs.
System Configuration
The System Configuration screen consists of four tabs labeled System Options, System Data, Rated
Data, and Auxiliary Input. To view the System Configuration screen, click the Configure button on the
toolbar or click Screens on the menu bar and click System Configuration.
System Options
System Options tab functions are shown in Figure 5-7 and described in the following paragraphs.
Figure 5-7. System Configuration Screen, System Options Tab

Limiter Mode. This setting disables all limiters or enables the underexcitation limiter (UEL), overexcitation
limiter (OEL), or stator current limiter (SCL). Selection of the following limiter combinations is also
possible: OEL/UEL, SCL/UEL, SCL/OEL, and SCL/OEL/UEL.
Sensing Configuration. Configures the generator sensing voltage as either single-phase or three-phase.
Underfrequency Mode. Configures underfrequency limiting for V/Hz or underfrequency operation.
Generator Frequency. Selects either 50 hertz or 60 hertz as the nominal system frequency.
Voltage Matching. Enables or disables voltage matching. For voltage matching to be enabled, the DECS-
200 must be operating in AVR mode, var/power factor correction must be disabled, and the system must
be off line.
Version Numbers. These two read-only fields display the version of BESTCOMS software and the
firmware version of the DECS-200 connected to the PC operating BESTCOMS. In order for the DECS-
200 firmware version to be displayed, communication must be established between BESTCOMS and the
DECS-200.

System Data
System Data tab functions are shown in Figure 5-8 and described in the following paragraphs.
Figure 5-8. System Configuration Screen, System Data Tab
Generator PT Ratings, Primary Voltage. Sets the rated primary voltage of the generator potential
transformer (PT). Generator and bus PT ratings must be specified in the same sensing range. A setting of
1 to 30,000 Vac may be entered in 1 Vac increments.
Generator PT Ratings, Secondary Voltage. Sets the rated secondary voltage of the generator potential
transformer. Generator and bus PT ratings must be specified in the same sensing range. A setting of 1 to
600 Vac may be entered in 1 Vac increments.
Generator CT Ratings, Primary Current. Sets the rated primary current of the generator current
transformer (CT). A setting of 1 to 60,000 Aac may be entered in 1 Aac increments.
Generator CT Ratings, Secondary Current. Sets the rated secondary current of the generator current
transformer (CT). A setting of 1 Aac or 5 Aac may be entered.
Bus PT Ratings, Primary Voltage. Sets the rated primary voltage of the bus potential transformer (PT).
Generator and bus PT ratings must be specified in the same sensing range. A setting of 1 to 500,000 Vac
may be entered in 1 Vac increments.
Bus PT Ratings, Secondary Voltage. Rated secondary voltage of the bus potential transformer (PT).
(Read only.)
Internal Tracking, Enabled/Disabled. Enables or disables tracking of the active control mode setpoint by
the inactive control modes.
Internal Tracking, Delay. Determines the time delay between a control mode change and setpoint
tracking. A setting of 0 to 8 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.
Internal Tracking, Traverse Rate. Determines the amount of time required for the inactive control mode to
traverse (cross) the full setting range of the active control mode setpoint. A setting of 1 to 80 seconds may
be entered in 0.1 second increments.
External Tracking, Enable/Disable. Enables or disables tracking of a second DECS-200’s setpoint.
External Tracking, Delay. Determines the time delay between a transfer to a second DECS-200 and start
of tracking of the second DECS-200 setpoint. A setting of 0 to 8 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second
increments.

External Tracking, Traverse Rate. Determines the amount of time required for the DECS-200 to traverse
(cross) the full setting range of a second, active DECS-200. A setting of 1 to 80 seconds may be entered
in 0.1 second increments.
Rated Data
Rated Data tab functions are shown in Figure 5-9 and described in the following paragraphs.
Figure 5-9. System Configuration Screen, Rated Data Tab
Generator Rated Data, Voltage. Sets the rated line-to-line generator voltage. A setting of 85 to 30,000
Vac may be entered in 1 Vac increments.
Generator Rated Data, Current. Sets the rated generator line current. A setting of 10 to 60,000 Aac may
be entered in 0.1 Aac increments.
Generator Rated Data, Power Factor. Sets the rated generator power factor which is used to calculate
generator real power. A setting of 0.5 (leading) to –0.5 (lagging) may be entered in 0.01 increments.
Generator Rated Data, Real Power. This read-only field is the calculated product of the voltage field,
current field, power factor field, and the square root of 3.
Generator Rated Data, Rating. This read-only field is the calculated product of the voltage field, current
field, and the square root of 3.
Exciter Field Rated Data, Field Voltage. Sets the rated exciter field voltage. A setting of 1 to 180 Vdc may
be entered in 0.1 Vdc increments.
Exciter Field Rated Data, Field Current. Sets the rated exciter field current. A setting of 0.1 to 15 Adc may
be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.
Exciter Field Rated Data, Field Resistance. This read-only field is the calculated result of the field voltage
field being divided by the field current field.
Pole Ratio, Calculate Pole Ratio. Clicking this button displays the Pole Ratio Calculator screen (Figure 5-
10). Enter the number of exciter poles and generator poles and press the Enter key to view the calculated
result. The “Number of EXCITER Poles” field accepts even numbers between 0 and 1,000. The “Number
of GENERATOR Poles” field accepts even numbers between 0 and 100. Clicking the Accept button
closes the Pole Ratio Calculator screen and enters the ratio in the Pole Ratio field.

Figure 5-10. Pole Ratio Calculator
Pole Ratio, Pole Ratio. Sets the ratio of the number of exciter poles to the number of generator poles. A
setting of 0 to 10 may be entered in 0.01 increments. This value can be calculated automatically using the
pole ratio calculator, accessed by clicking the Calculate Pole Ratio button.
Auxiliary Input
The auxiliary voltage input signal changes the setpoint of the selected operating mode. For more
information on the auxiliary voltage input, refer to Section 3, Functional Description. Auxiliary Input tab
functions are shown in Figure 5-11 and described in the following paragraphs.
Figure 5-11. System Configuration Screen, Auxiliary Input Tab

Auxiliary Input, Input Type. Selects the accessory input type as voltage or current for remote control of the
setpoint.
Auxiliary Input, Summing Type. Selects either Inner Loop or Outer Loop as the summing type. When
Inner Loop is selected, the operating mode is either AVR of FCR. When Outer Loop is selected, the
operating mode is either var or power factor.

Auxiliary Input, Auxiliary Gain Settings. The four auxiliary gain setting fields, AVR, FCR, var, and PF,
select the gain which affects the setpoint of the selected operating mode. The signal applied to the
accessory input is multiplied by the auxiliary gain setting. Each gain setting can be adjusted from –99 to
+99 in increments of 0.01. For more information on the accessory gain settings, refer to Section 3,
Functional Description.
Droop Settings, Reactive Droop Compensation. Sets the level of droop compensation for paralleled
generators or line-drop compensations. Droop compensation is adjustable from 0 to +30% of the
generator nominal, terminal voltage in 0.1% increments. Line-drop compensation is adjustable from –30
to 0% of the generator nominal terminal voltage in 0.1% increments.
Droop Settings, Cross Current Compensation Gain. Sets the level of cross-current compensation
(reactive differential) gain for paralleled generators. Cross-current compensation gain is adjustable from –
30 to +30% of the rated CTs in 0.01% steps. Refer to Section 4, Installation, for more information on
cross-current compensation gain.
Setting Adjustments
The Setting Adjustments screen consists of eight tabs labeled AVR/FCR, var/PF, Startup, OEL Type,
OEL (Summing), OEL (Takeover), UEL, and SCL. To view the setting adjustment screen, click the
Settings button on the tool bar or click Screens on the menu bar and click Setting Adjustments.
AVR/FCR
AVR/FCR tab functions are illustrated in Figure 5-12 and described in the following paragraphs.
Figure 5-12. Setting Adjustments Screen, AVR/FCR Tab

Automatic Voltage Regulator, AVR Setpoint. Sets the desired generator output voltage when operating in
AVR mode. The range of this setting is based on the generator voltage setting entered on the Rated Data
tab of the System Configuration screen. This setting is also limited by the settings of the AVR Min and
AVR Max fields. If sensing step-down transformers are used, primary voltage should be entered.
Automatic Voltage Regulator, AVR Min. Sets the minimum generator output voltage, expressed as a
percentage of the rated generator voltage. A setting of 70 to 100% may be entered in 0.1% increments.
Automatic Voltage Regulator, AVR Max. Sets the maximum generator output voltage, expressed as a
percentage of the rated generator voltage. A setting of 70 to 100% may be entered in 0.1% increments.
Automatic Voltage Regulator, Traverse Rate (sec). Determines the time required to adjust the AVR
setpoint from the minimum value to the maximum value of the adjustment range. A setting of 10 to 200
seconds may be entered in 1 second increments.

Automatic Voltage Regulator, Pre-position Setpoint. Defines the pre-position setpoint for AVR mode. This
value replaces the AVR setpoint value if pre-position is selected and the AVR Pre-Position mode is
Maintain. The setting range is identical to the AVR Setpoint setting range. If sensing step-down
transformers are being used, primary voltage should be entered.
Automatic Voltage Regulator, Preposition Mode. Determines whether or not the DECS-200 will respond to
further setpoint change commands once the operating setpoint is driven to the pre-position value. If
Maintain mode is selected, further setpoint changes are ignored. If Release mode is selected, subsequent
setpoint changes are possible by using Raise and Lower commands.
Field Current Regulator, FCR Setpoint. Sets the field current setpoint when operating in FCR mode. The
range of this setting is based on the field current rating entered on the Rated Data tab of the System
Configuration screen. This setting is also controlled by the settings of the FCR Min and FCR Max fields.
Field Current Regulator, FCR Min. Sets the minimum field current setpoint, expressed as a percentage of
the rated field current. A setting of 0 to 100% may be entered in 0.1% increments.
Field Current Regulator, FCR Max. Sets the maximum field current setpoint, expressed as a percentage
of the rated field current. A setting of 1 to 120% may be entered in 0.1% increments.
Field Current Regulator, Traverse Rate. Determines the time required to adjust the FCR setpoint from the
minimum value to the maximum value of the adjustment range. A setting of 10 to 200 seconds may be
entered in 1 second increments.
Field Current Regulator, Preposition Setpoint. Defines the pre-position setpoint for FCR mode. This value
replaces the FCR setpoint value if pre-position is selected and the FCR Pre-Position mode is Maintain.
The setting range is identical to the FCR Setpoint setting range.
Field Current Regulator, Pre-position Mode. Determines whether or not the DECS-200 will respond to
further setpoint change commands once the operating setpoint is driven to the pre-position value. If
Var/PF
Var/PF tab functions are illustrated in Figure 5-13 and described in the following paragraphs.
Figure 5-13. Setting Adjustments Screen, var/PF Tab

Reactive Power Control, var Setpoint. Sets the reactive power setpoint when operating in var mode. The
range of this setting depends on the generator ratings entered on the Rated Data tab of the System
Configuration screen. This setting is also controlled by the settings of the var Min and var Max fields.

Reactive Power Control, var Min. Sets the minimum var setpoint, expressed as a percentage of the rated
generator kVA. A setting of –100 to +100% may be entered in 1% increments.
Reactive Power Control, var Max. Sets the maximum var setpoint, expressed as a percentage of the
rated generator kVA. A setting of –100 to +100% may be entered in 1% increments.
Reactive Power Control, Traverse Rate. Determines the time required to adjust the var setpoint from the
minimum value to the maximum value of the adjustment range. A setting of 10 to 200 seconds may be
entered in 1 second increments.
Reactive Power Control, Preposition Setpoint. Defines the pre-position setpoint for var mode. This value
replaces the var setpoint value if pre-position is selected and the var Pre-Position mode is Maintain. The
setting range is identical to the var Setpoint setting range.
Reactive Power Control, Preposition Mode. Determines whether or not the DECS-200 will respond to
further setpoint change commands once the operating var setpoint is driven to the pre-position value. If
Reactive Power Control, Var/PF Fine Volt Band. Sets the upper and lower boundaries of voltage
correction when operating in var or PF mode.
Power Factor Control, PF Setpoint. Sets the generator operating power factor. The range of this setting is
determined by the settings of the PF (Leading) and PF (Lagging) fields.
Power Factor Control, PF (Leading). Sets the limit for leading power factor. A setting of –1 to –0.5 may be
entered in 0.005 increments.
Power Factor Control, PF (Lagging). Sets the limit for lagging power factor. A setting of 0.5 to 1 may be
Power Factor Control, Traverse Rate (sec). Determines the time required to adjust the power factor
setpoint from the minimum value to the maximum value of the adjustment range. A setting of 10 to 200
Power Factor Control, Preposition Setpoint. Defines the pre-position setpoint for Power Factor mode. This
value replaces the PF setpoint value if pre-position is selected and the PF Pre-Position mode is Maintain.
The setting range is identical to the PF Setpoint setting range.
Power Factor Control, Preposition Mode. Determines whether or not the DECS-200 will respond to further
setpoint change commands once the operating PF setpoint is driven to the pre-position value. If Maintain
mode is selected, further setpoint changes are ignored. If Release mode is selected, subsequent setpoint
changes are possible by using Raise and Lower commands.
Startup
Startup tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-14 and described in the following paragraphs.
Startup Control, Soft Start Level. Sets the generator soft-start voltage offset used during startup. A setting
of 0 to 90% may be entered in 1% increments.
Startup Control, Soft Start Time. Sets the soft-start time limit used during startup. A setting of 1 to 7,200
Underfrequency Setting, Corner Frequency. Sets the generator corner frequency for generator under-
frequency protection. A setting of 15 to 90 Hz may be entered in 0.1 Hz increments.
Underfrequency Setting, Slope. Sets the generator frequency slope for generator underfrequency
protection. A setting of 0 to 3 V/Hz may be entered in 0.01 V/Hz increments.
Voltage Matching, Band. Configures the generator voltage matching band as a percentage of the
generator rated voltage. When the bus voltage falls outside this band, no voltage matching occurs. A
setting of 0 to 20% may be entered in 0.01% increments.
Voltage Matching, Gen to Bus PT Match Level. Ensures accurate voltage matching by compensation for
the error between the generator and bus voltage sensing transformers. The Match Level is expressed as
the relationship of the generator voltage to the bus voltage (expressed as a percentage). A setting of 90
to 120% may be entered in 0.1% increments.

Figure 5-14. System Settings Screen, Startup Tab
OEL Type
Overexcitation Limiter Type tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-15 and described in the following
paragraphs.
Figure 5-15. System Settings Screen, OEL Type Tab

OEL Limiter Style. Selects either the summing-point type of overexcitation limiter or the takeover-type of
overexcitation limiter.
OEL Setting Selection Option. Selects the on-line and off-line OEL settings for various 52J/K and 52L/M
contact statuses.

Option 1 activates the on-line OEL settings when either the 52J/K contact or 52L/M contact is opened.
The off-line OEL settings are activated when both the 52J/K and 52L/M contacts are closed. When the
52L/M contact input is jumpered, the 52J/K input can be used to switch between the on-line OEL and off-
line OEL. If var/PF modes are disabled, a closed 52J/K contact enables AVR mode and an open 52J/K
contact enables droop compensation.
Option 2 configures the 52J/K contact to define when the off-line and on-line limiters are active. When the
52J/K contact is closed, the off-line OEL settings are active. When the 52J/K contact is open, the on-line
OEL settings are active. This configuration is intended for cross-compound generator applications where
both machines are paralleled at low rotational speed. Therefore, droop compensation needs to be active
(open 52L/M contact) as the speed of the machines is increased. However, both machines need active,
off-line overexcitation limiting protection.
Option 3 activates the on-line OEL at all times. This configuration enables the DECS-200 to operate in
AVR mode (stand-alone application) without restriction from the off-line OEL settings. The active on-line
OEL is able to limit excitation current if needed. This configuration also eliminates the need for the DECS-
200 to operate in Droop mode when applied in a single-unit application. Therefore, generator voltage
should not droop as reactive load increases.
OEL (Summing)
Summing-Point Overexcitation Limiter tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-16 and described in the
following paragraphs.
Figure 5-16. System Settings Screen, OEL (Summing) Tab

Off-Line OEL Setting, High Current Level. Establishes the high-level current setpoint for the off-line,
summing-point, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 30 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.
Off-Line OEL Setting, High Current Time. Sets the duration for the high current setpoint of the off-line,
summing-point, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 10 seconds may be entered in 1 second
increments.
Off-Line OEL Setting, Low Current Level. Establishes the low-level current setpoint for the off-line,
On-Line OEL Setting, High Current Level. Establishes the high-level current setpoint for the on-line,
On-Line OEL Setting, Medium Current Level. Establishes the medium-level current setpoint for the on-
line, summing point, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 20 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.

On-Line OEL Setting, Medium Current Time. Sets the duration for the medium current setpoint of the on-
line, summing-point, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 120 seconds may be entered in 1 second
increments.
On-Line OEL Setting, Low Current Level. Establishes the low-level current setpoint for the on-line,
OEL (Takeover)
Takeover Overexcitation Limiter tab functions are illustrated in Figure 5-17 and described in the following
paragraphs.
Off-Line Settings, Low Current Level. Establishes the low-level current setpoint for the off-line, takeover-
style, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 20 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.
Off-Line Settings, High Current Level. Establishes the high-level current setpoint for the off-line, takeover-
Off-Line Settings, Time Dial. Sets the time delay for the off-line, takeover-style, overexcitation limiter. A
setting of 0.1 to 20 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.
Figure 5-17. Setting Adjustments Screen, OEL (Takeover) Tab

On-Line Settings, Low Current Level. Establishes the low-level current setpoint for the on-line, takeover-
On-Line Setting, High Current Level. Establishes the high-level current setpoint for the on-line, takeover-
On-Line settings, Time Dial. Sets the time delay for the on-line, takeover-style, overexcitation limiter. A
Off-Line Curve and On-Line Curve Checkboxes. Checking these boxes displays a plot of the takeover-
style off-line and on-line overexcitation limiter curves. Curve magnification is adjusted by the Zoom X,
Zoom Y, Zoom XY, and Zoom OUT buttons.
UEL
Underexcitation Limiter tab functions are illustrated in Figure 5-18 and described in the following
paragraphs.
UEL Settings, UEL Curve Type Selection. Selects either a user-configured or internally-configured
underexcitation limiting curve. Selecting “3 point”, “4 point”, or “5 point” enables the user to create a
custom UEL curve that matches specific generator characteristics. When “Internal” is selected, the DECS-

200 automatically creates a UEL curve based on the first point setting of the absorbed, reactive power
level. This function operates in all modes except FCR.
UEL Settings, Real Power. Up to five setting fields may be used to establish up to five real-power (kW)
points of the underexcitation limiter curve. The UEL Curve Type Selection must be set to “Customized” in
order for these setting fields to be enabled. Not all setting fields need be used. For example, entering kW
values in three of the five setting fields produces a three-point UEL curve. The range for each setting field
is based on the generator ratings entered on the Rated Data tab of the System Configuration screen.
UEL Settings, Reactive Power. When the UEL Curve Type Selection is set to “Customized”, these five
setting fields establish the five reactive power points of the underexcitation limiter curve. Not all setting
fields need be used. For example, entering kvar values in to of the five setting fields produces a two-point
UEL curve. When the UEL curve Type Selection is set to “Internal”, only the first setting field is enabled
and a UEL curve is internally generated based on the value entered in the field. The range for each
setting field is based on the generator ratings entered on the Rated Data tab of the System Configuration
screen.
Curve points are plotted in the UEL graph as values are entered through BESTCOMS. All kW and kvar
settings can also be sent at the same time using the Send all UEL Settings to DECS button.
Internal Curve and Customized Curve Buttons. These buttons can be clicked and held to preview the
corresponding UEL curve.
Figure 5-18. Setting Adjustments Screen, UEL Tab

SCL
Stator Current Limiter tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-19 and described in the following paragraphs.
Stator Current Limiter, Initial Delay. The SCL does not respond until the Initial Delay has expired. A
setting of 0 to 10 may be entered in 0.1 second increments.
Stator Current Limiter, High SCL Current Level. Configures the high-level current setpoint for the stator
current limiter. A setting of 0 to 66,000 Aac may be entered in 1.0 Aac increments.
Stator Current Limiter, High SCL Current Time. Sets the time limit for high-level current limiting by the
stator current limiter. A setting of 0 to 60 seconds may be entered in 1 second increments.
Stator Current Limiter, Low SCL Current Level. Configures the low-level current setpoint for the stator
current limiter. A setting of 0 to 66,000 Aac may be entered in 1 Aac increments.

Figure 5-19. Setting Adjustments Screen, SCL Tab
Control Gain
The Control Gain screen consists of a single tab labeled Control Gain. To view the Control Gain screen,
click the Gain button on the tool bar or click Screens on the menu bar and click Control Gain.
Control Gain Tab
Control Gain tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-20 and described in the following paragraphs.
Figure 5-20. Control Gain Screen

Stability Range. Entering a value from 1 to 20 selects one of 20 predefined stability setting groups for
exciter field applications. Table 5-1 lists the stability settings for each of the 20 predefined groups.
Entering 21 enables the PID function and allows the user to optimize the stability settings. The PID
function provides reference gain settings for user-specified generator and/or exciter time constants. See
PID Window for information about customizing stability settings.
Table 5-1. Predefined Stability Setting Groups
Generator Open Circuit
Time
Setting Generator Exciter
Group Constant (T’do) Time Constant (Texc) Kp Ki Kd
1 1.0 0.17 42.20 115.2 4.433
2 1.5 0.25 66.50 150.0 8.750
3 2.0 0.33 87.16 167.9 13.670
4 2.5 0.42 104.50 175.8 18.960
5 3.0 0.50 119.00 177.8 24.500
6 3.5 0.58 131.30 176.4 30.220
7 4.0 0.67 141.80 173.1 36.060
8 4.5 0.75 150.90 168.8 42.000
9 5.0 0.83 158.80 163.9 48.010
10 5.5 0.92 165.70 158.7 54.080
11 6.0 1.00 171.80 153.6 60.200
12 6.5 1.08 177.20 148.5 66.350
13 7.0 1.17 182.10 143.6 72.540
14 7.5 1.25 186.50 138.9 78.750
15 8.0 1.33 190.50 134.4 84.980
16 8.5 1.42 194.10 130.1 91.230
17 9.0 1.50 197.40 125.9 97.500
18 9.5 1.58 200.40 122.1 103.800
19 10.0 1.67 203.20 118.4 110.100
20 10.5 1.75 205.70 114.8 116.400
AVR/FCR, Proportional Gain KP. Selects the proportional constant (KP) stability parameter. The DECS-
200 provides an output value that is equivalent to KP multiplied by the error between the voltage setpoint
and the actual generator output voltage. Typical values of KP range from 0 to 1,000. General guidelines
for tuning KP are as follows: If the transient response has too much overshoot, decrease KP. If the
transient response is too slow with little or no overshoot, increase KP. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be
AVR/FCR, Integral Gain KI. Selects the integral constant (KI) stability parameter. The DECS-200 provides
an output value that is equivalent to KI multi-plied by the integral of the error between the voltage setpoint
and the actual generator output voltage. Typical values of KI range fro 0 to 1,000. Generally, if the time to
reach steady state is deemed too long, then increase the value of KI. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be
AVR/FCR, Derivative Gain KD. Selects the derivative constant (KD) stability parameter. The DECS-200
provides an output value that is equivalent to KD multiplied by the derivative of the error between the
voltage setpoint and the actual generator output voltage. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1
increments. Typical values of KD range from 1 to 10. If the transient response has too much ringing, then
KD should be increased.
AVR/FCR, Derivative Gain TD. Removes the effects of noise on numerical differentiation. A setting of 0 to
1 may be entered in 0.01 increments. Typical TD values range from 0.01 to 0.03.
AVR/FCR, AVR Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for AVR mode. A
setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.
_AVR/FCR, FCR Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for FCR mode. A

VAR/PF, var Integral Gain KI. Adjusts the integral gain, which determines the characteristic of the DECS-
200 dynamic response to a changed var setting. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.01
increments.
VAR/PF, PF Integral Gain KI. Adjusts the integral gain, which determines the characteristic of the DECS-
200 dynamic response to a changed power factor setting. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1
increments.
VAR/PF, var Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for var control. A setting
of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.01 increments.
VAR/PF, PF Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for power factor control.
A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.
SCL, Integral Gain KI. Adjusts the rate at which the DECS-200 limits stator current. A setting of 0 to 1,000
may be entered in 0.1 increments.
SCL, Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for the stator current limiter. A
OEL, Integral Gain KI. Adjusts the rate at which the DECS-200 responds during an overexcitation
condition. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.
OEL, Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for the overexcitation limiter. A
UEL, Integral Gain KI. Adjusts the rate at which the DECS-200 responds during an underexcitation
condition. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.
UEL, Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for the underexcitation limiter. A
setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments
Voltage Matching, Loop Gain Kg. Adjusts the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for matching the
generator voltage to the bus voltage. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.
Analysis
The Analysis screen consists of four tabs labeled AVR, FCR, var, and PF. To view the Analysis screen,
click the Analysis button on the tool bar or click Screens on the menu bar and click Analysis.
Trigger Data Logging on Step Change. Checking this box causes an oscillography report to be triggered
every time that a step change occurs.
AVR
AVR tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-21 and described in the following paragraphs.
Voltage Step Response, Increment of AVR Setpoint. Sets the voltage step size that the DECS-200 uses
when incrementing the generator terminal voltage setpoint. A setting of 0 to 10% may be entered in 1%
increments. A button adjacent to this setting is clicked to increment the terminal voltage setpoint. A read-
only field indicates the terminal voltage setpoint that will be achieved when the increment button is
clicked. If the specified step size is outside the setpoint limit, a warning message will appear.
Voltage Step Response, AVR Setpoint. This read-only field indicates the generator terminal voltage set-
point that was set on the AVR/FCR tab of the Setting Adjustments screen. A button adjacent to this field
is clicked to return the AVR setpoint to the displayed value.
Voltage Step Response, Decrement of AVR Setpoint. Sets the voltage step size that the DECS-200 uses
when decrementing the generator terminal voltage setpoint. A setting of 0 to 10% may be entered in 1%
increments. A button adjacent to this setting is clicked to decrement the terminal voltage setpoint. A read-
only field indicates the terminal voltage setpoint that will be achieved when the decrement button is
clicked.
Voltage Step Response, Vrms. This read-only field indicates the value of terminal voltage. The other three
fields are described in the corresponding tab setting descriptions.
Alarm Signals. During step response analysis, nine alarm indicators are available to indicate system
alarms. The indicators annunciate the following conditions:
• Field overcurrent
• Field overvoltage
• Generator overvoltage
• Generator undervoltage

• Loss of sensing
• Overexcitation limiting
• System frequency below 10 Hz
• Underexcitation limiting
• Underfrequency or volts per hertz
Figure 5-21. Analysis Screen, AVR Tab
FCR
FCR tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-22 and described in the following paragraphs.
Figure 5-22. Analysis Screen, FCR Tab

Field Current Step Response, Increment of FCR Setpoint. Sets the current step size that the DECS-200
uses when incrementing the field current setpoint. A setting of 0 to 10% may be entered in 1%
increments. A button adjacent to this setting is clicked to increment the field current setpoint. A read-only
field indicates the field current setpoint that will be achieved when the increment button is clicked. If the
specified step size is outside the setpoint limit, a warning message will appear.
Field Current Step Response, FCR Setpoint. This read-only field indicates the field current setpoint that
was set on the AVR/FCR tab of the Setting Adjustments screen. A button adjacent to this field is clicked
to return the AVR setpoint to the displayed value.
Field Current Step Response, Decrement of FCR Setpoint. Sets the field current step size that the DECS-
200 uses when decrementing the field current setpoint. A setting of 0 to 10% may be entered in 1%
increments. A button adjacent to this setting is clicked to decrement the field current setpoint. A read-only
field indicates the field current setpoint that will be achieved when the decrement button is clicked.
Field Current Step Response, Ifd. This read-only field indicates the value of field current. The other three
fields are described in the corresponding tab setting descriptions.
alarms. A list of the indicators is provided under Analysis, AVR. Alarm annunciations are updated
approximately once every second.
Var
Var tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-23 and described in the following paragraphs.
Figure 5-23. Analysis Screen, var Tab

Reactive Power Step Response, Range Control, Min. Changes the range indicated by the var Step
Settings dial and the minimum allowable var settings for the generator. To change the minimum dial
value, double-click the field value, enter a new minimum limit, and press the Enter key.
Reactive Power Step Response, Range Control, Max. Changes the range indicated by the var Step
Settings dial and the minimum allowable var settings for the generator. To change the maximum dial
value, double-click the field value, enter a new minimum limit, and press the Enter key.
Reactive Power Step Response, Setpoint Value. This read-only field indicates the reactive power setpoint
established on the var/PF tab of the Setting Adjustments screen. If a step-response setpoint change has
been made from this screen, the actual setpoint value for the regulator will differ from this read-only
indication.
Reactive Power Step Response, Step Value Change var Value. Provides one of three methods for
changing the kvar setpoint and observing the generator response. (The other two methods include
adjusting the var Step Settings dial or slide bar.) Once the desired value is entered, the value is sent to
the DECS-200 by clicking the Send var Value to DECS (OK) button. When clicked and held, the button
color changes to red and the button label changes to “Index 1”. Upon release of the button, the new var
value setting is sent to the DECS-200 as the reactive power setpoint for the var regulator. If the specified
var value is outside the range limit, a dialog box appears and shows the acceptable values for the step
response. Changing the var setpoint through the var Value field does not change the dial or slide
indicators.
The pointer of the var Step Settings dial can be clicked and dragged to the approximate, desired setting.
As the pointer is dragged, the slide bar moves to show the relative percentage of the minimum or
maximum var setting. The setpoint can then be fine tuned using the up and down scrolling buttons of the
var Value window.
Reactive Power Step Response, Step Value Change Index. Up to three var step-response setpoints
(indexes) can be activated. An index is created by using the methods described in the previous
paragraphs. Index 2 is added by clicking the Add var Step button. (It may be necessary to drag the red
index 1 pointer out of the way to access the yellow index 2 pointer.) When the Send var Value to DECS
button is clicked and held, the button color changes to yellow and the button label changes to “Index 2”. A
third index is added n the same manner as index 2, but the third index color is blue.
Reactive Power Step Response, Var Steps, Add Var Step. Adds a setpoint index. A maximum of three
setpoint indexes may be created. Refer to the previous paragraph for additional information on adding
setpoint indexes (var Steps).
Reactive Power Step Response, Var Steps, Remove Step. Removes the last setpoint index created.
Var, Var Step Response. This read-only field indicates the value of the regulated var level. The other
three fields are described in the corresponding tab setting descriptions.
PF
PF tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-24 and described in the following paragraphs.
Figure 5-24. Analysis Screen, PF Tab

Power Factor Step Response, Add PF Step. Adds a power factor setpoint index. Up to three setpoint
indexes can be created. The addition of indexes is discussed in the paragraphs describing the Step Value
Change settings.

Power Factor Step Response, Remove Steps. Removes the last setpoint index created.
Power Factor Step Response, PF Setpoint Value. This read-only field indicates the reactive power
setpoint established on the var/PF tab of the Setting Adjustments screen. If a step response setpoint
change has been made from this screen, the actual setpoint value for the regulator will differ from this
read-only indication.
Power Factor Step Response, Step Value Change PF Value. Provides one of two methods for changing
the power factor setpoint and observing the generator response. (The other method consists of adjusting
the PF Step Response Settings dial.) Once the desired value is entered, the value is sent to the DECS-
200 by clicking the Send PF Value to DECS button. When clicked and held, the button color changes to
red and the button label changes to “Index 1”. Upon release of the button, the new power factor value is
sent to the DECS-200 and the PF setpoint for the power factor regulator. If the specified PF value is
outside the range limit, a dialog box appears and shows the acceptable values for the step response.
Changing the var setpoint through the PF Value field does not change the dial indicator.
The pointer of the PF Step Response Settings dial can be clicked and dragged to the approximate,
desired setting. The setpoint can then be fine tuned using the up and down scrolling buttons of the PF
Value window.
Power Factor Step Response, Step Value Change Index. Up to three power factor step-response
setpoints (indexes) can be activated. An index is created by using the methods described in the previous
paragraphs. Index 2 is added by clicking the Add PF Step button. (It may be necessary to drag the red
Index 1 pointer out of the way to access the yellow index 2 pointer.) When the Send PF Value to DECS
button is clicked and held, the button color changes to yellow and the button label changes to “Index 2”. A
third index is added in the same manner as index 2, but the third index color is blue.
Power Factor Step Response, PF. This read-only field indicates the value of the regulated power factor
level. The other three fields are described in the corresponding tab setting descriptions.
Protection/Relay
The Protection/Relay screen consists of five tabs labeled Options, Settings, Gain, Relay #1, #2 Logic,
Relay #3 Logic, and Relay Settings. To view the Protection/Relay screen, click the Protection button on
the tool bar or click Screens on the menu bar and click Protection/Relay.
Options
Options tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-25 and described in the following paragraphs.
Protection. DECS-200 protection functions are enabled and disabled using these settings. DECS-200
protection functions include generator overvoltage, exciter field overvoltage, open exciter diode, loss of
field, generator undervoltage, exciter field overcurrent, and shorted exciter diode. When a protection
function is enabled or disabled, the change is sent immediately to the DECS-200.
Loss of Sensing Voltage, LOS. Enables and disables the loss of sensing function.
Loss of Sensing Voltage, Time Delay. Sets the time delay between when the DECS-200 detects a loss of
sensing voltage and when the alarm annunciates and the output relay actuates (if programmed). A setting
of 0 to 30 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.
Loss of Sensing Voltage, Balanced Level. When all phases of sensing voltage decrease below this
setting, the loss of sensing voltage time delay begins timing out. A setting of 0 to 100% (of nominal) may
be entered in 0.1% increments.
Loss of Sensing Voltage, Unbalanced Level. When any one of three phases of sensing voltage decreases
below this setting, the loss of sensing voltage time delay begins timing out. This setting applies to three-
phase sensing applications only. A setting of 0 to 100% (of nominal) may be entered in 0.1% increments.
Loss of Sensing Voltage, Transfer to FCR Mode. Enables and disables a transfer from AVR mode to FCR
mode when a loss of sensing voltage condition occurs.

Figure 5-25. Protection Screen, Options Tab
Settings
Settings tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-26 and described in the following paragraphs.
Figure 5-26. Protection Screen, Settings Tab

Generator Overvoltage, Level. Configures the setpoint, in primary voltage, for generator overvoltage
protection. This setting is active only when generator overvoltage protection is enabled on the Options
tab. When the generator terminal voltage reaches the level of this setting and the associated time delay
expires, the corresponding protection alarm LED lights. (See the Alarm/Status or Analysis screens for the
location of the specific alarm signal LEDs.) If programmed for the overvoltage function, one or more of the
three programmable output relays are actuated. A setting of 0 to 30,000 Vac may be entered in 1 Vac
increments.
Generator Overvoltage, Delay. Sets the time delay for the generator overvoltage protection function. This
setting is active only when generator overvoltage protection is enabled on the Options tab. A setting of
0.1 to 60 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.
Exciter Field Overvoltage, Level. Configures the setpoint for field overvoltage protection. This setting is
active only when field overvoltage protection is enabled on the Options tab. When the field voltage
reaches the level of this setting and the associated time delay expires, the corresponding protection alarm
indicator lights. (See the Alarm/Status or Analysis Screen for the detailed alarm LED signals.) If
programmed for the field overvoltage function, one or more of the three programmable output relays are
actuated. A setting of 1 to 325 Vdc may be entered in 1 Vdc increments.
Exciter Field Overvoltage, Delay. Sets the time delay for the field overvoltage protection function. This
setting is active only when field overvoltage protection is enabled on the Options tab. A setting of 0.2 to
30 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.
Exciter Open Diode, Level. Configures the percent of rated field current that indicates an open exciter
diode. This setting is active only when open exciter diode protection is enabled on the Options tab. A
Exciter Open Diode, Inhibit Level. Configures the percent of rated field current that disables both open-
and shorted-diode protection. This setting is active only when open exciter diode protection is enabled on
the Options tab. A setting of 0 to 100% may be entered in 0.1% increments.
Exciter Open Diode, Delay. Sets the time delay between when an open exciter diode is detected and
annunciated. This setting is active only when open exciter diode protection is enabled on the Options tab.
A setting of 10 to 60 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.
Generator Undervoltage, Level. Configures the setpoint for generator undervoltage protection. This
setting is active only when generator undervoltage protection is enabled on the Options tab. When the
generator terminal voltage reaches the level of this setting and the associated time delay expires, the
corresponding protection alarm LED lights. (See the Alarm/Status or Analysis screen for the detailed
alarm LED signals.) If programmed for the undervoltage function, one or more of the three programmable
output relays are actuated. A setting of 0 to 30,000 Vac may be entered in 1 Vac increments.
Generator Undervoltage, Delay. Sets the time delay for the generator undervoltage protection function.
This setting is active only when generator undervoltage protection is enabled on the Options tab. A
Exciter Field Overcurrent, Level. Configures the setpoint for field overcurrent protection. This setting is
active only when field overcurrent protection is enabled on the Options tab. When the field current
exceeds the level of this setting and the associated time delay expires, the corresponding protection
alarm LED lights. (See the Alarm/Status or Analysis Screen for the detailed alarm LED signals.) If
programmed for the field overcurrent function, one or more of the three programmable output relays are
actuated. A setting of 0.1 to 16.0 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.
Exciter Field Overcurrent, Delay. Selects the time delay between when the field current reaches the
Exciter Field Overcurrent Level setting and when the alarm annunciates. The time delay is initiated when
the sensed current exceeds the overcurrent setpoint and is inversely proportional to the overcurrent level.
The higher the current level, the less time delay before alarm annunciations. This setting is active only
when shorted exciter diode protection is enabled on the Options tab. A setting of 0.1 to 20 seconds may
be entered in 0.1 second increments.
Exciter Shorted Diode, Level. Configures the percent of rated field current that indicates a shorted exciter
diode. This setting is active only when shorted exciter diode protection is enabled on the Options tab. A
Exciter Shorted Diode, Delay. Sets the time delay between when a shorted exciter diode is detected and
annunciated. This setting is active only when shorted exciter diode protection is enabled on the Options
tab. A setting of 5 to 30 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.
Loss of Field, Level. Configures the setpoint for loss of field protection. This setting is active only when
loss of field protection is enabled on the Options tab. When the kvar value decreases below the negative
value of this setting for the duration of the Loss of Field Delay setting, the corresponding protection alarm
LED lights. (See the Alarm/Status tab of the Metering screen or the Analysis screen for the detailed alarm
LED signals.) Any of the three programmable DECS-200 output relays can be programmed to annunciate
a loss of field condition. A setting of 0 to 3,000,000 kvar may be entered in1 kvar increments.
Loss of Field, Delay. Sets the loss of field protection time delay. This setting is active only when loss of
field protection is enabled. A setting of 0 to 9.9 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.

Relay Logic
Logic settings for the three programmable relays are divided between two tabs labeled Relay #1, #2 Logic
and Relay #3 Logic. Because the settings for each programmable relay are identical, only the Relay #1,
#2 Logic tab is illustrated here (Figure 5-27).
Figure 5-27. Protection Screen, Relay #1, #2 Logic Tab

Protection. A programmable relay can be configured to annunciate any of nine active protection functions.
These protection functions include:
• Field overcurrent • Loss of sensing voltage
• Field overvoltage • Open exciter diode
• Generator overvoltage • Shorted exciter diode
• Generator undervoltage • System frequency below 10 Hz
• Loss of field
Setpoint Limit. A programmable output can be configured to close when the active setpoint reaches the
upper limit or lower limit.
FCR Mode. Enabling this setting closes the programmable output when the DECS-200 is operating in
FCR (Manual) mode.
Limit. A programmable output can be configured to close when the following limits are reached:
overexcitation, stator current, underfrequency, or volts per hertz, and underexcitation.
Relay Setting
Contact settings for each of the three programmable relays are adjusted on the Relay Setting tab. Relay
Setting tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-28 and described in the following paragraphs.
Contact Status. Configures the output contacts as normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC). Normally
closed, programmable relay outputs do not remain closed when control power is removed from the
DECS-200.
Contact Type. Selects one of three contact types: Momentary, Maintained, or Latched. Selecting
Momentary closes or opens the relay contacts for the duration determined by the Momentary Time
setting. Selecting Maintained closes or opens the relay contact for the duration of the condition triggering
the relay’s change of state. Selecting Latched latches the relay contacts closed or open until the relay is
reset by the user.
Momentary Time. When Momentary is selected as the contact type, this setting controls the duration that
the contact is open/closed when the relay output is active. A setting of 0.1 to 5 seconds may be entered in
0.05 second increments.

Figure 5-28. Protection Screen, Relay Setting Tab
Data Log
The Data Log screen consists of three tabs labeled Log Setup/Sequence of Events, Logic Triggers, and
Level Triggers/Logged Parameters. To view the Data Log screen, click the Data Log button on the tool
bar or click Screens on the menu bar and click Data Log.
Log Setup/Sequence Of Events
Log Setup/Sequence of Events tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-29 and described in the following
paragraphs.
Figure 5-29. Data Log Screen, Log Setup/Sequence of Events Tab

Data Logging Setup, Data Logging Enable. Enables and disables data logging.
Data Logging Setup, Pre-Trigger Points. Selects the number of data points that are recorded prior to a
data log being triggered. A setting of 0 to 599 may be entered in increments of 1.
Data Logging Setup, Post Trigger Points. Displays the number of data points that are recorded after a
data log is triggered. The value of this read-only field is determined by the Pre-Trigger Points and Sample
Interval settings.
Data Logging Setup, Sample Interval. Establishes the sample rate of the data points. When the Generator
Frequency setting (System Configuration screen, System Options tab) is 60 hertz, a sample interval of
0.016 to 10 seconds may be selected from the pull-down menu. When the Generator Frequency setting is
50 hertz, a sample interval of 0.004 to 10 seconds may be selected from the pull-down menu.
Data Logging Setup, Pre-Trig Duration. Displays the length of time that pre-trigger data points are
recorded. The value of this read-only field is determined by the Pre-Trigger Points and Sample Interval
settings.
Data Logging Setup, Post Trig Duration. Displays the length of time that post-trigger data points are
recorded. The value of this read-only field is determined by the Pre-Trigger Points and Sample Interval
settings.
Data Logging Setup, Total Log Duration. Displays the total recording time for a data log and equals the
sum of the values in the Pre-Trig Duration and Post Trig Duration fields. The value of this read-only field
is determined by the Pre-Trigger Points and Sample Interval settings.
View Sequence Of Events Reporting. Clicking this button displays the Sequence of Events Reporting
screen (Figure 5-30). Sequence of Events Reporting screen displays and controls are described in the
Figure 5-30. Sequence of Event Reporting

Report Summary. This area of the Sequence of Event Recording screen lists the available sequence of
events records. The records displayed are determined by the selection made in the Display the Following
Events setting area.
Event List. This area of the Sequence of Event Recording screen lists the available sequence of events
records. The records displayed are determined by the selection made in the Display the Following Events
setting area.
Reset New Event List. Clicking this button clears all new events from the Event List.
Display the Following Events. The event type displayed in the Event List is controlled by selection made
here. Available event-type selections are New, All New and Old, New Alarm, New I/O, and New Mode.

Print/Save Report. Clicking this button allows the report to be saved as a text file or printed.
View and Download Data log. Clicking this button displays the Data Logging screen of Figure 5-31. Data
Logging screen displays and controls are described in the following paragraphs.
Figure 5-31. Data Logging Screen

Report Summary. This area of the Data Logging screen displays information such as the time and date,
station, device and user identification information, and the number of new and total records.
Event List. This area of the Sequence of Event Recording screen lists the available sequence of events
records. The records displayed are determined by the selection made in the Display the Following Events
setting area.
Selected Record Information. This area of the Data Logging screen displays information relating to the
data log record selected in the Record List. Displayed information includes the number of pre-trigger
points, number of post-trigger points, total number of points, the sample interval, and the number of
parameters reported.
Data Record List Options, Reset New Record Counter. Clicking this button resets the number of new
records reported in the Report Summary to zero.
Data Record List Options, Reset Total Record Counter. Clicking this button resets the number of total
records reported in the Report Summary to zero.
Data Record List Options, Trigger a Record. Clicking this button manually triggers data record acquisition.
A data log cannot be manually triggered unless data logging is enabled on the Log Setup/Sequence of
Events tab.
Data Record List Options, Stop Record. Clicking this button ends acquisition of a manually triggered data
record.
Data Record List Options, Refresh Summary and List. Clicking this button updates the Report Summary
data and Record List with the latest available information.
Data Record List Options, Download Selected Record. Clicking this button downloads the selected record
and allows it to be saved as either a text file or a COMTRADE file viewable in BESTwave.
Print/Save Report. Clicking this button allows a report to be either saved as a text file or printed.
Print/Save Record. Clicking this button allows a record to be either saved as a text file or printed.
Logic Triggers
Logic Triggers tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-32 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-32. Data Log Screen, Logic Triggers Tab
Contact Inputs. This area of the Logic Triggers tab lists the available DECS-200 contact inputs that can
be selected to trigger a data log report. The following contact inputs are available for triggering a data log
report:
• 52J/K • AVR • Secondary Enable
• 52L/M • FCR • Start
• Alarm Reset • Pre-Position • Stop
Any combination of contact inputs may be selected.
Relay Outputs. This area of the Logic Triggers tab lists the DECS-200 contact outputs that can be
selected to trigger a data log report. The following relay outputs are available for triggering a data log
report:
• Relay 1 • Relay 3 • Watchdog
• Relay 2 • Stop/Start
Any combination of relay outputs may be selected.
Alarm States. This area of the Logic Triggers tab lists the available alarm conditions that can be selected
to trigger a data log report. The following alarm conditions are available for triggering a data log report:
• Exciter field overcurrent • Generator sensing <10 Hz • Setpoint at upper limit
• Exciter field overvoltage • Generator undervoltage • Shorted exciter diode
• Exciter open diode • Loss of field • Stator current limit
• FCR mode • Loss of sensing • Underexcitation limit
• Generator overvoltage • Overexcitation limit • Underfrequency
• Setpoint at lower limit
Any combination of alarm states may be selected.
System Status, Start/Stop. Enables the Start or Stop mode to trigger a data log report. Selecting “No
Trigger” disables a Start or Stop mode trigger.
System Status, Soft Start. Enables a data log report to be triggered when Underfrequency protection is
active or inactive. Selecting “No Trigger” disables a Soft Start trigger.
System Status, Underfrequency. Enables a data log report to be triggered when either AVR mode or FCR
mode is active. Selecting “No Trigger” disables an Underfrequency trigger.
System Status, Control Mode. Enables a data log report to be triggered when either AVR mode or FCR
mode is active. Selecting “No Trigger” disables a control mode trigger.

System Status, Operating Mode. Enables a data log report to be triggered when power factor control is
active or var control is active. Selecting “No Trigger” disables an operating mode trigger.
System Status, Load Compensation. Enables a data log report to be triggered when droop compensation
is active or inactive. Selecting “No Trigger” disables a load compensation trigger.
System Status, Limiter Mode. Enables a data log report to be triggered when the underexcitation limiter,
overexcitation limiter, or stator current limiter are active. Additionally, a data log report can be triggered
when two of the limiters are active. The available limiter mode selections are listed below:
• No Trigger (disables a limiter mode trigger)
• OEL (overexcitation limiter active)
• Off (no limiters active)
• SCL (stator current limiter active)
• SCL, OEL (stator current limiter and overexcitation limiter active)
• SCL, UEL (stator current limiter and underexcitation limiter active)
• UEL (underexcitation limiter active)
• UEL, OEL (underexcitation limiter and overexcitation limiter active)
System Status, Voltage Matching. Enables a data log report to be triggered when voltage matching is
enabled (On) or disabled (Off). Selecting No Trigger disables a voltage matching trigger.
System Status, Auto Tracking. Enables a data log report to be triggered when the DECS-200 is
functioning as the primary controller or the secondary controller in a redundant DECS-200 system.
Selecting No Trigger disables an auto-tracking trigger.
Level Triggers/ Logged Parameters

The Level Triggers/Logged Parameters tab (Figure 5-33) consists of a list of parameters that can be
selected to trigger a data log report. Up to six parameters can be selected as triggers. Each parameter
has Level Trigger Enable buttons that are used to trigger a data log when the parameter increases above
the upper threshold setting, decreases below the lower threshold setting, or either increases above or
decreases below the upper or lower threshold setting. The available parameters that can be selected to
trigger a data log report are listed in Table 5-2.
Figure 5-33. Data Log Screen, Level Triggers/Logged Parameters

Table 5-2. Data Log Report Parameter Triggers
Unit of Threshold
Parameter Measure Lower Upper Increment
Auto Tracking Output N/A –65535 to 65535 –65535 to 65535 1
Auxiliary Input Voltage PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Average Gen. Voltage, L-L PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
AVR Error Signal N/A –65535 to 65535 –65535 to 65535 1
Bus Frequency Hz 0 to 90 0 to 90 0.01
Bus Voltage PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Control Output N/A –65535 to 65535 –65535 to 65535 1
Cross-Current Input PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Field Current PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Field Voltage PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Gen. Apparent Power kVA PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Gen. Reactive Power kvar PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Gen. Real Power kW PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Generator Current Ib PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Generator Frequency Hz 0 to 90 0 to 90 0.01
Generator Power Factor PF –1 to 1 –1 to 1 0.01
Generator Voltage Vab PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Generator Voltage Vbc PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Generator Voltage Vca PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Phase Angle, V-I Degrees –180 to 180 –180 to 180 0.01
PID Integrator State N/A –65535 to 65535 –65535 to 65535 1
Var/PF Controller Output N/A –65535 to 65535 –65535 to 65535 1
Metering
The Metering screen consists of two tabs labeled Operation and Alarm/Status. To view the Metering
screen, click the Metering button on the tool bar or click Screens on the menu bar and click
Metering/Operation.
Operation
Operation tab parameters and controls are illustrated in Figure 5-34 and described in the following
paragraphs.
DECS-200 BESTCOMS software provides real-time monitoring of the following data. This data is
refreshed approximately once every second. Metering is enabled or disabled through the pull-down menu
or by clicking the Metering button.
Real-time metering values on the Operation tab are refreshed approximately once per second. Metering
is enabled or disabled through the Metering menu on the menu bar or by clicking the Metering button.
Gen Voltage. Displays three values of generator voltage: Vab, Vbc, and Vca.
Gen Current. Displays phase B generator current.
Field Voltage. Displays the level of field voltage.
Field Current. Displays the level of field current.
EDM SD/OD Ripple. Displays the percentage of ripple detected across the exciter diodes by the exciter
diode monitor.
Bus Voltage. Displays the level of bus voltage.
Phase Angle. Displays the phase angle between the generator voltage and current.
Position Indication. Displays the relative position (in percent) of the current setpoint value to the
programmed minimum or maximum setpoint.
Figure 5-34. Metering Screen, Operation Tab
Frequency. Displays the frequency of the generator voltage and bus voltage.
Aux DC Input. Displays a value of voltage that is relative to the accessory input voltage or current,
depending on the mode selected.
Apparent Power. Displays the apparent power, in VA, being supplied by the generator.
Real Power. Displays the real power, in watts, being supplied by the generator.
Reactive Power. Displays the reactive power, in vars, being supplied by the generator.
Power Factor. Displays the operating power factor of the generator.
Tracking Error. Displays the ratio, expressed as a percentage, of the nominal value of the tracking mode
to the mode being tracked. For example, if operating in AVR mode with 100 Vac nominal generator
voltage and a tracking error of –0.5%, a transfer to another operating mode would cause a decrease in
generator output voltage to 99.5 Vac.
Control Mode. AVR and FCR mode status is reported by two indicators. When the DECS-200 is operating
in AVR mode, the AVR indicator changes from gray to red. When operating in FCR mode, the FCR
indicator changes from gray to green. A button is provided to toggle between AVR and FCR modes.
Operating Status. Three indicators report whether Var mode is active, Power Factor mode is active, or
neither mode is active. An option button below each indicator is used to select the corresponding
operating mode. When Var mode is active, the Var indicator changes from gray to green. When Power
Factor mode is active, the PF indicator changes from gray to red. When neither mode is active, the Off
indicator changes from gray to blue. If the control mode is FCR and Var of PF mode is selected, that
selection will be ignored by the DECS-200. Even if the Var or PF indicator turns on, the system will not be
in those modes unless the DECS-200 52J/K input is open. See Table 5-3 for additional information on
52J/K and 52L/M logic.
Table 5-3. 52J/K and 52L/M Logic
DECS-200 Operating Mode 52 L/M 52 J/K Generator Operating Mode
AVR mode active, off-line OEL Closed Closed Single unit/stand-alone
enabled, no droop, no var/PF
Droop mode active, on-line OEL Open Closed Paralleled to the utility grid (droop) or
enabled, no var/PF two or more generators islanded
(droop or cross-current compensation)
Var/PF mode active, on-line OEL Open Open Paralleled to utility grid
enabled

NOTE: If neither var nor power factor modes are selected via the operator interfaces, then the operating mode is
droop.
System Operating Status. Two indicators show the start/stop mode status of the DECS-200. in Start
mode, the START indicator changes from gray to red. In Stop mode, the STOP indicator changes from
gray to green. A button is provided for toggling between Start and Stop modes.
Pre-position Set. Clicking this button adjusts the excitation setpoint to the pre-position value.
Fine Adjustment. Clicking the Raise button increases the active operating setpoint. Clicking the Lower
button decreases the active operating setpoint. The raise and lower increment is a function of the setpoint
range of adjustment and the active operating setpoint. The raise and lower increment is a function of the
setpoint range of adjustment and the active mode traverse rate. The increments are directly proportional
to the adjustment range and inversely proportional to the traverse rate.
Alarm/Status
Alarm/Status tab indicators and controls are illustrated in Figure 5-35 and described in the following
paragraphs.
Figure 5-35. Metering Screen, Alarm/Status Tab

System Status. When any of the 15 conditions listed in Figure 5-35 exist, the corresponding indicator
changes from gray to red. Clicking the Reset Alarms button resets the system status annunciations. Any
condition that remains active will annunciate again after the Reset Alarms button is clicked.
Switch Status. Three indicators provide contact input status. The 52 JK indicator turns on when the 52J/K
contact input is open. The 52 LM indicator turns on when the 52L/M contact is open. The Secondary
DECS indicator turns on when the SECEN (secondary enable) contact input is closed.
Front Panel LED Signal Status. Six indicators provide remote indication of the front panel LEDs. Refer to
Section 2, Human-Machine Interface for information regarding the function of the front panel indicators.
SAVING, PRINTING, AND OPENING FILES

BESTCOMS provides the ability to save DECS-200 settings in a file for reference or future use. Using a
settings file can save setup time when configuring multiple units with the same configuration. Settings files
may be opened and edited using any text editing application. A settings file can also be printed from
BESTCOMS.
Saving Files
A DECS-200 settings file is saved through a Save As dialog box. The Save As dialog box is accessed by
using any of three methods:
• Click the Save File button on the tool bar
• Press Ctrl + A on the keyboard
• Click File, Save As on the menu bar
The Save As dialog box enables you to navigate to the desired folder and save the DECS-200 settings
file. DECS-200 setting files are saved with a .de2 extension.
Printing Files
A printed copy of DECS-200 settings can be made for record keeping or as a reference. Settings are
printed by accessing the print preview screen. The print preview screen is accessed by using any of three
methods:
• Click the Print Data button on the tool bar
• Press Ctrl + P on the keyboard
• Click File, Print on the menu bar
Executing a print command displays a user information box with fields for adding a title and comments to
the printout. Clicking OK or Cancel displays a print preview of the settings. The print preview screen
enables you to select a printer and configure the page layout (Print Setup button), print the settings list
(printer icon button), and save the list of settings in a text file (Save button). The BESTCOMS software
version, the DECS-200 firmware version, and the time and date are printed along with the settings.
Opening/Uploading Files
DECS-200 settings files can be opened by BESTCOMS and uploaded to a DECS-200 communicating
with the PC running BESTCOMS. A DECS-200 settings file is retrieved through the BESTCOMS Open
dialog box. The Open dialog box is accessed by using any of three methods:
• Click the File Open button on the tool bar
• Press Ctrl + O on the keyboard
• Click File, Open on the menu bar
The Open dialog box enables you to navigate to the desired settings file and retrieve the settings.
Settings can be retrieved into BESTCOMS and uploaded to the DECS-200 or retrieved into BESTCOMS
without uploading to the DECS-200. When you execute the Open command, a warning dialog box
appears. This dialog box warns you that equipment damage may occur as a result of the changes that
were made in the computer file. If you have confidence that no damage will occur, you may send the data
to the DECS-200.
CAUTION
A file data transfer while the DECS-200 is on-line may result in poor system
performance or equipment damage. Make sure that the new settings are safe to
upload before you transfer the data file.
If you select Yes, then 17 blocks of DECS-200 setting data are sent to the DECS-200 block by block.
Please wait until all 17 blocks of data have been transferred. When power is next applied to the DECS-
200 unit, the previously saved settings will become the current settings.
PID WINDOW
The PID window of BESTCOMS provides the ability to increase generator stability by changing the PID
(proportional + integral + derivative) parameters. PID parameters are calculated automatically after the
user selects the generator time constant (T’do) and/or exciter time constant (Texc).
The PID window is accessed by clicking the PID button on the tool bar. This button is enabled only when
the Control Gain screen is being viewed and the Stability Range setting is 21.
PID window functions are shown in Figure 5-36 and described in the following paragraphs.
Field Input Data, Generator Information. This setting field is used to enter and display a descriptive name
for the selected group of PID settings. The Generator Information field accepts up to 27 alphanumeric
characters.

Field Input Data, Generator Time Constant T’do. The time constant of the generator is entered in this
field. The generator time constant and exciter time constant are used to calculate gain parameters Kp, Ki,
and Kd. A setting of 1 to 15 may be selected from the pull-down menu.
Field Input Data, Exciter Time Constant Texc. The time constant of the exciter is entered in this field. The
exciter time constant and generator time constant are used to calculate gain parameters Kp, Ki, and Kd.
The exciter time constant setting range varies according to the generator time constant value selected.
The default value for the exciter time constant is the generator time constant divided by six.
Field Output Data, Gain Kp. This read-only field displays the calculated value of Kp based on the
generator time constant (T’do) and exciter time constant (Texc).
Field Output Data, Gain Ki. This read-only field displays the calculated value of Ki based on the generator
time constant (T’do) and exciter time constant (Te).
Field Output Data, Gain Kd. This read-only field displays the calculated value of Kd based on the
Figure 5-36. PID Window

Field Output Data – Gain Kg. This read-only field displays the calculated value of Kg based on the
Buttons below the Field Output Data fields enable existing PID records to be deleted (Remove Record),
enable calculated setting to be saved in a record (Add to PID List), enable a set of PID parameters to be
retrieved from the PID list and invoked, and update the PID settings displayed in the PID window and
used by the DECS-200 (Update Setting Screen). Clicking the Close button exits the PID window and
returns to the Control Gain screen.
PID List. This area of the PID window displays the groups of available PID settings.
PID Calculations Based On Input Values

The available exciter time constant range is determined by the generator time constant input value. (The
default value for the exciter time constant is the generator time constant divided by six (T’do ÷ 6).) The
generator time constant input value must be in the range of 1.0 to 15.0 seconds and in 0.05 second
increments. When the generator time constant value is 1.00, the available exciter time constant range is
0.03 to 0.50 in 0.01 second increments. When the generator time constant value is 15.00, the available
exciter time constant range is 0.30 to 3.00 in 0.01 second increments.
For example, when you set T’do = 2.0 seconds, Texc is 0.33. After specifying the input values, a set of
PID parameters (Output Data) is generated automatically. If you set T’do = 5.00 seconds, then Texc will
be 0.83 seconds. The calculated KP is 155.47, KI is 138.72, KD is 48, and Kg is 1.
PID parameters can be directly removed from, added to, or modified in the PID List Data. PID parameters
may also be saved into a file (pidlist.dat).

Adding To PID List
CAUTION
Improper PID numbers can result in poor system performance or equipment
damage.
PID parameters can be added to a list and recalled for operational use and comparison. To add to the list,
type the name for the generator (or other appropriate information) in the generator information box.
Choose the generator time constant and, if appropriate, the exciter time constant. Observe the PID gain
parameters in the Field Output Data boxes. If these gain parameters are appropriate, select the Add to
PID List button. To check for the new parameters, pull down the PID Parameters List (click on the down
arrow). The new gain and time constant parameters will be displayed.
Removing A PID List Record

PID parameters can also be removed from the list. To remove a list (record), pull down the PID
Parameters List and select the record or list so that the gain and time constant parameters are
displayed. Click the Remove Record button and the listed record is deleted.
Retrieving Existing Data From PID List

To retrieve existing data, pull down the PID Parameters List and select the record or list so that the gain
and time constant parameters are displayed and highlighted. Click the Get from a list button and the
listed record input and output data displays in the text boxes.
TERMINATING COMMUNICATION
Communication between BESTCOMS and the DECS-200 is terminated by clicking Communications on
the menu bar and clicking Close Comm Port.


SECTION 6 ● SETUP
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 6 ● SETUP................................................................................................................................ 6-1
INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................... 6-1
Equipment Required ........................................................................................................................... 6-1
System Data ....................................................................................................................................... 6-1
SETTINGS ENTRY ................................................................................................................................ 6-1
System Configuration Screen............................................................................................................. 6-1
Setting Adjustments Screen ............................................................................................................... 6-4
Protection/Relay Screen................................................................................................................... 6-10
OFF-LINE TESTS - TURBINE NOT SPINNING .................................................................................. 6-13
Start/Stop Tests ................................................................................................................................ 6-13
Control Gain Settings ....................................................................................................................... 6-14
PID Settings...................................................................................................................................... 6-14
OFF-LINE TESTS - TURBINE SPINNING .......................................................................................... 6-14
FCR Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 6-14
EXCITATION PERFORMANCE EVALUATION .................................................................................. 6-17
Off-Line Excitation Limiter Operation ............................................................................................... 6-17
Limit and Protection Check .............................................................................................................. 6-18
Parallel Operation, Generator On Line ............................................................................................. 6-18
Conclusion of Testing ....................................................................................................................... 6-20
Figures
Figure 6-1. System Options Tab................................................................................................................ 6-2
Figure 6-2. System Data Tab .................................................................................................................... 6-2
Figure 6-3. Rated Data Tab ....................................................................................................................... 6-3
Figure 6-4. Auxiliary Input Tab .................................................................................................................. 6-4
Figure 6-5. AVR/FCR Tab ......................................................................................................................... 6-5
Figure 6-6. Var/PF Tab .............................................................................................................................. 6-5
Figure 6-7. Startup Tab ............................................................................................................................. 6-6
Figure 6-8. Setting Adjustments Screen, OEL Type Tab .......................................................................... 6-7
Figure 6-9. OEL Summing Tab.................................................................................................................. 6-7
Figure 6-10. Setting Adjustments Screen, OEL (Takeover) Tab ............................................................... 6-8
Figure 6-11. UEL Tab ................................................................................................................................ 6-9
Figure 6-12. Setting Adjustments Screen, SCL Tab ................................................................................. 6-9
Figure 6-13. Protection Options Tab ....................................................................................................... 6-10
Figure 6-14. Protection Settings Tab ....................................................................................................... 6-11
Figure 6-15. Relay #1, #2 Logic Tab ....................................................................................................... 6-12
Figure 6-16. Relay Setting Tab................................................................................................................ 6-13
Figure 6-17. Field Voltage Output Waveform .......................................................................................... 6-15
Figure 6-18. KG Gain Effect on Generator Performance.......................................................................... 6-16
Figure 6-19. Insufficient Proportional Gain .............................................................................................. 6-16
Figure 6-20. Prolonged Instability ............................................................................................................ 6-16
Figure 6-21. Insufficient Derivative Gain ................................................................................................. 6-17
Figure 6-22. Final Solution Step Response ............................................................................................. 6-17
Tables
Table 6-1. Generator and Field Ratings .................................................................................................... 6-1
Table 6-2. Programmable Output Function Assignments ....................................................................... 6-12
9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 Setup i

ii DECS-200 Setup 9360100990 Rev H

SECTION 6 ● SETUP
INTRODUCTION
This section provides generic setup and operation procedures for excitation systems using the DECS-
200. These procedures are provided only as a guide and are not intended as a replacement for the setup
and operation procedures required by a specific system. In these procedures, DECS-200 settings are
entered through the BESTCOMS interface. Therefore, a PC operating with BESTCOMS software will
need to be connected to the DECS-200 being configured. For information about using BESTCOMS, refer
to Section 5, BESTCOMS Software.
Equipment Required
The following equipment is required to perform the procedures presented here:
• Two-channel chart recorder or the DECS-200’s oscillography. First channel measures the generator
voltage at DECS-200 terminals A1 (E1) and A3 (E3). Second channel measures the field voltage at
DECS-200 terminals C5 (F+) and C6 (F–).
• Oscilloscope
• Personal computer (PC) running BESTCOMS. The minimum requirements for a PC running
BESTCOMS are provided in Section 5, BESTCOMS Software.
• Nine-pin serial communication cable to connect the DECS-200 to the PC.
Basler Electric Application Note 126, while not required, provides helpful information about paralleling
circuits. This application note is available for downloading (in PDF format) from the Basler Electric website
at www.basler.com.
System Data
Record your system ratings in Table 6-1.
Table 6-1. Generator and Field Ratings
Generator Ratings Exciter Field Ratings
Voltage: Vac No-Load Voltage: Vdc
Frequency: Hz No-Load Current: Adc
Reactive Power: kvar Full-Load Voltage: Vdc
Rotational Speed: rpm Full-Load Current: Adc
SETTINGS ENTRY
The DECS-200 settings entered on each BESTCOMS screen should be evaluated to ensure that they are
appropriate for the application. When entering settings, remember to press the Enter key to save
individual settings or click the SendToDECS button to save all of the settings on a screen.
System Configuration Screen

As shown in the following paragraphs, enter the desired settings on each tab of the Configuration screen.
Review those settings and enable the functions that apply.
System Options
Select the desired system options illustrated in Figure 6-1.
Select the limiter mode ................................................................................................................. _________
Select the sensing configuration................................................................................................... _________
Select the underfrequency mode.................................................................................................. _________
Select the nominal generator frequency ....................................................................................... _________
Enable or disable voltage matching.............................................................................................. _________
9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 Setup 6-1
Figure 6-1. System Options Tab
System Data
Enter the system PT and CT ratings and configure the internal and external tracking settings illustrated in
Figure 6-2.
Figure 6-2. System Data Tab
Enter the generator PT primary voltage rating ............................................................................. ________
Enter the generator PT secondary voltage rating ......................................................................... ________
Enter the generator CT primary current rating ............................................................................. ________
6-2 DECS-200 Setup 9360100990 Rev H

Enter the generator CT secondary current rating ......................................................................... _________
Enter the bus PT primary voltage rating (if applicable) ................................................................ _________
Enter the bus PT secondary voltage rating (if applicable) ............................................................ _________
Enable or disable internal tracking ............................................................................................... _________
Set the internal tracking delay (1 second is suggested) ............................................................... _________
Set the internal tracking traverse rate (10 seconds is suggested) ............................................... _________
Enable or disable external tracking (applies only to redundant DECS-200 systems) .................. _________
Set the external tracking delay (applies only to redundant DECS-200 systems) ......................... _________
Set the external tracking traverse rate (applies only to redundant DECS-200 systems) ............. _________
Rated Data
Enter the generator and exciter field ratings and exciter-to-generator pole ratio settings illustrated in
Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-3. Rated Data Tab
Enter the rated generator terminal voltage ................................................................................... _________

Enter the rated generator current ................................................................................................. _________
Enter the rated generator power factor ........................................................................................ _________
Enter the exciter-to-generator pole ratio ....................................................................................... _________
Enter the rated exciter field voltage ............................................................................................. _________
Enter the rated exciter field current .............................................................................................. _________
Auxiliary Input
Configure the accessory input selections and settings illustrated in Figure 6-4.
Select either voltage or current as the accessory input type ........................................................ _________
Select either inner loop (AVR/FCR) or outer loop (var/PF) as the summing type ........................ _________
Enter the accessory input gain (multiplier) setting for AVR mode ................................................ _________
Enter the accessory input gain (multiplier) setting for FCR mode ................................................ _________
9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 Setup 6-3
Figure 6-4. Auxiliary Input Tab
Enter the accessory input gain (multiplier) setting for var mode .................................................. ________
Enter the accessory input gain (multiplier) setting for Power Factor mode .................................. ________
Enter the droop compensation level for paralleled generators or line-drop compensation .......... ________
Enter the cross-current compensation (reactive differential) gain for paralleled generators ........ ________
Setting Adjustments Screen

Enter the desired settings and enable the desired functions on each tab of the BESTCOMS Setting
Adjustments screen. Figures 6-5 through 6-9 illustrate the settings of each System Configuration screen
tab.
AVR/FCR
Configure the AVR mode and FCR mode settings illustrated in Figure 6-5. During commissioning, review
setpoints unique for starting; especially review those for the FCR (manual) mode where the system would
be started at the no-load excitation value or less. If pre-position is used, set the pre-position values as
required.
Enter the AVR setpoint based on the generator terminal voltage ................................................ ________
Enter the minimum desired AVR mode setpoint, expressed as a percent of nominal ................. ________
Enter the maximum desired AVR mode setpoint, expressed as a percent of nominal ................ ________
Enter the AVR mode traverse rate ............................................................................................... ________
Enter the AVR mode pre-position setpoint ................................................................................... ________
Select either maintain or release as the AVR pre-position mode ................................................. ________
Enter the field current setpoint for FCR mode .............................................................................. ________
Enter the minimum desired FCR mode setpoint, expressed as a percent of nominal ................. ________
Enter the maximum desired FCR mode setpoint, expressed as a percent of nominal ................ ________
Enter the FCR mode traverse rate ............................................................................................... ________
6-4 DECS-200 Setup 9360100990 Rev H

Figure 6-5. AVR/FCR Tab
Enter the FCR mode pre-position setpoint ................................................................................... _________

Select either maintain or release as the FCR pre-position mode ................................................. _________
Var/PF
Configure the var mode and power factor mode settings illustrated in Figure 6-7. If var or PF mode is
enabled, the setpoint will be active only after transfer occurs into the specific mode because autotracking
always forces a null condition to any operating mode.
Figure 6-6. Var/PF Tab
9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 Setup 6-5

Enter the var mode setpoint ......................................................................................................... ________
Enter the minimum desired var mode setpoint, expressed as a percent of nominal ................... ________
Enter the maximum desired var mode setpoint, expressed as a percent of nominal .................. ________
Enter the var mode traverse rate .................................................................................................. ________
Enter the var mode pre-position setpoint...................................................................................... ________
Select either maintain or release as the var pre-position mode ................................................... ________
Set the voltage correction band for var and PF modes ................................................................ ________
Enter the PF mode setpoint .......................................................................................................... ________
Enter the limit for leading power factor ......................................................................................... ________
Enter the limit for lagging power factor ......................................................................................... ________
Enter the PF mode traverse rate .................................................................................................. ________
Enter the PF mode pre-position setpoint ...................................................................................... ________
Select either maintain or release as the PF pre-position mode ................................................... ________
Startup
Configure the startup control, underfrequency, and voltage matching settings illustrated in Figure 6-7.
Figure 6-7. Startup Tab

Enter the soft-start voltage offset used during startup.................................................................. ________
Enter the soft-start time limit used during startup ......................................................................... ________
Enter the corner frequency for generator underfrequency protection .......................................... ________
Enter the generator frequency slope for underfrequency protection ............................................ ________
Enter the voltage matching band, expressed as a percent of the rated generator voltage .......... ________
Enter the ratio (percentage) of the generator PT output to the bus PT output ............................. ________
6-6 DECS-200 Setup 9360100990 Rev H

OEL Type
Select either Summing Point or Takeover as the overexcitation limiter style. Select the desired OEL
setting selection option. OEL Type tab selections are illustrated in Figure 6-8.
Figure 6-8. Setting Adjustments Screen, OEL Type Tab
Summing-Point OEL
If summing-point overexcitation limiting is enabled, configure the off- and on-line OEL settings illustrated
in Figure 6-10.
Figure 6-9. OEL Summing Tab
9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 Setup 6-7

Enter the high-level current setpoint for off-line overexcitation limiting ........................................ ________
Enter the duration for high-level, off-line overexcitation limiting ................................................... ________
Enter the low-level current setpoint for off-line overexcitation limiting ......................................... ________
Enter the high-level current setpoint for on-line overexcitation limiting ........................................ ________
Enter the duration for high-level, on-line overexcitation limiting ................................................... ________
Enter the medium-level current setpoint for on-line overexcitation limiting .................................. ________
Enter the duration for medium-level, on-line overexcitation limiting ............................................. ________
Enter the low-level current setpoint for on-line overexcitation limiting ......................................... ________
Takeover OEL
If takeover style overexcitation limiting is enabled, configure the off- and on-line OEL settings illustrated in
Figure 6-10.
Figure 6-10. Setting Adjustments Screen, OEL (Takeover) Tab
Enter the low-level current setpoint for off-line overexcitation limiting ......................................... ________
Enter the high-level current setpoint for off-line overexcitation limiting ........................................ ________
Enter the time delay for off-line overexcitation limiting ................................................................. ________
Enter the low-level current setpoint for on-line overexcitation limiting ......................................... ________
Enter the high-level current setpoint for on-line overexcitation limiting ........................................ ________
Enter the time delay for on-line overexcitation limiting ................................................................. ________
UEL
Set the underexcitation limiter values based on the generator capability curve. Either internal or
customized UEL settings can be applied. When internal UEL settings are used, only one data point is
required. When customized UEL settings are used, up to five data coordinates may be entered to match a
specific generator curve. Figure 6-11 illustrates the settings of the UEL tab.
6-8 DECS-200 Setup 9360100990 Rev H

Figure 6-11. Setting Adjustments Screen, UEL Tab
SCL
Configure the stator current limiter settings illustrated in Figure 6-12.
Figure 6-12. Setting Adjustments Screen, SCL Tab

Enter the high-level current setpoint for stator current limiting ..................................................... _________
Enter the duration for high-level stator current limiting ................................................................. _________
Enter the low-level current setpoint for stator current limiting ...................................................... _________
9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 Setup 6-9

Protection/Relay Screen
Enter the desired settings and enable the desired functions on each tab of the BESTCOMS
Protection/Relay screen. Figures 6-13 through 6-16 illustrate the settings of each Protection/Relay screen
tab.
Options
Enable/disable the protection functions and configure the loss of sensing voltage settings illustrated in
Figure 6-13.
Figure 6-13. Protection Options Tab

Enable or disable generator overvoltage protection ..................................................................... ________
Enable or disable field overvoltage protection .............................................................................. ________
Enable or disable open exciter diode protection .......................................................................... ________
Enable or disable generator undervoltage protection................................................................... ________
Enable or disable field overcurrent protection .............................................................................. ________
Enable or disable shorted exciter diode protection ...................................................................... ________
Enable or disable loss of field protection ...................................................................................... ________
Enable or disable loss of sensing voltage protection ................................................................... ________
Enter the time delay for loss of sensing annunciation .................................................................. ________
Enter the balanced loss of sensing threshold ............................................................................... ________
Enter the unbalanced loss of sensing threshold ........................................................................... ________
Enable or disable a transfer to FCR mode when loss of sensing is detected .............................. ________
Settings
Enter the protection settings illustrated in Figure 6-14. Only protection functions enabled on the Options
tab need to be configured here.
Enter the threshold for generator overvoltage protection ............................................................. ________
Enter the time delay for generator overvoltage protection ........................................................... ________
6-10 DECS-200 Setup 9360100990 Rev H

Figure 6-14. Protection Settings Tab
Enter the threshold for field overvoltage protection ...................................................................... _________

Enter the time delay for field overvoltage protection .................................................................... _________
Enter the percent of rated field current that indicates an open exciter diode ............................... _________
Enter the percent of rated field current that disables open- and shorted-diode protection .......... _________
Enter the annunciation time delay for open exciter diode protection ........................................... _________
Enter the threshold for generator undervoltage protection ........................................................... _________
Enter the time delay for generator undervoltage protection ......................................................... _________
Enter the threshold for field overcurrent protection ...................................................................... _________
Enter the time delay for field overcurrent protection..................................................................... _________
Enter the percent of rated field current that indicates a shorted exciter diode ............................. _________
Enter the annunciation time delay for shorted exciter diode protection ....................................... _________
Enter the threshold for loss of field protection .............................................................................. _________
Enter the time delay for loss of field protection ............................................................................ _________
Relay Logic
Review the excitation system interconnection drawings and verify the relay configurations. Relay logic
settings for each of the three DECS-200 programmable outputs are contained on two tabs with identical
configuration options. Only the tab for Relays 1 and 2 is illustrated here (Figure 6-15). Table 6-2 lists all of
the available functions that can be assigned to the programmable outputs. Checkmarks may be placed in
Table 6-2 to identify the functions assigned to each relay output.
9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 Setup 6-11

Figure 6-15. Relay #1, #2 Logic Tab
Table 6-2. Programmable Output Function Assignments
Relay
Function 1 2 3
Generator overvoltage
Generator undervoltage
Loss of sensing voltage
Open exciter diode
Loss of field
Field overvoltage
Field overcurrent
Sensing input below 10 Hz
Shorted exciter diode
FCR mode
Upper setpoint limit
Lower setpoint limit
Overexcitation limit
Underexcitation limit
Underfrequency or V/Hz limit
Stator current limit
6-12 DECS-200 Setup 9360100990 Rev H

Relay Setting
Configure the contact status and type settings illustrated in Figure 6-16.
Select the Relay #1 contact status as normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC) ................... _________
Configure the Relay #1 contact type as momentary, maintained, or latched ............................... _________
If the Relay #2 contact type is momentary, enter the open/closed contact duration .................... _________
Figure 6-16. Relay Setting Tab
OFF-LINE TESTS - TURBINE NOT SPINNING

In the following tests, control of the machine is demonstrated via BESTCOMS, front panel HMI, and user-
supplied, remote switches. These tests ensure that the machine is not stressed because of incorrect
wiring or faulty components. The parameters listed here are only temporary, initial settings.
Start/Stop Tests
Check the operation of the following start and stop controls.
BESTCOMS Metering Screen, Operation tab .............................................................................. _________
DECS-200 front panel .................................................................................................................. _________

Remote switches .......................................................................................................................... _________
With excitation off, check AVR/FCR transfer from the BESTCOMS, the front panel, and
remote switches ............................................................................................................................ _________
9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 Setup 6-13

Verify transfer indications from the remote status indicators, front panel HMI, or
BESTCOMS interface ................................................................................................................... ________
Check the raise and lower limits ................................................................................................... ________
Verify raise/lower limit indications from the remote status indicators, front panel HMI,
or BESTCOMS interface .............................................................................................................. ________
Control Gain Settings

Configure the initial gain settings.
Set the generator no-load setpoint in FCR mode (20% of exciter rated current recommended). ________
On the Control Gain screen, enter 200 in the FCR loop gain settings field ................................. ________
Enter the following recommended gain settings for OEL, UEL, and Var/PF.
Set OEL KI at 3 ............................................................................................................................. ________
Set OEL Kg at 5 ............................................................................................................................ ________
Set UEL KI at 3 ............................................................................................................................. ________
Set UEL Kg at 5 ............................................................................................................................ ________
Set var/PF KI at 3 ......................................................................................................................... ________
Set var/PF Kg at 5 ........................................................................................................................ ________
PID Settings
On the Control Gain screen, click the tool bar PID button to open the PID window. (The Control Gain
screen Stability Range setting must be 21.) Use the PID window to select the correct PID values based
on generator time constant T’do and exciter time constant Te. For more information about PID settings,
refer to Section 5, BESTCOMS Software, PID Window.
NOTE
If proper startup is not achieved, increase the value of loop gain (Kg) for AVR
and FCR modes.
The following suggested settings may be used for AVR and FCR modes when the generator and exciter
time constants are unknown.
Set KP at 80 .................................................................................................................................. ________
Set KI at 20 ................................................................................................................................... ________
Set KD at 15 ................................................................................................................................. ________
Set AVR Kg at 7............................................................................................................................ ________
Set TD at 0.01 ............................................................................................................................... ________
Set FCR Kg at 400........................................................................................................................ ________
Verify transfer indications from the remote status indicators, front panel HMI or BESTCOMS
OFF-LINE TESTS - TURBINE SPINNING

For off-line tests with the turbine spinning, the generator circuit breaker is open.
FCR Mode
Initial testing should be conducted in FCR (manual) mode and minimum generated voltage.
Place the DECS-200 in FCR mode .............................................................................................. ________
Place the Start/Stop switch in the Start position ........................................................................... ________
6-14 DECS-200 Setup 9360100990 Rev H

Generator output voltage should build to a percentage of the rated voltage. (The FCR setpoint was set at
20% of the no-load excitation current in a previous step.) ........................................................... _________
Increase the exciter field rated current to 75% of current ............................................................ _________
The generator output voltage should build to a percentage of the rated voltage ......................... _________
Use an oscilloscope to check the field voltage for proper output (see Figure 6-17) .................... _________
Figure 6-17. Field Voltage Output Waveform

Use a voltmeter to check for correct voltage at generator sensing voltage terminals A1 (E1),
A2 (E2), and A3 (E3) .................................................................................................................... _________
Measure the PT secondary voltages ............................................................................................ _________
Use the Raise/Lower control to raise the terminal voltage to the rated generator level............... _________
Place the Start/Stop switch in the Stop position and let the generator voltage decrease to
the residual level ........................................................................................................................... _________
Place the Start/Stop switch in the Start position to initiate buildup again in FCR mode .............. _________
Record the voltage buildup characteristic as it reaches full, rated output .................................... _________
Using the BESTCOMS Analysis Screen, perform 5% step change in FCR mode ...................... _________
Decrease value, then increase the value. Observe stable performance with chart recorder....... _________
Note the Overshoot and settling time. (The FCR output should be very stable.) ......................... _________
Verify that the AVR setpoint tracks the FCR setpoint, then transfer. During this test, use the Tracking
Error display of the BESTCOMS Metering screen to verify that the tracking value is stable before
transferring.
NOTE
In the following steps, verify that, if the pre-position setpoint is enabled, the
setpoint changes to the assigned value.
Verify that FCR autotracking follows, and is nulled to AVR, then transfer ................................... _________
Use a chart recorder or BESTCOMS oscillography to perform a step response in AVR mode... _________
Review the PID numbers .............................................................................................................. _________
On the System Options tab of the BESTCOMS System Configuration screen, turn all
limiters off ..................................................................................................................................... _________
Perform a 2% voltage step response and record performance to verify stability ......................... _________
Adjust the PID values until desired performance is achieved. If performance appears stable,
repeat step change at 5%.. ........................................................................................................... _________
NOTE
Assuming Te (exciter field) is known (as applicable for exciter field voltage
regulator applications), increasing Kg will decrease the response time of the
generator. See Figure 6-21.
9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 Setup 6-15

Figure 6-18. KG Gain Effect on Generator Performance
When individual adjustment is needed to further refine performance, Figures 6-22 through 6-25
demonstrate the effect that PID changes have for additional control. These figures have a one second
major division.
In Figure 6-22, the generator voltage exhibits one under-damp (overshoot) and one over-damp
(undershoot) before settling. The total time (five seconds) is too long. Here KP (proportional gain) needs
to be increased.
Figure 6-19. Insufficient Proportional Gain
Figure 6-23 demonstrates that the terminal voltage has prolonged instability after a voltage step change
because there is too much integral gain (I). Integral gain value needs to be decreased.
Figure 6-20. Prolonged Instability
6-16 DECS-200 Setup 9360100990 Rev H

In Figure 6-24, less overshoot is desired, KD (derivative gain) is increased.
Figure 6-21. Insufficient Derivative Gain
Figure 6-25 illustrates the final solution. Increased KD (derivative gain) decreases voltage overshoot.
Figure 6-22. Final Solution Step Response
Place the Start/Stop Switch in the Stop position .......................................................................... _________

Place the system in AVR mode .................................................................................................... _________
Monitor the generator voltage soft start time ................................................................................ _________
Place the Start/Stop Switch in the Start position .......................................................................... _________
Use the Raise/Lower control to increase the terminal voltage to the setpoint ............................. _________
EXCITATION PERFORMANCE EVALUATION

In this performance evaluation, temporarily settings will be used to enable the testing of excitation
performance without stressing the machine or exceeding ancillary protection device settings. Procedures
are provided that will allow you to set your final operating values. This evaluation is a continuation of the
previous tests.
Off-Line Excitation Limiter Operation

In this test, with the generator set below the rated voltage output, the AVR setpoint will be set above the
maximum setting and the system should annunciate an alarm. If an alarm is not annuciated, the OEL gain
(KI and Kg) may be set too low. If an alarm is annunciated and the system oscillates, the OEL gain, (KI
and Kg) may be set too high.
Enable the Off-Line Overexcitation Limiter (OEL) ........................................................................ _________
Determine the field current required to reach 105% of the rated generator voltage. ................... _________
Set the off-line OEL for a value equal to the no load field current ................................................ _________
Lower the terminal voltage to 10% below rated ........................................................................... _________
To speed performance in the following test, you may increase the OEL gain (KI and Kg terms).
On the AVR/FCR tab of the BESTCOMS Setting Adjustments screen, adjust the AVR setpoint
to 110% of the rated output. (the AVR Max setting should remain at 105%.) .............................. _________
9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 Setup 6-17

If an output relay is programmed to alarm, the output, BESTCOMS, front panel HMI, and
any remote indicator should annunciate the alarm. ...................................................................... ________
Reset the AVR setpoint to the rated output .................................................................................. ________
Limit and Protection Check

In this test, operation of generator overvoltage protection, generator undervoltage protection, field
overvoltage protection, and field overcurrent protection will be verified.
Review the overvoltage protection settings in BESTCOMS ......................................................... ________
Reduce the Generator Overvoltage Level setting to the alarm threshold .................................... ________
Verify that all alarms and annunciation function as programmed ................................................ ________
Reset the generator Overvoltage Level setting to the desired value ........................................... ________
Raise the Generator Undervoltage Level setting to the alarm threshold ..................................... ________
Verify that all alarms and annunciations function as programmed ............................................... ________
Reset the Generator Undervoltage Level setting to the desired value......................................... ________
Reduce the Exciter Field Overvoltage Level setting to the alarm threshold................................. ________
Verify that all alarms and annunciations function as programmed ............................................... ________
Reduce the Exciter Field Overvoltage Level setting to the desired value .................................... ________
Reduce the Exciter Field Overcurrent Level setting to the alarm threshold ................................. ________
Verify all alarms and annunciations function as programmed ...................................................... ________
Reset the Exciter Field Overcurrent Level setting to the desired value ....................................... ________
Parallel Operation, Generator On Line

In this test, the generator is connected to the bus and the phase relationship between the current and
sensed voltage is checked. If the polarity of the CT is incorrect, a shorting terminal block can be used to
reverse the CT polarity. If sensed voltage has the wrong phasing, the generator breaker must be opened,
and the wiring corrected. In the following procedures, overexcitation and underexcitation protection is
exercised, and var and power factor performance evaluations are conducted at levels that will not stress
the machine. For more information about paralleling circuits, download Application Note 126 from the
Basler Electric website at www.basler.com.
Phase Relationship Test
Transfer to FCR mode .................................................................................................................. ________
Parallel the generator with the bus ............................................................................................... ________
Set the machine kilowatt level at approximately 25% of the machine rating at 0 vars ................. ________
Check for phase shift at the voltage and current sensing inputs of the DECS-200.
The B-phase current should lag the sensed voltage (between E1 and E3) by 90°. If the
phase relationship is correct, proceed with testing. If the phase relationship is incorrect,
troubleshoot the system, resolve the problem, and retest as appropriate before transferring
to AVR mode. ............................................................................................................................... ________
Verify that the AVR setpoint is nulled to the FCR setpoint ........................................................... ________
Verify that all null status indicators provide the null indication ..................................................... ________
Verify that AVR Pre-position mode is disabled or that the external pre-position contacts
are open. ....................................................................................................................................... ________
In the following step, be prepared to transfer back to Manual mode if the excitation voltage increases
suddenly.
Transfer to AVR ............................................................................................................................ ________
6-18 DECS-200 Setup 9360100990 Rev H

OEL Test
Disable overexcitation limiting on the System Options tab of the BESTCOMS System
Configuration screen .................................................................................................................... _________
Set the three on-line, OEL current limits at 15% above the no-load field current, with
a 5 second time delay ................................................................................................................... _________
Using a chart recorder, prepare to check the OEL response time. If the response time is too slow,
increase the OEL gain (KI and Kg terms) and repeat the test.
Increase field excitation until the field current reaches 125% of the no load field current setting _________
Enable OEL .................................................................................................................................. _________
Verify that the response time is within specified limits ................................................................. _________
Enter final OEL values .................................................................................................................. _________
UEL Test
Disable underexcitation limiting on the System Options tab of the BESTCOMS System
Configuration screen .................................................................................................................... _________
Set the UEL var limit for 5% vars into the generator .................................................................... _________
Adjust the var level into the generator for 15% at 25% load ........................................................ _________
Perform a step response into the UEL limit by enabling underexcitation limiting on the System
Options tab of the BESTCOMS System Configuration screen .................................................... _________
Verify stable performance and speed of response ....................................................................... _________
If the response time is too slow, increase the UEL gain (KI and Kg terms) and repeat the test .. _________
Verify stable performance of the UEL by testing the machine from 25 through 100%
real-power loading, underexcited ................................................................................................. _________
Increase the excitation above the UEL limit ................................................................................. _________
Enter the final UEL values ............................................................................................................ _________
Var Test (If Applicable)
Verify that the var setpoint is nulled to the AVR setpoint ............................................................. _________
Verify that all null status indicators provide a null indication ........................................................ _________
Verify that the var Pre-Position mode is disabled or the external pre-position contacts are open _________
In the following step, be prepared to transfer back to AVR if the excitation voltage increases suddenly.
Transfer to var mode .................................................................................................................... _________
Set the kilowatt level for 25% output ............................................................................................ _________
Adjust the var level to 30% of rated .............................................................................................. _________
Monitor the exciter field voltage to determine performance while performing the following step.
Using BESTCOMS, perform 5% step response stability test ....................................................... _________
If necessary, increase the var gain, (KI and Kg terms) to decrease the response time.
Repeat the test. ............................................................................................................................
Power Factor Test (If Applicable)
Verify that the PF mode setpoint is nulled to the var mode setpoint ............................................ _________
Verify that all null status indicators provide a null indication ........................................................ _________
Verify that PF Pre-Position mode is disabled or external pre-position contacts are open ........... _________
In the following step, be prepared to transfer back to AVR mode if the excitation voltage increases
suddenly.
Transfer to PF ............................................................................................................................... _________
9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 Setup 6-19

Adjust PF for 0.9, lagging ............................................................................................................. ________
Perform a step response by changing PF setpoint to 0.85, lagging to determine stability .......... ________
If necessary, increase the PF gain (KI and Kg terms) to decrease the response time.
Repeat the test ............................................................................................................................. ________
Conclusion of Testing
Configure the excitation system with the required parameters. Once satisfactory performance is achieved,
save all information to EEPROM.
6-20 DECS-200 Setup 9360100990 Rev H

SECTION 7 ● MODBUS™ COMMUNICATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 7 ● MODBUS™ COMMUNICATION........................................................................................ 7-1

INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................... 7-1
DECS-200 MODBUS PROTOCOL ........................................................................................................ 7-1
MESSAGE STRUCTURE ...................................................................................................................... 7-1
Device Address Field ......................................................................................................................... 7-1
Function Code Field ........................................................................................................................... 7-2
Data Block Field ................................................................................................................................. 7-2
Error Check Field ............................................................................................................................... 7-2
SERIAL TRANSMISSION DETAILS ...................................................................................................... 7-2
Message Framing and Timing Considerations .................................................................................. 7-3
Error Handling and Exception Responses ......................................................................................... 7-3
COMMUNICATIONS HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 7-3
DETAILED MESSAGE QUERY AND RESPONSE ............................................................................... 7-4
Read Holding Registers ..................................................................................................................... 7-4
Preset Multiple Registers ................................................................................................................... 7-4
Preset Single Register (Write Single Holding Register) ..................................................................... 7-5
Error Response .................................................................................................................................. 7-5
Loop Back Diagnostic Test (FC= 8) with Diagnostic Sub-function, Return Query Data .................... 7-6
Loop Back Diagnostic Test with Diagnostic Sub-function, Restart Communications Option ............ 7-6
Loop Back Diagnostic Test with Diagnostic Sub-function, Force Slave to Listen Only Mode ........... 7-6
DATA FORMATS ................................................................................................................................... 7-6
Generic Types UI8 and I8 .................................................................................................................. 7-7
Generic Types UI16 and I16 .............................................................................................................. 7-7
Generic Types UI32 and I32 .............................................................................................................. 7-7
Floating Point (R23_32) Data Format ................................................................................................ 7-8
CRC ERROR CHECK ............................................................................................................................ 7-9
DECS-200 MODBUS REGISTER SPACE ............................................................................................ 7-9
DECS-200 REGISTER TABLE ............................................................................................................ 7-10
Holding Registers for Information Category C1 ............................................................................... 7-10
Holding Registers for Information Category C10 ............................................................................. 7-22
Tables
Table 7-1. DECS-200 Communication Settings ........................................................................................ 7-2
Table 7-2. Timing Considerations for 10 Character Bits (8 Data Bits + 1 Start Bit + 1 Stop Bit) .............. 7-3
Table 7-3. Supported Exception Response Codes ................................................................................... 7-3
Table 7-4. Generic Data Types and Description ....................................................................................... 7-7
Table 7-5. HR 44005 Contents .................................................................................................................. 7-7
Table 7-6. HR 47003 Mapping .................................................................................................................. 7-7
Table 7-7. Typical Mapping ....................................................................................................................... 7-8
Table 7-8. Floating Point Format ............................................................................................................... 7-8
9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 Modbus™ Communication i

Table 7-9. Number 123 in Floating Point Format ...................................................................................... 7-8
Table 7-10. Information Category Summary ............................................................................................. 7-9
Table 7-11. Information Category C1 (Product Information) ................................................................... 7-10
Table 7-12. Information Category C2 (Metering) ..................................................................................... 7-12
Table 7-13. Information Category C3 (Reporting) ................................................................................... 7-14
Table 7-14. Information Category C4 (Control System Configuration Parameters) ................................ 7-14
Table 7-15. Information Category C5 (Operating Mode Parameters) ..................................................... 7-15
Table 7-16. Information Category C6 (Setpoint Parameters) .................................................................. 7-17
Table 7-17. Information Category C7 (Startup Parameters) ................................................................... 7-19
Table 7-18. Information Category C8 (Limiter Parameters) .................................................................... 7-20
Table 7-19. Information Category C9 (Control Loop Gain Parameters).................................................. 7-21
Table 7-20. Information Category C10 (Protective Functions Parameters) ............................................ 7-22
Table 7-21. Information Category C11 (Calibration related Parameters)................................................ 7-23
Table 7-22. Information Category C12 (Relay Parameters) .................................................................... 7-23
Table 7-23. Information Category C13 (Communications Parameters) .................................................. 7-26
Table 7-24. Information Category C14 (Front Panel Metering Configuration Parameters) ..................... 7-27
Table 7-25. Information Category C15 (Control System Configuration Parameters Group II) ................ 7-27
ii DECS-200 Modbus™ Communication 9360100990 Rev H

SECTION 7 ● MODBUS™ COMMUNICATION
INTRODUCTION
This section describes the Modbus™ communication protocol employed by the DECS-200 and how to
exchange information with the DECS-200 over a Modbus™ network. The DECS-200 communicates by
emulating a subset of the Modicon™ 984 Programmable Controller.
DECS-200 MODBUS PROTOCOL

Modbus™ communications use a master-slave technique in which only the master can initiate a
transaction called a query. When appropriate, a slave (DECS-200) responds to the query. When a
Modbus™ master communicates with a slave, information is provided or requested by the master.
Information residing in the DECS-200 is grouped characteristically in categories. The following information
categories are maintained by the DECS-200:
C1 - Product Information Registers
C2 - Metering Registers
C3 - Reporting Registers
C4 - Control System Configuration Parameters Registers Group 1
C5 - Operating Mode Parameter Registers
C6 - Setpoints Parameter Registers
C7 - Startup Parameter Registers
C8 - Limiter Parameter Registers
C9 - Gains Registers
C10 - Protective Functions Parameter Registers
C11 - Calibration Parameter Registers
C12 - Relay Parameter Registers
C13 - Communications Parameter Registers
C14 - Front Panel Metering Configuration Registers
C15 - Control System Configuration Parameters Registers Group 2
All supported data can be read or written as specified in the register table. Abbreviations are used in the
register table to indicate the register access type. Register access types are read/write (RW) and read
only (R -).
All categories except Product Information (C1), Metering (C2), Reporting (C3), and Calibration (C11) can
generally be written via a Modbus message as well as read. Categories C1 and C2 are strictly read-only.
(Categories C3 and C11 are currently not supported and therefore cannot be read or written.)
When a slave receives a query, the slave responds by either supplying the requested data to the master
or performing the requested action. A slave device never initiates communications on the Modbus
network and will always generate a response to the query unless certain error conditions occur. The
DECS-200 is designed to communicate on the Modbus network only as a slave device.
A master can only query slaves individually. If a query requests actions unable to be performed by the
slave, the slave response message contains an exception response code defining the error detected.
MESSAGE STRUCTURE
Master initiated queries and DECS-200 (slave) responses share the same message structure. Each
message is comprised of four message fields. They are:
• Device Address (1 byte)
• Function Code (1 byte)
• Data Block (n bytes)
• Error Check field (2 bytes)
Device Address Field
The device address field contains the unique Modbus™ address of the slave being queried. The
addressed slave repeats the address in the device address field of the response message. This field is
one byte.
9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 Modbus™ Communication 7-1

Modbus™ protocol limits a device address from 1 to 247. The address is user-selectable at installation,
and can be altered during real-time operation.
Function Code Field

The function code field in the query message defines the action to be taken by the addressed slave. This
field is echoed in the response message and is altered by setting the most significant bit (MSB) of the
field to 1 if the response is an error response. This field is 1 byte.
The DECS-200 maps all registers into the Modicon™ 984 holding register address space (4XXXX) and
supports the following function codes:
- READ OUTPUT REGISTERS (function code 3),
- PRESET SINGLE REGISTER WRITE (function code 6)
- PRESET MULTIPLE REGISTERS (function code 16), and
- LOOPBACK DIAGNOSTIC TEST (function code 8) with diagnostic sub-functions:
- Return Query Data (diagnostic code 0),
- Restart Comm. option (diagnostic code 1), and
- Force Slave To Listen Only Mode (LOM, diagnostic code 4).
DECS-200 Modbus™ performs all of the above functions when a Modbus™ message has its unique
address which is numbered from 1 to 247. DECS-200 also recognizes a broadcast (group) address of 0.
Only functions 16 and 8 are recognized as valid for broadcast. The DECS-200 does not send a response
message for a broadcast query.
In listen-only mode (LOM), received data is monitored (but no responses are transmitted). The only query
that will be recognized and processed while in LOM is a maintenance restart command (function code 8,
diagnostic code 1).
Data Block Field

The query data block contains additional information needed by the slave to perform the requested
function. The response data block contains data collected by the slave for the queried function. An error
response will substitute an exception response code for the data block. The length of this field varies with
each query. See the paragraphs on Register Definitions in this manual for interpretation of register data.
Error Check Field

The error check field provides a method for the slave to validate the integrity of the query message
contents and allows the master to confirm there validity. This field is 2 bytes.
SERIAL TRANSMISSION DETAILS

A standard Modbus™ network offers two transmission modes for communication: ASCII or Remote
Terminal Unit (RTU). The DECS-200 supports only the RTU mode via rear RS-485 serial interface.
Communication settings for the DECS-200 Rear RS-485 port are listed in Table 7-1.
Table 7-1. DECS-200 Communication Settings
Default
Setting Programmable Y(Yes) / N(No) Value Value Range
Baud Rate Y 9600 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200
Data Size in Bits N 8 N/A
Parity Y None ‘N’=None, ‘O’=Odd, ‘E’=Even
Stop Bits Y 2 1 or 2
Modbus Slave Y 247 0 for broadcast, 1 to 247 for slave
Address
Modbus Y 10 ms From 0 to 200 ms in increments of
Response Delay 10 ms
Time in ms
Communication settings are user-selectable and can be set at installation and altered during real-time
operation.
7-2 DECS-200 Modbus™ Communication 9360100990 Rev H

Message Framing and Timing Considerations
When receiving a message, the DECS-200 requires an inter-byte latency of 3.5 character times before
considering the message complete.
Once a valid query is received, the DECS-200 waits a specified amount of time as specified in the
Modbus Response Delay Time Register (48108) before responding. This Register contains a value from
0 to 200 milliseconds. The default value is 10 milliseconds. The user may set the remote delay time
parameter to 0 to minimize response latency.
Table 7-2 provides the response message transmission time (in milliseconds) and 3.5 character times (in
milliseconds) for the maximum response message length (225 characters), response to a read query for
125 points and various baud rates.
Table 7-2. Timing Considerations for 10 Character Bits (8 Data Bits + 1 Start Bit + 1 Stop Bit)
1 Character 3.5 Characters Max. Read Register Response Message
Baud Rate Time (ms) Time (ms) (255 characters) Transmission Time (ms)
1,200 8.33 29.17 2,124.15
2,400 4.17 14.58 1,063.35
4,800 2.083 7.292 531.165
9,600 1.0417 3.645 265.6335
19,200 0.52083 1.823 132.812
Error Handling and Exception Responses

Any query received that contains a nonexistent device address, a framing error, or CRC error is ignored.
No response is transmitted. Queries addressed to a DECS-200 with an unsupported function code,
unsupported register references or illegal values in the data block result in an error response message
with an exception response code.
Each error response message consists of a slave (DECS-200) address, function code with the high order
bit set, error code and error check (CRC) field.
The exception response error codes supported by the DECS-200 are provided in Table 7-3.
Table 7-3. Supported Exception Response Codes
Code Name Meaning
01 Illegal Function The query Function/Sub-function Code is unsupported; query read of more
than 125 registers; query “preset multiple registers” of more than 100
registers
02 Illegal Data A register referenced in the data block does not support queried read/write;
Address
For Function Codes 3 and 16 additionally:
1. Starting Register address is mapped to DECS-200 Modbus™ address
space but is not referenced to the highest order 16 bits of the assigned
application data (see explanation in 2.7 Data Formats), and
2. The number of registers is too small to hold entire value of all data
(variables) assigned to those registers (see explanation in 2.7 Data
Formats).
03 Illegal Data A preset register data block contains an incorrect number of bytes or one or
Value more data values out of range.
COMMUNICATIONS HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS

The DECS-200 RS-485 physical interface consists of three positions of a terminal strip with locations for
Send/Receive A (A), Send/Receive B (B) and Signal Ground (C).

DETAILED MESSAGE QUERY AND RESPONSE
A detailed description of DECS-200 supported message queries and responses are provided in the
Read Holding Registers

Query
This query message requests a register or block of registers to be read. The data block contains the
starting register address and the quantity of registers to be read. A register address of N will read holding
register N+1.
Function Starting Starting No. of No. of CRC CRC
Device
Code = Address Address Registers Registers Low High
Address
03 High Low High Low
The number of registers cannot exceed 125 without causing an error response with the exception code
for an illegal function.
Response
The response message contains the data queried. The data block contains the block length in bytes
followed by the data for each requested register. For each requested register, there is one Data Hi and
one Data Lo. Attempting to read an unused register or a register that does not support a read will result in
an error response with the exception code for an illegal data address. If the query is a broadcast (device
address = 0), no response message is returned.
Maximum response message length obtained for query of 125 registers is 5 + (125 x 2) = 255 bytes.
Device Function Byte Data Data For each Data Data CRC CRC
Address Code = 03 Count High Low requested High Low Low High
register
250 First First Data High Last Last
max. queried queried and data queried queried
register register Low register register
High Low High Low
Preset Multiple Registers

A preset multiple registers query could address multiple registers in one slave or multiple slaves. If the
query is broadcast (device address = 0), no response is required.
Query
A Preset Multiple Registers query message requests a register or block of registers to be written. The
data block contains the starting address and the quantity of registers to be written, followed by the Data
Block byte count and data. The DECS-200 will perform the write when the device address is the same as
the DECS-200 remote address or when the device address is 0. A device address is 0 for a broadcast
query.
A register address of N will write Holding Register N+1.
All Modbus Generic Data Formats can be loaded by this function (see Data Formats).
No data will be written if any of the following exceptions occur:
• Queries to write to Read Only or unsupported registers result in an error response with an exception
code of Illegal Data Address.
• Queries attempting to write more than 100 registers cause an error response with an exception code
of Illegal Function.
• An incorrect Byte Count will result in an error response with an exception code of “Illegal Function.”
• A query to write an illegal value (out of range) to a register results in an error response with an
exception code of Illegal Data Value.
• Query Starting Register address is mapped to DECS-200 Modbus™ address space but is not
referenced to the lower order 16 bits of the assigned application data. (See explanation in Data
Formats.)
• The number of query registers is too small to hold entire value of all data (variables) assigned to
those registers. (See explanation in Data Formats.)
Query message format is:
Device Address
Function Code = 10 (hex)
Starting Address High
Starting Address Low
Number of Registers High (total number of registers to be loaded)
Number of Registers Low
Byte Count (total number of registers to be loaded times 2)
Data High
Data Low
...
Data High
Data Low
CRC Error Check (Lo, Hi)
Note: The maximum length of a Preset Multiple Registers Query is 9 + (100 x 2) = 209 bytes.
Response
The response message echoes the starting address and the number of registers. There is no response
message when the query is a broadcast (device address of 0).
Device Function Starting Starting Number of Number of CRC CRC
Address Code = Address Address Registers Registers Low High
10 (hex) High Low High
Low
Preset Single Register (Write Single Holding Register)

A Preset Single Register query message requests a single register to be written. The DECS-200 will
perform the write when the device address is the same as the DECS-200’s remote address.
Query
Device Address
Function Code = 06 (hex)
Address Hi
Address Lo
Data Hi
Data Lo
CRC Hi error check
CRC Lo error check
The response message echoes the Query message after the register has been altered.
Error Response
Data will cease to be written if any of the following exceptions occur.
• Queries to write to Read Only registers result in an error response with Exception Code of “Illegal Data
Address.”
• A query to write an out of range value to a register results in an error response with Exception Code of
“Illegal Data Value.”
There are several instances of registers that are grouped together to collectively represent a single
numerical DECS-200 data value (i.e., floating point data and 32-bit integer data). A query to write a
subset of such a register group will result in an error response with Exception Code “Illegal Data
Address”.

NOTE
Variables changed by this function will not be directly saved to nonvolatile memory (EEPROM). If
specific categories (one or more) of data have to be saved to EEPROM, then Holding Register 48161
(Data Id=13001, variable “SaveCommand”) has to be preset after a category has been changed. The
exceptions to this rule are only those Holding Registers dealing with communication port RS-485.
They will be changed and immediately saved to EEPROM with the function FC16.
Loop Back Diagnostic Test (FC= 8) with Diagnostic Sub-function, Return Query Data
This query contains data to be returned (looped back) in the response. The response and query
messages should be identical. If the query is a broadcast (device address = 0), no response message is
returned.
Function Sub-function Sub-function Data High Data Low CRC CRC
Device Code = High Low
Address XX XX Low High
08 (hex) 00 00 (don’t care) (don’t care)
Loop Back Diagnostic Test with Diagnostic Sub-function, Restart Communications Option
This query causes the remote communications function of the DECS-200 to restart, terminating an active
listen only mode of operation. No effect is made upon primary relay operations. Only the remote
communications function is affected. If the query is a broadcast (device address of 0), no response
message is returned.
If the DECS-200 receives this query while in the listen only mode (LOM), no response message is
generated. Otherwise, a response message identical to the query message is transmitted prior to the
communications restart.
Function Sub-function Sub-function Data High Data Low CRC CRC

Device Code = High Low
Address XX XX Low High
Loop Back Diagnostic Test with Diagnostic Sub-function, Force Slave to Listen Only Mode
This query forces the addressed DECS-200 to the listen only mode for Modbus communications, isolating
it from other devices on the network.
While in Listen Only Mode (LOM), received data is monitored (but no responses are transmitted). The
only query that will be recognized and processed while in LOM is a maintenance restart command
(function Code 8, diagnostic code 1).
When the DECS-200 receives the restart communications query, the Listen Only mode is terminated.
Device Function Sub-function Sub-function Data High Data Low CRC CRC
Address Code = High Low XX XX Low High
DATA FORMATS
DECS-200 data does not need to be converted into any special format for transmission over a Modbus™
network.
Modbus™ Registers hold original DECS-200 data of the generic (built-in) data types listed in Table 7-4.

Table 7-4. Generic Data Types and Description
Total number of
Generic Data Modbus™
Data Corresponding built-in data Size in Registers to
Types type (Storage Format) Data Range bytes hold data
UI8 UCHAR: unsigned character 0 to 255 1 1
UI6 UINT16: unsigned short integer 0 to 65,535 2 1
UI32 UINT32: unsigned long integer 0 to 4,294,967,295 4 2
I8 CHAR: signed character -128 to 127 1 1
I16 INT16: signed short integer -32,768 to 32,767 2 1
I32 INT32: signed long integer -2,147,483,648 to 4 2
2,147,483,647
R32_23 FLOAT: floating point number From approximately 8.43 4 2
-37 38
x 10 to 3.38 x 10
It should be noted that an ASCII string is not a DECS-200 generic data type. An ASCII string will be
considered as a sequence of “(string length + 1)” data of I8 type, and for its transmission via a Modbus™
network “(string length + 1)” holding registers are needed.
DECS-200 data is copied to assigned Holding Register(s) [HR] by the rules presented in the following
paragraphs.
Generic Types UI8 and I8

Data of type UI8 or I8 is copied to one holding register (HR). The high (first) HR byte always contains 0,
and second (low) HR byte contains the data.
Example:
Assume that the value of UI8 type data is 0x56, and that the data is mapped to HR 44005.
The content of HR 44005 will be as listed in Table 7-5.
Table 7-5. HR 44005 Contents
HR 44004 HR 44005 HR 44005 HR 44006
Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte
... 0x00 0x56 ...

Data of type UINT16 or INT16 is saved in 1 one holding register. The high data byte is copied to the high
HR byte and the low data byte to the low HR byte.
Example:
Assume that the DECS-200 UINT16 or INT16 type data value of 0xF067 is mapped to HR 47003.
Data is copied to HR 47003 as shown in Table 7-6.
Table 7-6. HR 47003 Mapping
HR 47002 HR 47003 HR 47003 HR 47004
Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte
... 0xF0 0x67 ...

Data of type UI32 or I32 is 4 bytes long. The Modbus™ 4-byte long data generic types use two
consecutive registers to represent a data value. The lower numbered holding register contains the low
order 16 bits, Low Order word [LO w] and the higher numbered holding register contains the higher order
16 bits, Higher Order word [HO w].

Example:
The UI32 data type, value is 0xE0234567 and is mapped to two Holding registers (such as 45003 and
45004) as shown in Table 7-7.
Table 7-7. Typical Mapping
Register 45003 45004
Hexadecimal 4567 E023
Binary 0100 0101 0110 0111 1110 0000 0010 0011
HR 45002 HR 45003 HR 45003 HR 45004 HR 45004 HR 45005

LO byte HO byte LO byte HO byte LO byte HO byte
... 45 67 E0 23 ...
Floating Point (R23_32) Data Format

The specific floating-point format matches the floating-point format used for Modicon 984-8 family of
programmable controllers.
Its representation in bit format is:

S EEE EEEE E MMM MMMM MMMM MMMM MMMM
MMMM
byte 3 byte 2 byte 1 Byte 0
where the “S” is the sign bit for the floating point value: 1 if negative and 0 if positive; The “E” field is the
two’s complement exponent biased by 127 decimal; The “M” field is the 23-bit normalized mantissa. The
most-significant bit of the mantissa is always assumed to be 1 and is not explicitly stored yielding an
effective precision of 24 bits.
The value of the floating-point number is obtained by multiplying the binary mantissa times two raised to the
power of the unbiased exponent. The assumed bit of the binary mantissa has the value of 1.0 with the
remaining 23 bits providing a fractional value.
Table 7-8 shows the floating-point format.
Table 7-8. Floating Point Format
Sign 2's Complement Of (Exponent + 127) Mantissa
1 bit 8 bits 23 bits
38
The floating point format allows a maximum value of 3.38 x 10 .
Note that bytes 0 and 1 of the floating-point value are stored in the lower numbered register and bytes 2
and 3 are contained in the higher numbered register.
For example: Number 123 in floating point format is mapped to two Holding registers (such as 45005 and
45006) as shown in Table 7-9.
Table 7-9. Number 123 in Floating Point Format
Register 45005 45006
Hexadecimal 0000 42F6
Binary 0000 0000 0000 0000 0100 0010 1111 0110
CAUTION
For DECS-200 Modbus, two consecutive holding registers which are mapped to any of
the 4-byte generic data types, are considered to be linked together as one atomic,
indivisible unit of information which can be read or written by Modbus message only as
one entity (that is, one cannot be read or written without the other).

CRC ERROR CHECK
This field contains a two-byte CRC value for transmission error detection. The master first calculates the
CRC and appends it to the query message. The DECS-200 recalculates the CRC value for the received
query and performs a comparison to the query CRC value to determine if a transmission error has
occurred. If so, no response message is generated. If no transmission error has occurred, the slave
calculates a new CRC value for the response message and appends it to the message for transmission.
The CRC calculation is performed using all bytes of the device address, function code, and data block
fields. A 16-bit CRC register is initialized to all 1's. Then, each eight-bit byte of the message is used in the
following algorithm.
First, exclusive-OR the message byte with the low-order byte of the CRC-register. The result, stored in
the CRC-register, will then be right-shifted eight times. The CRC-register MSB is zero-filled with each
shift. After each shift, the CRC-register LSB is examined. If the LSB a 1, the CRC-register is then
exclusive-ORed with the fixed polynomial value A001 (hex) prior to the next shift. Once all bytes of the
message have undergone the above algorithm, the CRC-register will contain the message CRC value to
be placed in the error check field.
DECS-200 MODBUS REGISTER SPACE

Modbus Address space from 40000 to 49999 refers to Functions Code 3, 6 and 16. The DECS-200 uses
address space from 47001 to 48250 (1250 registers). This address space is divided into 14 areas referred
to as information categories. Table 7-10 provides a statistical summary for each information category.
Table 7-10. Information Category Summary
Total # of Holding Data Types
Reserved Register Number Mapped To
Information Information Holding Address Of Used Access Registers (Total #
Category ID Category Registers Space Registers Right Of Variables)
C1 Product 250 47001 to 63 R UCHAR: 63
Information 47250
C2 Metering 125 47251 to 55 R FLOAT: 24
47375 UINT16: 7
C3 Reporting 125 47376 to None R None
(Status) 47500 (for future use)
Control System 47501 to 58 RW FLOAT: 26
C4 Configuration 60 47560 59 1R UINT16: 7
Group 1
C5 Operating 60 47561 to 23 16 RW UINT16: 23
Modes 47620 7R
C6 Setpoints 120 47621 to 94 48 R FLOAT: 45
47740 46 RW UINT16: 4
C7 Start-up 60 47741 to 16 RW FLOAT: 8
47800
C8 Limiters 60 47801 to 38 RW FLOAT: 19
47860
C9 Control Loop 60 47861 to 30 RW FLOAT: 15
Gains 47920
C10 Protective 60 47921 to 37 RW FLOAT: 15
Functions 47980 UINT16: 7
47981 to None None
C11 Calibration 60 48040 (for future RW (for future use)
use)

Total # of Holding Data Types
Reserved Register Number Mapped To
Information Information Holding Address Of Used Access Registers (Total #
Category ID Category Registers Space Registers Right Of Variables)
C12 Relays 120 48041 to 83 RW UINT16: 83
48160
C13 General 60 48161 to 8 2R UINT16: 6
System 48220 6 RW UCHAR: 2
C14 FP Metering 30 48221 to 3 3 RW UINT16: 3
Configuration 48250
Control System 50 48501 to 10 RW FLOAT: 4
C15 Configuration
48550
Group II
DECS-200 REGISTER TABLE

Each data to be transmitted via Modbus™ network is identified by its holding register(s). The following
tables provide the complete list of holding register assignments and descriptions for the DECS-200. There
is a separate table for each information category.
Holding Registers for Information Category C1

Table 7-11. Information Category C1 (Product Information)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
47001 1st character of the ASCII string of model information R- UI8
47002 2nd character of the ASCII string of model information R- UI8
47003 3rd character of the ASCII string of model information R- UI8

47004 4th character of the ASCII string of model information R- UI8

47009 Last character of the ASCII string of model information R- UI8
47010 1st character of the ASCII string of application program version R- UI8
number
47011 2nd character of the ASCII string of application program version R- UI8
number
47012 3rd character of the ASCII string of application program version R- UI8
number
47013 4th character of the ASCII string of application program version R- UI8
number
number
number

Data
number
47017 Last character of the ASCII string of application program version R- UI8
number
47018 1st character of the ASCII string of date of the application program R- UI8
47019 2nd character of the ASCII string of date of the application program R- UI8
47020 3rd character of the ASCII string of date of the application program R- UI8
47021 4th character of the ASCII string of date of the application program R- UI8
47026 Last character of the ASCII string of date of the application program R- UI8
47027 1st character of the ASCII string of DSP program version number R- UI8
47028 2nd character of the ASCII string of DSP program version number R- UI8
47029 3rd character of the ASCII string of DSP program version number R- UI8
47030 4th character of the ASCII string of DSP program version number R- UI8
47034 Last character of the ASCII string of DSP program version number R- UI8
47035 1st character of the ASCII string of date of the DSP program R- UI8
47036 2nd character of the ASCII string of date of the DSP program R- UI8
47037 3rd character of the ASCII string of date of the DSP program R- UI8
47038 4th character of the ASCII string of date of the DSP program R- UI8
47043 Last character of the ASCII string of date of the DSP program R- UI8
47044 1st character of the ASCII string of Boot program version number R- UI8
47045 2nd character of the ASCII string of Boot program version number R- UI8
47046 3rd character of the ASCII string of Boot program version number R- UI8
47047 4th character of the ASCII string of Boot Program version number R- UI8

Data
47048 5th character of the ASCII string of Boot program version number R- UI8
47051 Last character of the ASCII string of Boot program version number R- UI8
47052 1st character of the ASCII string of date of the Boot program R- UI8
47053 2nd character of the ASCII string of date of the Boot program R- UI8
47054 3rd character of the ASCII string of date of the Boot program R- UI8
47055 4th character of the ASCII string of date of the Boot program R- UI8
47060 Last character of the ASCII string of date of the Boot program R- UI8
47061 1st character of the ASCII string of style number information R- UI8
47062 2nd character of the ASCII string of style number information R- UI8
47063 Last character of the ASCII string of style number information R- UI8
47064 to Reserved for future C1 data Not Not

47250 supported defined

Table 7-12. Information Category C2 (Metering)
Data
47251-52 Phase A to B rms generator voltage R- R32_23
47253-54 Phase B to C rms generator voltage R- R32_23
47255-56 Phase C to A rms generator voltage R- R32_23

47257-58 Average of the 3 rms line-to-line voltages R- R32_23
47259-60 Phase B generator current in amps R- R32_23
47261-62 Generator apparent power in kVA R- R32_23
47263-64 Generator real power in kW R- R32_23

47265-66 Generator reactive power in kvar R- R32_23
47267-68 Power factor R- R32_23
47269-70 Generator frequency in hertz R- R32_23
47271-72 Bus frequency in Hz R- R32_23

Data
47273-74 RMS bus voltage in volts R- R32_23
47275-76 Field voltage in volts R- R32_23
47277-78 Field current in amps R- R32_23
47279-80 Var/PF controller output in volts R- R32_23
47281-82 Phase angle between phase B voltage and current in degrees R- R32_23
47283-84 Auxiliary input in volts (PSS input) R- R32_23
47285-86 Current input for load compensation R- R32_23
47287-88 Null balance (tracking error) in percent R- R32_23
47289-90 Error signal to autotracking loop R- R32_23

47291-92 Active controller output R- R32_23
47293 PF state: 0 = leading / 1 = lagging R- UI16
47294 Generator state: 0 = generating / 1 = motoring R- UI16
47295 Status of the Front panel LEDs (bit flags, where 0=off, 1=on for all R- UI16
LEDs except Null Balance and Internal Tracking which are reversed):
b0=Null Balance, b1=Tracking, b2=Pre-position, b3=Upper Limit,
b4=Lower Limit, b5=Edit, b6-b15=unassigned
47296 Voltage matching status: 0=off / 1=on R- UI16
47297 Protection status bit flags (0=clear, 1=condition present): R- UI16

b0=field overvoltage, b1=field overcurrent, b2=gen. Undervoltage,
b3=gen. overvoltage, b4=underfrequency, b5=in OEL, b6=in UEL,
b7=in FCR mode, b8=loss of sensing voltage, b9=setpoint at lower
limit, b10=setpoint at upper limit, b11=gen. failed to build up, b12=
gen. below 10Hz, b13=unassigned, b14=exciter diode open,
b15=exciter diode shorted.
47298-99 Reserved for future C2 data R- R32_23
47300-01 The active operating setpoint expressed as a percent of its present R- R32_23
adjustment range.
47302 The state of some contact inputs: b0 = 52JK, b1 = 52LM, b2 = R- UI16
Automatic transfer, b3 = External Tracking Enable
47303 Annunciation status bit flags (0=clear, 1=annunciation present): R- UI16
b0=field overvoltage, b1=field overcurrent, b2=gen. undervoltage,
b3=gen. overvoltage, b4=underfrequency, b5=in OEL, b6=in UEL,
b7=in FCR mode, b8=loss of sensing voltage, b9=setpoint at lower
limit, b10=setpoint at upper limit, b11=gen. failed to build up, b12=
gen. below 10Hz, b13=unassigned, b14=exciter diode open,
b15=exciter diode shorted..
47304-05 Reserved R- R32_23
47306 Protection status bit flags (0 = clear, 1 = condition present) R- UI16

b0 = loss of field, b1 = in SCL, b2 – b15 are unassigned
47307 Annunciation status bit flags (0 = clear, 1 = condition present) R- UI16

Data
b0 = loss of field, b1 = in SCL, b2 – b15 are unassigned
47308 to Reserved for C2 data
47375

Table 7-13. Information Category C3 (Reporting)
Data

Table 7-14. Information Category C4 (Control System Configuration Parameters)
Data
47501-02 Generator rated frequency, selectable to be 50 or 60 Hz RW R32_23
47503-04 Generator PT primary voltage rating, adjustable from 1 to 30,000 RW R32_23

Vac in 1 volt increments
47505-06 Generator PT secondary voltage rating, adjustable from 1 to 240 RW R32_23
Vac in 1 volt increments
47507-08 Generator CT primary current rating, adjustable from 1 to 60,000 RW R32_23
Aac in 1 amp increments
47509-10 Generator CT secondary current rating, selectable to be 1 or 5 Aac RW R32_23
47511-12 Field current rating, adjustable from 1 to 18 Adc, in 0.1 amp RW R32_23
increments
47513-14 Field voltage connections to isolation box, selectable to be 32V, RW R32_23
63V, 125V, 250V or 375V
47515-16 Bus sensing PT primary rating, adjustable from 1 to 500,000 Vac in RW R32_23
1 volt increments
47517-18 Bus sensing PT secondary rating, adjustable from 1 to 240 Vac in 1 RW R32_23
volt increments
47519-20 Reserved RW R32_23
47523-24 Generator rated voltage, adjustable from 85 to 30,000 Vac in 1 volt RW R32_23
increments
47525-26 Generator rated output current, adjustable from 10 to 60,000 Aac in RW R32_23
0.1 amp increments
47527-28 Generator rated field voltage, adjustable from 1 to 400 Vdc in 1 volt RW R32_23
increments
47529-30 Generator rated field current, adjustable from 0.1 to 9999.0 Adc in RW R32_23
0.1 amp increments
47531-32 Nominal bus voltage, adjustable from 85 to 500,000 Vac in 1 volt RW R32_23
increments

Table 7-14. Information Category C4 (Control System Configuration Parameters)
Data
47533-34 Auxiliary input gain for AVR mode, adjustable from 0 to 99 in 0.01 RW R32_23
increments
47535-36 Internal tracking time delay, adjustable from 0 to 8 seconds in 0.1- RW R32_23
second increments
47537-38 Internal tracking traverse rate, adjustable from 1 to 80 seconds in RW R32_23
0.1 second increments
47539-40 Null balance level, adjustable from 0 to 9,999 in 0.01 increments RW R32_23
47541-42 Gain for cross current compensation, adjustable from 0 to 30 in 0.01 RW R32_23
increments
47543 Voltage sensing configuration: 0 = 1 phase (A-C) / 1 = 3 phase RW UI16
47544 Auxiliary input summing mode: 0 = Inner Loop for AVR and FCR RW UI16
modes / 1 = Outer Loop for var and PF modes
47545 Control signal output range: 0 or 1 = 0+10V / 2 = -10+10V / 3 = 4-20 RW UI16
mA
47546 Reserved RW UI16
47547 Auxiliary input selection: 0 = voltage input / 1 = current input RW UI16
47548 PSS input mode – reserved for future C4 data RW UI16
47549-50 External tracking time delay, adjustable from 0 to 8 seconds in 0.1 RW R32_23
second increments
47551-52 External tracking traverse rate, adjustable from 1 to 80 seconds in RW R32_23
0.1-second increments
47553 Voltage sensing hardware gain control signal: 0 = gen. PT R- UI16
secondary <= 160 Vac / 1 = gen. PT secondary > 160 Vac
47554-55 Auxiliary input gain for FCR mode, adjustable from -99 to 99 in 0.01 RW R32_23
increments
47556-57 Auxiliary input gain for var mode, adjustable from -99 to 99 in 0.01 RW R32_23
increments
47558-59 Auxiliary input gain for PF mode, adjustable from -99 to 99 in 0.01 RW R32_23
increments

Table 7-15. Information Category C5 (Operating Mode Parameters)
Data
47561 Virtual toggle switch for Start or Stop: 0 = no change / 1 = change RW UI16
state. Holding register 47572 contains unit mode status.
Note: Read value of register 47561 is always 0.
47562 Virtual toggle switch for changing control mode from comm. port RW UI16
between AVR and FCR: 0 = no change / 1 = change state. Holding
register 47573 contains Control mode status.
Note: Read value of register 47562 is always 0.

Table 7-15. Information Category C5 (Operating Mode Parameters)
Data
47563 Switch for changing operating mode via comm. port, to one of three RW UI16
modes, 0=OFF / 1=PF / 2=var. Holding register 47571 contains
Operating mode status. Note: Read value of register 47563 is
always 4.
47564 Internal tracking status from comm. port: 0 = Off / 1 = On RW UI16
47565 Preposition enable status from comm. port: 0 = Off / 1 = On RW UI16
47566 Raise input enable status from comm. port: 0 = Off / 1 = On RW UI16
47567 Lower input enable status from comm. port: 0 = Off / 1 = On RW UI16
47568 External tracking enable status from comm. port: 0 = Off / 1 = On RW UI16
47569 Limiter Mode options: 0 = both off / 1 = UEL on / 2 = OEL on / 3 = RW UI16

both on / 4 = SCL / 5 = SCL/UEL / 6 = SCL/OEL / 7 = OEL/UEL/SCL
47570 Voltage matching mode: 0 = Off / 1 = On RW UI16
47571 Operating mode: 0 = Off / 1 = PF Control / 2 = var Control R- UI16
47572 Unit mode status: 0 = Stop / 1 = Start R- UI16
47573 Control mode status: 1 = FCR / 2 = AVR R- UI16

47574 Internal (mode-to-mode) tracking status: 0 = Off / 1 = On R- UI16
47575 Reserved for future C5 data R- UI16
47576 Secondary unit enable status: 0 = primary unit / 1 = secondary unit R- UI16
47577 Load compensation mode status: 0 = Off / 1 = Droop / 2 = Line Drop R- UI16
47578 Load compensation mode selection via comm. ports: 0 = Off/1 = RW UI16
Droop / 2 = Line Drop. Holding register 47577 contains Load
compensation mode status. Note: Read value of register 47578 is
always 0.
47579 Input for resetting front panel annunciations and latched relay RW UI16
annunciations: 0 = no change / 1 = reset. Note: Read value of
register 47579 is always 0.
47580 Loss-of-sensing detection enable: 0 = disable / 1 = enable RW UI16
47581 Loss of sensing triggered transfer-to-FCR-mode enable. RW UI16

47582 Under frequency or volts per hertz mode enable. RW UI16
47583 External Tracking enabled: 0 = disabled /1 = enabled RW UI16
47584 Virtual toggle switch for OEL style: 0 = no change, 1 = change RW UI16
Read back: 0 = summing point, 1 = takeover
47585 OEL option: 0 = Option 1, 1 = Option 2, 3 = Option 3 RW UI16
47586 PF/var option status: 0 = Off, 1 = PF, 2 = var R- UI16


Table 7-16. Information Category C6 (Setpoint Parameters)
Data
47621-22 FCR (field current regulator) mode setpoint; adjustment range is RW R32_23
determined by registers (47699-700) and (47707-08)
47623-24 AVR (automatic voltage regulator) mode setpoint; adjustment range RW R32_23
is determined by registers (47701-02) and (47709-10)
47625-26 Var mode setpoint (in kvar); adjustment range is determined by RW R32_23
registers (47703-04) and (47711-12)
47627-28 PF mode setpoint; adjustment range is determined by registers RW R32_23
(47705-06) and (47713-14)
47629-30 Droop setting in percent (of rated generator voltage), adjustable from RW R32_23
-30 to 30% in 0.1% increments
47631-32 FCR mode traverse rate, adjustable from 10 to 200 seconds in 1- RW R32_23
second increments
47633-34 AVR mode traverse rate, adjustable from 10 to 200 seconds in 1- RW R32_23
second increments
47635-36 Var mode traverse rate, adjustable from 10 to 200 seconds in 1- RW R32_23
second increments
47637-38 PF mode traverse rate, adjustable from 10 to 200 seconds in 1- RW R32_23
second increments
47639-40 FCR mode setpoint preposition; adjustment range is determined by RW R32_23
registers (47699-700) and (47707-08)
47641-42 AVR mode setpoint preposition; adjustment range is determined by RW R32_23
registers (47701-02) and (47709-10)
47643-44 Var mode setpoint preposition (in kvar); adjustment range is RW R32_23
determined by registers (47703-04) and (47711-12)
47645-46 PF mode setpoint preposition; adjustment range is determined by RW R32_23
registers (47705-06) and (47713-14)
47647-48 FCR mode setpoint step size = setpoint range / (traverse rate x 10): R R32_23
[ (regs. 47707-08) - (regs. 47699-700) ] / [ (regs. 47631-32) x 10 ]
47649-50 AVR mode setpoint step size = setpoint range / (traverse rate x 10): R R32_23
[ (regs. 47709-10) - (regs. 47701-02) ] / [ (regs. 47633-34) x 10 ]
47651-52 Var mode setpoint step size (in kvar) = setpoint range / (traverse R R32_23
rate x 10): [ (regs. 47711-12) - (regs. 47703-04) ] / [ (regs. 47635-
36) x 10 ]
47653-54 PF mode setpoint step size = setpoint range / (traverse rate x 10):[ 2 R R32_23
+ (regs.47713-14) - (regs.47705-06) ] / [ (regs.47635-36) x 10 ]
47655-56 FCR mode setpoint minimum (in % of rated field current), adjustable RW R32_23
from 0 to 100% in 0.1% increments
47657-58 AVR mode setpoint minimum (in % of rated generator output RW R32_23
voltage), adjustable from 70 to 100% in 0.1% increments
47659-60 Var mode setpoint minimum (in % of rated generator VA), adjustable RW R32_23
from -100 to 100% in 0.1% increments

Data
47661-62 PF mode setpoint adjustable minimum, adjustable from 0.5 to 1.0 in RW R32_23
0.005 increments
47663-64 FCR mode setpoint maximum (in % of rated field current), adjustable RW R32_23
from 100 to 120% in 0.1% increments
47665-66 AVR mode setpoint maximum (in % of rated generator output RW R32_23
voltage), adjustable from 100 to 110% in 0.1% increments
47667-68 Var mode setpoint maximum (in % of rated generator VA), RW R32_23
adjustable from -100 to 100% in 0.1% increments
47669-70 PF mode setpoint adjustable maximum, adjustable from -1.0 to -0.5 RW R32_23
in 0.005 increments
47671-72 Minimum value for FCR mode setpoint adjustable minimum (in % of R R32_23
rated field current) = 0%
47673-74 Minimum value for AVR mode setpoint adjustable minimum (in % of R R32_23
rated generator output voltage) = 80%
47675-76 Minimum value for var mode setpoint adjustable minimum (in % of R R32_23
rated generator VA) = -100%
47677-78 Minimum value for PF mode setpoint adjustable minimum R R32_23
47679-80 Maximum value for FCR mode setpoint adjustable maximum (in % R R32_23
of rated field current) = 120%
47681-82 Maximum value for AVR mode setpoint adjustable maximum in (in % R R32_23
of rated generator output voltage) = 110%
47683-84 Maximum value for var mode setpoint adjustable maximum (in % of R R32_23
rated generator VA) = 100%
47685-86 Maximum value for PF mode setpoint adjustable maximum R R32_23
47687-88 Step size for FCR mode setpoint adjustable maximum (in % of rated R R32_23
field current) = 0.1%
47689-90 Step size for AVR mode setpoint adjustable maximum (in % of rated R R32_23
generator output voltage) = 0.1%
47691-92 Step size for var mode setpoint adjustable maximum in % of rated R R32_23
generator VA) = 0.1%
47693-94 Step size for PF mode setpoint adjustable maximum = 0.005 R R32_23
47695 FCR preposition mode: 0 = maintained / 1 = release RW UI16
47696 AVR preposition mode: 0 = maintained / 1 = release RW UI16
47697 Var preposition mode: 0 = maintained / 1 = release RW UI16
47698 PF preposition mode: 0 = maintained / 1 = release RW UI16

47699-700 FCR minimum setpoint (in amps) = % of nominal x rated field R- R32_23
current:(regs. 47655-56) x (regs. 47529-30) / 100
47701-02 AVR minimum setpoint (in volts) = % of nominal x rated gen. R- R32_23
voltage:(regs. 47657-58) x (regs. 47525-26) / 100
47703-04 Var minimum setpoint (in kvar) = % of nominal x rated generator R- R32_23

Data
VA:(regs. 47659-60) x rated VA / 100
47705-06 PF minimum setpoint = registers 47661-62 R- R32_23
47707-08 FCR maximum setpoint (in amps) = % of nominal x rated field R- R32_23
current:(regs. 47663-64) x (regs. 47529-30) / 100
47709-10 AVR maximum setpoint (in volts) = % of nominal x rated gen. R- R32_23
Voltage:(regs. 47665-66) x (regs. 47525-26) / 100
47711-12 Var maximum setpoint (in kvar) = % of nominal x rated gen. R- R32_23
VA:(regs. 47667-68) x rated VA / 100
47713-14 PF maximum setpoint = registers 47669-70 R- R32_23

Table 7-17. Information Category C7 (Startup Parameters)
Data
47741-42 Soft start level, adjustable from 0 to 90 % (of rated generator RW R32_23
voltage) in 1% increments
47743-44 Soft start duration, adjustable from 1 to 7,200 seconds in 1 second RW R32_23
increments
47745-46 Underfrequency corner frequency, adjustable from 15 to 90 Hz in 0.1 RW R32_23
Hz increments
47747-48 Slope of underfrequency curve, adjustable from 0.00 to 3.00 V/Hz in RW R32_23
0.01 V/Hz increments
47749-50 Width of voltage matching window, adjustable from 0 to 20 % (of RW R32_23
rated generator voltage) in 0.01 % increments
47751-52 Voltage matching reference, adjustable from 90 to 120 % (of rated RW R32_23
generator voltage) in 0.01 % increments
47753-54 Fine voltage adjust band, adjustable from 0 to 30 % (of rated RW R32_23
generator voltage) in 0.1 % increments
47755-56 Time delay for loss of sensing, adjustable from 0 to 3 seconds in RW R32_23
47757-58 Loss of sensing level under balanced conditions, adjustable from 0% RW R32_23
to 100% of rated generator voltage in 0.1% increments
47759-60 Loss of sensing level under unbalanced conditions, adjustable from RW R32_23
0% to 100% of rated generator voltage in 0.1% increments

Table 7-18. Information Category C8 (Limiter Parameters)
Data
47801-02 On-line OEL high limit level, adjustable from 0.1 to 30 Adc in 0.1- RW R32_23
amp increments
47803-04 Time allowed at on-line OEL high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 10 RW R32_23
seconds in 1-second increments
47805-06 On-line OEL medium limit level, adjustable from 0.1 to 20 Adc in RW R32_23
0.1-amp increments
47807-08 Time allowed at on-line OEL medium limit level, adjustable from 0 to RW R32_23
120 seconds in 1-second increments
47809-10 On-line low OEL low limit level, adjustable from 0.1 to 15 Adc in 0.1- RW R32_23
amp increments
47811-12 Internal UEL curve’s starting point (reactive power level at 0 kW). RW R32_23
This should be 0 to allow the programmable UEL curve to be used.
47813-14 Time allowed at off-line OEL high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 10 RW R32_23
seconds in 1-second increments
47815-16 Off-line OEL high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 30 Adc in 0.1-amp RW R32_23
increments
47817-18 Off-line OEL low limit level, adjustable from 0 to 15 Adc in 0.1-amp RW R32_23
increments
47819-20 1st UEL point real power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s full RW R32_23
rating (in kW)
47821-22 2nd UEL point real power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s full RW R32_23
rating (in kW)
47823-24 3rd UEL point real power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s full RW R32_23
rating (in kW)
47825-26 4th UEL point real power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s full RW R32_23
rating (in kW)
47827-28 5th UEL point real power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s full RW R32_23
rating (in kW)
47829-30 1st UEL point reactive power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s RW R32_23
full rating (in kvar)
47831-32 2nd UEL point reactive power value, adjustable from 0 to RW R32_23
generator’s full rating (in kvar)
47833-34 3rd UEL point reactive power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s RW R32_23
47835-36 4th UEL point reactive power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s RW R32_23
47837-38 5th UEL point reactive power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s RW R32_23
47839-40 SCL high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 66,000 A in 0.1 A RW R32_23
increments

Table 7-18. Information Category C8 (Limiter Parameters)
Data
47841-42 Time allowed at SCL high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 60 RW R32_23
seconds in 0.1 second increments.
47843-44 SCL low limit level, adjustable from 0 to 66,000 A, in 0.1 A RW R32_23
increments
47845-46 Takeover OEL offline high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 9,999 A in RW R32_23
0.1 A increments
47847-48 Takeover OEL offline low limit level, adjustable from 0 to 9,999 A in RW R32_23
0.1 A increments.
47849-50 Takeover OEL offline time dial, adjustable from 0.1 to 20, in 0.1 RW R32_23
increments
47851-52 Takeover OEL online high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 9,999 A in RW R32_23
0.1 A increments.
47853-54 Takeover OEL online low limit level, adjustable from 0 to 9,999 A in RW R32_23
0.1 a increments.
47855-56 Takeover OEL online time dial, adjustable from 0.1 to 20 in 0.1 RW R32_23
increments

Table 7-19. Information Category C9 (Control Loop Gain Parameters)
Data
47861-62 Stability setting group number: 1 to 21, where groups 1 to 20 are RW R32_23
preprogrammed values and group 21 is user programmable
47863-64 AVR/FCR mode proportional gain (Kp), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in RW R32_23
0.1 increments
47865-66 AVR/FCR mode integral gain (Ki), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 RW R32_23
increments
47867-68 AVR/FCR mode derivative gain (Kd), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in RW R32_23
0.1 increments
47869-70 OEL integral gain (Ki), adjustable from 0 to 1000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23
47871-72 PF mode integral gain (Ki), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 RW R32_23
increments
47873-74 Var mode integral gain (Ki), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.01 RW R32_23
increments
47875-76 FCR mode loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 RW R32_23
increments
47877-78 AVR mode loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 RW R32_23
increments
47879-80 Var mode loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.01 RW R32_23
increments
47881-82 PF mode loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23

47883-84 OEL loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23
47885-86 UEL loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23
47887-88 UEL integral gain (Ki), adjustable from 0 to 1000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23
47889-90 Voltage matching loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 RW R32_23
increments
47891-92 AVR mode derivative time constant, adjustable from 0 to 1 in 0.01 RW R32_23
increments
47906-07 SCL loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23
47908-09 SCL loop gain (Ki), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23
47910-20 Reserved for future C9 data Not Not
supported defined

Table 7-20. Information Category C10 (Protective Functions Parameters)
Data
47921-22 Field overvoltage level, adjustable from 1 to 325 Vdc in 1-volt RW R32_23
increments
47923-24 Field overcurrent base level, adjustable from 0.1 to 16 Adc in 0.1- RW R32_23
amp increments
47925-26 Stator undervoltage level, adjustable from 0 to 30,000 Vac in 1-volt RW R32_23
increments
47927-28 Stator overvoltage level, adjustable from 0 to 30,000 Vac in 1-volt RW R32_23
increments
47929-30 Field overvoltage time delay, adjustable from 0.2 to 30 seconds in RW R32_23
47931-32 Field overcurrent time dial multiplier, adjustable from 0.1 to 20 in 0.1 RW R32_23
increments
47933-34 Stator undervoltage time delay, adjustable from 0.5 to 60 seconds in RW R32_23
47935-36 Stator overvoltage time delay, adjustable from 0.1 to 60 seconds in RW R32_23
47937 Field overvoltage alarm enable: 0 = disabled / 1 = enabled RW UI16
47938 Field overcurrent alarm enable: 0 = disabled / 1 = enabled RW UI16

47939 Stator undervoltage alarm enable: 0 = disabled / 1 = enabled RW UI16
47940 Stator overvoltage alarm enable: 0 = disabled / 1 = enabled RW UI16

47946-47 Exciter open diode ripple pickup level, adjustable from 0% to 100% RW R32-23
in 0.1% increments.

Data
47948-49 Exciter open diode time delay, adjustable from 10 to 60 seconds in RW R32-23
47950 Exciter open diode protection enable: 0 = disabled / 1 = enabled RW UI16
47951-52 Exciter shorted diode ripple pickup level, adjustable from 0% to RW R32-23
100% in 0.1% increments.
47953-54 Exciter shorted diode time delay, adjustable from 5 to 30 seconds in RW R32-23
47955 Exciter shorted diode protection enable: 0 = disabled / 1 = enabled RW UI16
47956-57 Exciter diode protection disable level, adjustable from 0% to 100% of RW R32_23
rated exciter field current in 0.1% increments.
47958 Loss of field alarm enable: 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled RW UI16
47959-60 Loss of field level, adjustable from 0 to 3,000 Mvar in 1 kvar RW R32_23
increments
47961-62 Loss of field delay (in seconds): adjustable from 0.1 to 9.9 seconds RW R32_23


Table 7-21. Information Category C11 (Calibration related Parameters)
Data

Table 7-22. Information Category C12 (Relay Parameters)
Data
48041 Annunciation enable for Relay 1: 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled RW UI16
b0 = field overvoltage, b1 = field overcurrent, b2 = gen. Undervoltage,
b3 = gen. Overvoltage, b4 = underfrequency, b5 = in OEL, b6 = in
UEL, b7 = in FCR mode, b8 = loss of sensing voltage, b9 = setpoint
at lower limit, b10 = setpoint at upper limit, b11 = unassigned, b12 =
gen. Below 10 Hz, b13 = field overtemperature, b14, b15 are
unassigned.
48042 Annunciation enable for Relay 1: 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled b0 = loss RW UI16
of field, b1 = in SCL, b2-b15 are unassigned


Data

48056 16th annunciation enable for Relay 1 - Reserved for future C12 data RW UI16
48057 Output for Relay 1: 0 = contact open / 1 = contact closed R UI16

48058 Relay 1 annunciation: 0 = momentary / 1 = maintained / 2 = latched RW UI16
48059 Relay 1 contact sense: 0 = closed for normal operation, open for RW UI16
annunciation; 1 = open for normal operation, closed for annunciation
48060 Relay 1 output duration for momentary type, adjustable 2 to 100 in RW UI16
unity increments (which is 0.1 to 5 seconds in 0.05-second
increments)
48061 b0 = field overvoltage, b1 = field overcurrent, b2 = gen. Undervoltage, RW UI16
b3 = gen overvoltage, b4 = underfrequency, b5 = in OEL, b6 = in
gen. Below 10 Hz, b13 = field overtemperature, b14-b15 are
unassigned.
48062 b0 = loss of field, b1 = in SCL, b2-b15 are unassigned RW UI16



48076 16th annunciation enable for Relay 2 – Reserved for future C12 data RW UI16

Data
48078 Relay 2 annunciation type: 0 = momentary / 1 = maintained / 2 = RW UI16
latched
48080 Relay 2 output duration for momentary type, adjustable from 2 to 100 RW UI16
in unity increments (which is 0.1 to 5 seconds in 0.05 second
increments)
48081 b0 = field overvoltage, b1 = field overcurrent, b2 = gen. Undervoltage, RW UI16
b3 = gen overvoltage, b4 = underfrequency, b5 = in OEL, b6 = in
gen. Below 10 Hz, b13 = field overtemperature, b14-b15 are
unassigned.
48082 b0 = loss of field, b1 = in SCL, b2-b15 are unassigned RW UI16



48096 16th annunciation enable for Relay 3 - Reserved for future C12 data RW UI16
48098 Relay 3 annunciation type: 0 = momentary / 1 = maintained / 2 = RW UI16

latched
48100 Relay 3 output duration for momentary type, adjustable from 2 to 100 RW UI16
in unity increments (which is 0.1 to 5 s in 0.05 s increments)


Data






Table 7-23. Information Category C13 (Communications Parameters)
Data
48161 Save data to EEPROM flags: RW UI16
0x0001 saves C4 and C6; 0x0002 saves C5 and C7; 0x0004 saves
C6; 0x0008 saves C5 and C7; 0x0010 saves C8; 0x0020 saves C9;
0x0040 saves C10; 0x0080 saves C11; 0x0100 saves C12; 0x0800
saves C14. (Changes in C13 are automatically saved.)
48162 Comm. Port 0, front RS-232, baud rate, selectable to be 1200, 2400, R UI16
4800, 9600, or 19200
48163 Comm. port 1, rear RS-232, baud rate, selectable to be 1200, 2400, R UI16
4800, 9600 or 19200
48164 Comm. port 2, rear RS-485, baud rate, selectable to be 1200, 2400, RW UI16
4800, 9600 or 19200

Data
48165 Comm. port 2, Rear RS-485, Parity: ‘O’ = 79 = 0x4F for Odd RW UI8
Parity,‘E’ = 69 = 0x45 for Even Parity, and ‘N’ = 78 = 0x4E for No
Parity
48166 Comm. port 2, Rear RS-485, stop bits, selectable to be 1 or 2 RW UI8
48167 DECS-200 polling address (Modbus slave address), selectable from RW UI16
1 to 247 (slave address)
48168 Modbus Response Time Delay, adjustable from 10 to 200 ms in 10 RW UI16
ms increments
48169 to Reserved for future C13 Not Not

Table 7-24. Information Category C14 (Front Panel Metering Configuration Parameters)
Data
st
48221 1 metering display field on the front panel metering screen: 0 to 14 RW UI16
nd
rd


Table 7-25. Information Category C15 (Control System Configuration Parameters Group II)
Data

48505-07 Reserved RW UI16
48505-08 Reserved RW UI16
48505-09, EDM Pole Ratio (1 to 10 in steps of 0.01, Enter 0 if unknown) RW R32_23

10


SECTION 8 ● MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
The only preventive maintenance required for the DECS-200 is the periodic checking of DECS-200
connections to ensure that they are clean and tight.
WARRANTY AND REPAIR SERVICE

DECS-200 units are manufactured using state-of-the-art, surface-mount technology. As such, Basler
Electric recommends that no repair procedures be attempted by anyone other than Basler Electric.
The DECS-200 is warranted against defective material and workmanship for 18 months from the date of
shipment from Basler Electric. Units submitted for warranty repair should be returned to Basler Electric’s
Highland, Illinois facility, freight prepaid, with a complete description of the application and the reported
problem. Prearrangement with either the nearest Basler Electric sales office or with the Technical Sales
Support department at Basler Electric will assure the fastest possible turnaround time.
TROUBLESHOOTING
The following troubleshooting procedures assume the excitation system components are properly
matched, fully operational, and correctly connected. If you do not obtain the results that you expect from
the DECS-200, first check the programmable settings for the appropriate function.
DECS-200 Appears Inoperative

If the DECS-200 does not power up (no backlighting on front panel display), ensure that the control power
applied to the unit is at the correct level. If dc control power is being used, verify that the polarity is
correct. Units with style number XL have an input voltage range of 16 to 60 Vdc. Units with style number
XC have an input voltage range of 90 to 150 Vdc or 82 to 132 Vac (50/60 Hz). If the correct control power
is being applied, return the unit to Basler Electric as described under Warranty and Repair Service.
NOTE
When both ac and dc control power is used, an isolation transformer must be
connected between the ac voltage source and the ac control power terminals of
the DECS-200.
Display Blank or Frozen

If the front panel display (LCD) is blank or frozen (does not scroll), remove control power for about 60
seconds and then reapply control power. If the problem occurred during software uploading, repeat the
upload procedures as described in the associated instructions. If the problem persists, return the unit to
Basler Electric as described under Warranty and Repair Service.
Generator Voltage Does Not Build

Check the DECS-200 settings and system voltages for the following:
a. Generator potential transformer (PT) primary voltage
b. Generator PT secondary voltage
c. AC voltage on the DECS-200 operating (bridge) power terminals (C5 (A), C6 (B), and C7 (C))
Check the DECS-200 soft start bias and soft start time settings. If necessary, increase the generator soft
start bias and decrease the generator soft start time.
If the generator voltage still does not build, increase the value of Kg.
Temporarily disable the overexcitation limiter.
Low Generator Voltage in AVR Mode

Check the following DECS-200 settings and system parameters:
a. AVR voltage setpoint
b. Generator potential transformer (PT) primary voltage
9360100990 Rev H DECS-200 Maintenance 8-1

c. Generator PT secondary voltage
d. Overexcitation limiter (not activated)
e. Accessory inputs (should be zero)
f. Var/PF and droop (should be disabled)
g. Cut-in underfrequency setting (should be below the generator operating frequency)
If the problem persists, contact the Basler Electric Technical Sales Support department for advice.
High Generator Voltage in AVR Mode

Check the following DECS-200 settings and system parameters:
a. AVR voltage setpoint
b. Generator potential transformer (PT) primary voltage
c. Generator PT secondary voltage
d. Accessory inputs (should be zero)
e. Var/PF and droop (should be disabled)
Generator Voltage Unstable (Hunting)

Verify that the exciter power converter is working correctly by substituting the appropriate battery voltage
in place of the DECS-200 drive voltage. If the problem is caused by the DECS-200, check the gain
settings for the specific mode of operation selected.
Protection or Limit Annunciation

If a protection function or limiting function is annunciated, check the associated setting values.
HMI Meter Readings Incorrect

If your PF, var, or watt readings are significantly different from the expected readings for a known load,
verify that the B-phase current sensing input of the DECS-200 is connected to a CT on phase B and not
phases A or C.
No Communication
If communication with the DECS-200 cannot be initiated, check the connections at the communication
ports, the baud rate, and supporting software.
DECS-200 Reboots Frequently

If a single DECS-200 control power source is used and the power source is supplying less than the
minimum required voltage or is fluctuating below the minimum required voltage, the DECS-200 will
reboot. Increase the control power source voltage so that it is within the specified operating range. Units
with style number XL have an input voltage range of 16 to 60 Vdc. Units with style number XC have an
input voltage range of 90 to 150 Vdc or 82 to 132 Vac (50/60 Hz).
8-2 DECS-200 Maintenance 9360100990 Rev H

ALTERNATORS
Drawings
SECTION 5
Drawings
Dedicated manuals for specific equipement
Generator unit
1. DRAWINGS
1.1 Find there the listing of the attached drawings :
Main dimensions EN 060 0149

Rotating part P1 060 0002
Terminal box BO 027 1722
Electrical nomenclature S4 601492

Manual 601492

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Manual 601492

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual 601492

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

v. 1.

Serial number 601492

Type LSA60 115

SECTION 0 VOLUME CONTENTS

SECTION 1 Generator Data Sheet

SECTION 2 TEST REPORT

SECTION 3 Service & Operating Manual

SECTION 4 Automatic Voltage Regulator

Generator Data Sheet

1. MACHINE TECHNICAL DATA

1.1 General characteristics

1.2 Excitation - Regulation

1.3 Stator protections

1.4 Not applicable

1.5 Not applicable

1.6 Sleeve bearing technical data

1.7 Drive end bearing Protection

1.8 Non drive end bearing Protection

1.9 Oil circulating system

1.10 Not applicable

2.1 To order spare parts

2.2 Recommanded spare parts

1. MACHINE TECHNICAL DATA

1.1 General characteristics

1.2 Excitation - Regulation

1.3 Stator protections

1.6 Sleeve bearing technical data

Axial clearance, bearing type Locating Non locating

1.7 Drive end bearing Protection

1.8 Non drive end bearing Protection

2.1 To order spare parts

2.2 Recommanded spare parts

Main data: Quantity

Reactances Unsaturated, (rated KVA): (%) time constants:

LSA 60 B 115 / 10p - 9194 - 13800V - 720 rpm

0,5 p.f. 0,6

0,1 p.f. 0,1 0,1 p.f.

Pacifica Rubiales rev. 1 Page 1

LSA 60 B 115 / 10p - 9194 - 13800V - 720 rpm

Stator current decrement curves Symmetrical phase to neutral short circuit

Isc (Per unit - rms) Symmetrical two phase short circuit

7 Heat damage curve

Pacifica Rubiales rev. 1 Page 2

LSA 60 B 115 / 10p - 9194 - 13800V - 720 rpm

Transient voltage dip curve versus load impact

Transient voltage rise curve versus load rejection

Pacifica Rubiales rev. 1 Page 3

LSA 60 B 115 / 10p - 9194 - 13800V - 720 rpm

C : Extensive dam age

Pacifica Rubiales rev. 1 Page 4

Service & Operating Manual

2.3.3 Maintenance of antifriction bearings

1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 2.4 SLEEVE BEARINGS (Plain)

3. VOLTAGE REGULATOR AND EXTERNAL 5. START-UP

7.1 GENERAL SERVICING

7.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING

7.3 ELECTRICAL TESTS

7.4 CLEANING THE WINDINGS

7.5 DRYING THE WINDING